Quarterlytics / Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc

Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc

ella.l · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker ella.l
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry
Employees 1353
← All annual reports
FY2014 Annual Report · Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Annual Report & Accounts 

2014

Together we will be the most 
trusted and ethical specialist 
financial services group, giving 
£50m to charity over three years.

Section 1 | Introduction

Section 4 | Financial Statements 

Key Highlights of 2014 

Who We Are 

What We Do 

Chairman’s Statement 

5

6

7

8

Section 2 | Strategic Report

Group Chief Executive’s Review  12

Trends in Financial Services 

Our Business Model 

Our Strategy 

Key Performance Indicators 

Financial Performance 

Risk Management 

16

18

21

36

42

46

Consolidated Statement 

of Profit or Loss  

121

Consolidated and Parent Statement 

of Comprehensive Income 

122

Consolidated and Parent Statement 

of Changes in Equity 

123

Consolidated and Parent Statement 

of Financial Position 

124

Consolidated and Parent Statement 

of Cash Flows  

Notes to the Financial  

Statements 

125

126

Section 5 | Other Information 

Corporate Responsibility Report  57

Directors and Executive Management 

Section 3 | Corporate Governance

United Kingdom Regional  

182

184

Centres  

United Kingdom Business Division 

and International Branches  

185

Insurance Subsidiaries  

and Agencies  

Notice of Meeting 

186

187

Board of Directors 

Directors’ Report 

Corporate Governance 

Group Finance and Investment 

Committee Report 

Group Nominations Committee 

Report 

Group Risk Committee Report 

70

72

76

80

82

86

Group Audit Committee Report  88

Group Remuneration Report 

94

Independent Auditor’s Report 

116

Photographs unless indicated are courtesy of Oskar Proctor and Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc.

 
S E C T I O N   O N E
Introduction

01

Key Highlights of 2014 

Who We Are 

What We Do 

Chairman’s Statement 

5

6

7

8

4
4    Section 1  Key Highlights of 2014

Key Highlights 
of 2014

Financial highlights

Profit/(Loss) before Tax £m

495

2014

494

2013

48

2014

456

2012

25.2

2014

Donations £m

Awards and recognition

67

2013

38

2012

Shareholders’ Funds £m

5.5

2013

5.7

2012

Follow us on Twitter: @EcclesNews 
Connect with us on LinkedIn, Facebook or YouTube

Section 1 Key Highlights of 2014

5  

01SECTIONWho We Are

We are a specialist financial services group with a distinctive ethical 
positioning supported by our reputation for delivering excellent service.  

In 1887, Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc was established to provide fire protection to Anglican churches. Over the past 127 years, 
our business has evolved and we now offer a range of specialist financial products and services to customers in selected markets.

We are owned by a registered charity, Allchurches Trust Limited (ATL).  A significant proportion of Ecclesiastical’s profits are given to 
ATL as grants. Ultimately, these grants are distributed to charitable causes and local communities. 

As a result of our company ethos and charitable giving, we are the UK’s eighth largest corporate donor to charity.*

*  UK Guide to Company Giving 2013/2014, published by the Directory of Social Change

FINANCIALLY SECURE

PROFESSIONAL

We maintain a strong capital base at all times,  
with regulatory capital cover at 2.9 times the 
required level at the end of 2014. 

Our entire UK insurance operation is accredited 
with chartered status, making us one of the few 
CII Chartered Insurers who have achieved this 
recognition.

STRONG EXPERTISE IN  
SPECIALIST MARKETS

ETHICALLY DRIVEN

We provide insurance for some of the most 
distinctive properties in the UK and abroad.  
These include castles, cathedrals, places of worship, 
heritage buildings, rural estates and stately homes. 
In the UK, we insure over 95% of Anglican churches. 

Over 26 years ago, we launched one of the UK’s 
first socially responsible retail funds. During 2014, 
our funds won 14 awards including the Moneyfacts 
Best Ethical Investment Provider for the sixth 
consecutive year.

We also insure almost all Anglican cathedrals and 
over half of the synagogues. We insure the highest 
number of Grade I listed buildings across  
all insurers.

We also insure 40,000 charities and community 
organisations.

TRUSTED TO DO THE RIGHT THING

According to independent research, 85% of brokers 
trust Ecclesiastical to do the right thing by its 
customers. This is significantly higher than the 
proportion of brokers (50%) who trust UK financial 
services to do the right thing.

6 Section 1  Who We Are

DEDICATED TO GIVING BACK

As the insurer of 40,000 charities and community 
organisations and because of our charitable ownership, 
we are dedicated to giving back to charitable causes.  

In January 2014, we set ourselves a new and ambitious 
Group-wide goal to give £50m to charity over three years. 
This will be the most we have ever given back to the 
charity and community over a three-year period.

At the end of 2014, we had almost reached the halfway 
mark by donating £23.5m to our charitable owner ATL.

What We Do

We are a specialist financial services group focusing on insurance,  
risk management, investment management, and broking and 
advisory services.
We have a distinctive ethical positioning supported by our reputation for delivering excellent services. Our products and services are 
marketed both directly and through intermediaries. 

The Group comprises three business divisions, operating primarily from the UK:

SPECIALIST INSURANCE

Ecclesiastical UK | Ansvar UK | Ansvar Australia | Ecclesiastical 
Canada | Ecclesiastical Ireland 

Our insurance businesses offer commercial insurance products and risk 
management services to customers in the charity, education, faith, heritage, and 
property investors markets. 

We also provide a limited range of specialist products including household insurance 
for members of the clergy and fine art insurance to the high net worth market. 

Our key expertise lies in valuing and protecting old and unusual properties, 
particularly those which are Grade I and Grade II listed. 

INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT

Ecclesiastical Investment Management (EIM) 

Our multi award-winning investment management team offers ethically screened 
and non-screened investment products to institutional customers (primarily in the 
charity and faith markets) and to retail customers.  

EIM manages the majority of the Group’s financial investments. 

BROKING AND ADVISORY

South Essex Insurance Brokers (SEIB) | Ecclesiastical Financial 
Advisory Services (EFAS) | Lycetts* * Part of Ecclesiastical Insurance Group (EIG) 

SEIB and Lycetts are specialist brokers who provide tailored insurance solutions to 
customers, particularly those who are in the high net worth, heritage, equine, farming, 
and specialist motor insurance sectors.

Lycetts and EFAS offer financial advice to businesses, customers and Church of 
England clergy.

Under the Perfect Choice brand, EFAS also markets and administers prepayment 
funeral plans.

Section 1  What We Do

7  

01SECTIONChairman’s 
Statement

2014 has seen Ecclesiastical transform its underlying results and rebuild 
the foundations for sustainable profit from its core business. Profit before 
tax of £48m is below that reported last year, but nevertheless a pleasing 
outcome with strong underwriting profits, the first reported for five years, 
supported by a more ‘normal’ investment return.

Canada has continued to deliver 
controlled growth, increasing gross 
written premium (GWP) by 7% (in local 
currency) this year, and also reported a 
strong underwriting profit following the 
challenging weather events of 2013.

We have much to do to achieve our 
ambition to be the most trusted and 
ethical specialist financial services group, 
but I am pleased with the progress made 
during 2014. I would particularly like to 
thank Mark Hews and Jacinta Whyte for 
the work they have done to transform our 
business since their appointments into 
their new roles during 2013.

I also thank our staff for all they have 
achieved over the last two years. The 
actions we have had to take to address 
business performance have meant 
significant change to our structures and 
ways of working. We have also had to 
reduce headcount to ensure our cost 
base remains sustainable, and it is never 
easy to lose valued colleagues under 
these circumstances. Great credit should 
go to our staff for the way they have 
responded to these challenges.

The underwriting profit of £9m 
generated a combined operating ratio 
(COR) of 95.9% and was driven by a 
turnaround in performance in each of our 
business units around the world, most 
of which delivered results ahead of our 
expectations for the year. In the UK, we 
have seen the reduction in liability claims 
frequency and severity that we expected 
and the property portfolio has continued 
to perform well.

While we have seen a return to 
underlying profitability in our liability book 
in the UK, we have taken the opportunity 
to strengthen further our reserves for 
physical and sexual abuse claims. We 
welcome the increase in transparency 
and openness that means victims 
of abuse feel able to come forward, 
and have taken the action we feel is 
necessary to ensure we are appropriately 
reserved for potential claims.

The transformation in Ireland’s results 
has been faster than expected, and 
I thank the Irish team for the quality 
and speed of their decision-making 
in addressing the past drivers of poor 
underwriting performance. Our Australian 
business has also delivered a marked 
turnaround in underwriting performance 
and is starting to rebuild scale with good-
quality new business wins. 

8 Section 1  Chairman’s Statement

During 2014 we have also strengthened 
our Board membership which has 
increased from nine members to eleven. 
In April 2014 we appointed Ian Campbell 
as Group Chief Financial Officer and 
Executive Director. Ian joined the Group 
in late 2012 as Group Finance Director 
and prior to that held senior finance roles 
at Cox Insurance, Aspen Insurance and 
Torus Insurance, focusing on property 
and casualty reinsurance and insurance. 

‘‘

I am committed to ensuring the 
effectiveness of the Board and 
as part of this process we have 
undertaken an external evaluation of 
the Board and its Committees. 

In September 2014 we also appointed 
Caroline Taylor as a Non-Executive 
Director of the Group. Caroline brings 
26 years’ experience in financial services 
and a strong track record in investment 
management, including global markets, 
and risk management.

I am committed to ensuring the 
effectiveness of the Board and as part 
of this process we have undertaken an 
external evaluation of the Board and 
its Committees. More detail on this can 
be found in the Group Nominations 
Committee Report starting on page 82. 
The profits we delivered over the last 
two years, combined with our continued 
capital strength, have meant that we 

have been able to pay a grant of £23.5m 
to our charitable owner, Allchurches 
Trust Limited, getting us almost halfway 
towards our goal of giving £50m to 
charity over three years.

The actions we have taken to address 
underwriting performance have meant a 
planned material reduction in GWP. We 
are content with this reduction, which 
has undoubtedly led to the increase 
in sustainable underlying underwriting 
results.

Looking ahead to 2015, there are a 
number of opportunities we wish to 
pursue and more information on these 
initiatives can be found in the Strategic 
Report which starts on page 11. We have 
significant headroom available in our core 
specialist areas and intend to pursue 
a disciplined approach to underwriting, 
maintaining our focus on the long-term 
stability and profitability of our business.

Last year I stated that the Board was 
satisfied that the Group’s strategic 
approach would deliver steady and 
measurable performance against 
its objectives. The results we have 
seen during 2014 demonstrate that 
our strategy, and the way it is being 
implemented, is starting to work. My 
fellow Directors and I have confidence 
that Ecclesiastical is now well placed to 
pursue successfully the opportunities 
and challenges that lie ahead and give 
back more to good causes.

Will Samuel 
Chairman

Section 1  Chairman’s Statement

9  

01SECTIONS E C T I O N   T W O
Strategic Report

02

Group Chief Executive’s Review 

Trends in Financial Services 

Our Business Model 

Our Strategy 

Key Performance Indicators 

Financial Performance 

Risk Management 

Corporate Responsibility Report 

12

16

18

21

36

42

46

57

Group Chief 
Executive’s Review

Just over one year ago, we set out a new vision for the Group.  
This was clear, stretching and inspirational. It was to work together to be 
the most trusted and ethical specialist financial services group, giving 
£50m to charity over three years.

That goal represented a step change 
for us, not just in terms of the quantum, 
but also in terms of clarity of focus. 
We are, in essence, underlining the 
benefits of being owned by a charity and 
emphasising the reason that so many of 
us work for and support Ecclesiastical 
Insurance Office plc. Put simply, this is 
to give help, support and money to those 
who need it most. This has been, and 
continues to be, a guiding light for every 
decision that we make.

Underpinning this ambitious goal has 
been a stretching set of business plans, 
alongside a radical Group-wide change 
programme, the main elements of which 
were set out in last year’s report.

When we look back at where we were 
as a Group one year ago, and review 
performance against these plans, we 
can view the overall progress as nothing 
short of transformational. Our 2014 
results are a profit before tax of £48.2m 
including an underwriting profit of £9.2m. 
The profits we have delivered have 
enabled us to pay grants of £23.5m to 
our charitable owner, Allchurches Trust 
Limited (ATL), as well as making other 
charitable donations directly to other 
great causes. Our progress in each of our 
strategic business divisions: Specialist 
Insurance; Investment Management; and 
Broking and Advisory, has also surpassed 
expectations for the year.

Most trusted  
specialist insurer

Each of our core underwriting areas 
saw an improvement in performance 
with every territory making a positive 
contribution. Our underwriting results  
were the best they have been for over  
five years.

In the UK we restructured our business 
to a regional basis and re-engaged with 
brokers through nationwide roadshows 
and specialist events, supported by new 
collateral. These initiatives saw us win 
key accounts across our specialist areas 
including heritage, charity and property 
investors. Underlying customer retention 
rates also held up for our core business.

Focusing on our strengths saw our 
property account again perform well, 
while liability performance improved 
markedly, albeit this was offset by an 
anticipated increase in abuse claims.  
We have also addressed our cost base 
to ensure that it is aligned with the new 
size and structure of the organisation. In 
January and February 2014, many of our 
customers were badly affected by the 
winter storms in the southern parts of 
the UK, and this gave us an opportunity 
to show how our values are reflected in 
the way we support our customers when 
they need us most. 

12 Section 2  Group Chief Executive’s Review

‘‘

We thank all our employees for their enormous 
contribution and commitment throughout what has been 
a year of extensive and, at times, unsettling change. They 
complete the year knowing that their efforts are already 
reaping rewards for those in need.

As part of our ongoing weather 
monitoring, our claims teams identified 
the potentially affected areas in advance 
of the floods happening and contacted 
many customers to give them proactive 
advice to support them in case of 
flooding.

After the events had occurred, we  
fast-tracked smaller claims and helped 
get our customers back into their homes 
as quickly as possible. Overall, 99% of 
customers affected by flooding were 
happy with the claims service that they 
had received from Ecclesiastical.

We are proud of our claims teams for 
this achievement in dealing with losses 
after events have occurred, but we are 
equally proud of our UK and international 
risk management teams who seek to 
prevent losses occurring in the first 
place. As the largest insurer of Grade I 
listed buildings in the UK, many of which 
are irreplaceable, we recognise that 
it is even more important than ever to 
provide extensive risk advice and support 
to ensure that our nation’s heritage is 
not endangered in the first place. We 
congratulate both teams on their work  
in 2014.

Turning to our overseas businesses, the 
Ireland team has instituted extensive 
change over the last two years after 

the liability account drove significant 
losses in the territory. The early 2014 
storms affected the profitability of 
the property account but due to the 
initiatives pursued, the Irish business 
has contributed consistent profits over 
the last three quarters and reported 
a positive return for the year. This is a 
remarkable achievement in such a short 
time for a territory that reported losses of 
£15.3m over the past two years. 

Our Australian business achieved an 
underlying underwriting profit in the 
year, when excluding the impact of 
movements in discount rates. This is 
again a transformation given underwriting 
losses of £9.4m over the last two years 
and is testimony to the development and 
execution of a business-wide change 
programme by the new leadership team. 
Both the property and liability portfolios 
have performed as expected in 2014, 
and although falling discount rates led 
to a reported underwriting loss overall; 
this latter component was offset by 
corresponding positive asset growth.

In Canada we also saw a return to 
underwriting profits as the territory did 
not suffer the same level of weather 
events it experienced in 2013. Work to 
deliver a new administration platform 
continues at pace. Premiums grew 
7% before translation as good-quality 

business continues to be identified and 
won by the team. 

Gross written premiums have fallen 
by 16% in the year across the Group 
following the actions we have taken 
to address underwriting performance. 
Retention of business in our core 
niches remained strong and we are 
strengthening our relationships with 
customers and brokers to support our 
aim for controlled profitable growth over 
the medium term.

Best ethical  
investment provider

Our Investment Management division 
continues to go from strength to 
strength, with both our funds and our 
managers winning awards for investment 
performance and our ethical approach. 
Gross inflows for 2014 totalled £292m, 
a record figure for a single year. Our 
performance was strong within a volatile 
investment market and this has been 
demonstrated by our 2014 net inflows 
totalling close to £100m for a second 
year in a row. Funds under management 
have now passed £2.3 billion.

Section 2  Group Chief Executive’s Review

13

02SECTIONSECTIONDuring 2014 we delivered a new IT back-office platform and 
also worked with our outsource partners to improve the way 
we work together. The cost and efficiency savings captured 
by these initiatives helped to drive the strong profit before tax 
of £3.2m in 2014, a new record. Our investment management 
team moved into new offices in the City of London at the start 
of 2015 which will provide a better environment for growing the 
business.

In parallel, the investment returns on our general insurance 
funds were £33m. This was down on last year (£65m), when 
world markets saw particularly strong returns (FTSE All Share 
Index return of 20.8% compared to 1.2% in 2014), and we 
believe this reflects a more normal return on our portfolio.

Most trusted specialist adviser

South Essex Insurance Brokers (SEIB), our insurance broker, 
continued to grow and provide a stable flow of income for 
the Group. We acquired the specialist broking firm Lansdown 
Insurance Brokers, which has widened our broker proposition 
to include new specialist areas. Profit before tax grew to 
just over £3m for 2014, supported in part by this successful 
acquisition and the synergies that are starting to flow. Our team 
of fully independent advisors, Ecclesiastical Financial Advisory 
Services (EFAS), continues to review and refine their offering 
to the Anglican clergy, and closer operational links are being 
developed between our advisory and broking businesses.

For a more detailed analysis of our financial results, please see 
the Financial Performance section later on in this Strategic 
Report, starting on page 42.

Working together for the  
greater good

Our vision, goals and how we intend to achieve them sets us 
apart from other financial services companies. We wish to 
work together, for the greater good, by living up to the highest 
standards of values and ethics. We share the same values as 
our charitable owner, which allows us to work towards these 
goals in a way that delivers real benefit to our colleagues, our 
customers, our charities and our communities. We are not driven 
by growth; we are driven by doing the right thing. In the long 
term, we believe this approach will drive ethical and sustainable 
growth. This belief is being encapsulated, for the first time in 
2015, by including ethical conduct measures as a material 
element of our Group bonus calculation, as well as incorporating 
them into our long-term incentive plan (LTIP). We have set a 
high bar for the behaviour we expect from ourselves and our 
colleagues and recognise that achieving these standards should 
be rewarded.

We are also launching a ‘Greater Giving Programme’ in early 
2015 to build on the best of what Ecclesiastical already does, to 
tie us more closely to our markets and to encompass our new 
approach to life. This framework will highlight and emphasise 
our giving to our charitable owner, our giving to good causes, our 
giving to our customers (in terms of the ethical and fair products 

and services we provide), our giving to our communities (via 
opportunities for our employees to volunteer), and our giving to 
our employees (in terms of reward, training, development and 
our working environment). More information on our new Greater 
Giving Programme can be found in the Corporate Responsibility 
Report on page 65.

In addition, it was pleasing to see that our Canadian business 
was recognised as being one of Canada’s Top 100 Employers 
for Young People for the third successive year. This highlights 
the Group’s philosophy of seeking to invest heavily in the 
development and training of our employees, ensuring we have 
a high calibre professional workforce aligned behind our goals. 
Our doors are always open to talented like-minded individuals 
who share these aspirations.

Looking ahead to 2015

Our capital strength has been maintained throughout the 
challenges of the last few years and our net assets have ended 
the year at £495m, after payment of grants to ATL. Available 
capital relative to our regulatory capital requirements remains 
very strong.

This financial strength, alongside our committed ethical 
approach, gives us robust foundations upon which we can build 
and invest, as well as face challenges from the competitive 
environment in which we operate.

The transformation delivered in 2014 represents an important 
step in Ecclesiastical’s history. It is a moment where the Group 
has successfully changed the course of its underwriting 
performance, and there is increasing energy and passion around 
our new vision, both from within and outside the Group.

In 2015 we wish to build on this success and increase our 
momentum. We have clear and consistent business plans. 
We have an ambitious Group-wide change programme part 
implemented, and we have an increasingly high-performing, 
aligned team, with ethics running through their bloodstream, 
working hard to make a difference. We thank all our employees 
for their enormous contribution and commitment throughout 
what has been a year of extensive and, at times, unsettling 
change. They complete the year knowing that their efforts are 
already reaping rewards for those in need. Equally, we thank 
our customers and our business partners whom we seek to 
serve, and serve extremely well. It is only with their ongoing loyal 
support that we can give so much to good causes and build our 
combined momentum, working together for the greater good.

Mark Hews
Group Chief Executive

14 Section 2  Group Chief Executive’s Review

S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

02

Section 2  Group Chief Executive’s Review

15

Trends in 
Financial Services

As a Group with a number of different operations across a number of sectors, we have a unique perspective on the trends 
across the financial services industry. The trends we believe will affect our business going forward and our response to these are 
discussed below. More detailed information can be found on a number of these topics within the strategic report that follows.

Trend

Our perspective

Our response

Regulation

Regulation will continue to 
have a significant impact on 
the financial services sector. It 
is expected that the regulators’ 
focus will increasingly be on 
transparency and governance.

Customer centricity will be key 
to ensure successful navigation 
of these regulatory requirements. 
Achieving success will require 
businesses to increase further 
the level of management focus; 
invest in developing the right 
organisational culture; and 
ensure they have the necessary 
systems and processes in place.

 ■ With the Solvency II deadline approaching, delivery 
of our plans is well advanced and they include an 
enhanced reporting suite and sophisticated  
capital model.

 ■ We have an eye on future regulatory requirements 
and preparations have begun for the EU Insurance 
Mediation Directive (IMD2), and the planned 
update to Markets in Financial Instruments Directive 
(MiFID2). We are also well placed to respond to any 
regulatory developments concerning the distribution 
model in our Broking and Advisory division.

 ■ Customers are already at the centre of our business.  
We believe that the culture, ethics and values of our 
Group mean that we are ready to respond to the 
growing regulatory demands for greater transparency 
and increased customer focus in financial services.

Continuing 
developments 
in information 
technology  
and data 
analytics

Across the industry, businesses 
are seeking to improve their 
understanding of customer data. 
These insights could include 
behaviour, business mix and risk 
performance. They are expected 
to lead to enhanced risk 
selection and better risk pricing.

In addition, businesses will 
continue to invest in systems 
and technology to improve their 
operational cost-effectiveness.

 ■ We are actively reviewing our IT strategy for core 
systems and our investment team has begun to 
replace its core operating platform.

 ■ Enhancements are being made to our pricing 

capabilities, including increased sophistication of 
risk pricing and the recruitment of a new team.

 ■ Work is ongoing to understand the further 

opportunities that analytics could offer. Other 
initiatives include enhancing survey capability and 
enriched management information in our Broking 
and Advisory division.

16 Section 2  Trends in Financial Services

S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

02

Changing 
demographic 
and social 
trends and 
increased 
customer 
expectations

Across our key markets, 
demographics and social profiles 
are changing. Customers are 
increasingly sophisticated and 
expect their financial services 
providers to offer tailored 
products that meet their 
particular needs. Increasing 
ethnic diversity will provide 
further opportunities in our core 
faith segments.

 ■ We will further deepen our insights into  

distributor and customer needs in all our businesses 
through comprehensive customer and market  
insight programmes.

 ■ We will continue to implement customer and broker 
engagement and retention programmes across 
all businesses. These include a newly launched 
enhanced proposition for our ‘Select Brokers’ and 
a new offering for not-for-profit organisations and 
social enterprises. 

 ■ Our broker businesses will continue to look at 
developing opportunities in new and emerging 
markets.

Consistently  
low trust  
in  
financial  
services

Consumer trust of financial 
services is expected to stay low. 
Businesses are looking for ways 
to build trusted relationships 
with their customers - according 
to PwC research, only 27% 
of customers trust insurance 
companies.

In a recent survey, Ecclesiastical 
was trusted to do the right thing 
by 75% of brokers, compared 
to 50% of brokers who thought 
UK financial services businesses 
would do the right thing.

 ■ Our vision is to become the most trusted and  

ethical specialist financial services group, which we 
aim to achieve by building on the strong ethics,  
values and culture that exist within the business. 

 ■ We take corporate responsibility very seriously, and 
are already a Top 10 UK corporate donor. Recently 
we established our Greater Giving Programme and 
have publicly announced our intention to give £50m to 
charity over three years.

Climate  
change

Over the past few decades, the 
world’s climate has continued 
to change with greater weather 
instability and an increased 
incidence of major events.

Alternative energy sources are 
being sought and businesses’ 
carbon footprints are coming 
under scrutiny.

 ■ As a Group we are seeking to understand the 

longer-term impact of the changing global climate, 
including disruptions to weather patterns and the 
implications for our property business.

 ■ Our immediate response to climate change is 
designed to support our customers, offering 
proactive assistance as needed. This includes 
deepening our understanding of flood risks, 
and increased risk detection including proactive 
monitoring in high-risk areas.

 ■ Our broker businesses have developed expertise in 
renewable energy across many sources, including 
anaerobic digestion, biomass, geothermal and wind.

Section 2 Trends in Financial Services

17

Our Business 
Model

As a result of our charitable ownership and our provenance in 
protecting the nation’s churches, Ecclesiastical has a unique 
position in the UK financial services sector. This charitable ethos 
underpins the culture and ethics of our business, enhancing the 
Group’s reputation as a brand that can be trusted by customers and 
business partners alike. 

Together with our excellent customer service, this leads to high 
levels of customer loyalty which is a key driver for the profit 
generated for our owner, ATL.

Across the Group, Ecclesiastical aims to create value, taking advantage 
of the factors which differentiate us from our competitors.

Our ambition is to be the most 
trusted and ethical specialist 
financial services group, giving  
£50m to charity over three years. 

In order to support this ambition, our business  
model is designed to enable us to deliver  
exceptional service to our customers and business 
partners and also ensure our business remains  
stable and sustainable over the very long term.  

Profits 
to 
Charity

Strong 
Customer 
Loyalty

Unique 
Ownership

Trusted 
Brand

Strong 
Ethics and 
Culture

Good 
Reputation

18 Section 2  Our Business Model

Our business model supports our aim of 
delivering long-term value. 

Focus  
on specialist 
markets

Actively  
manage  
risk exposure

Manage capital 
and invest 
prudently

Deliver 
exceptional 
customer service

We focus on those 
markets where 
we can bring our 
experience and 
expertise to bear.

We maintain 
a disciplined 
approach to risk 
selection, portfolio 
management and 
pricing. We provide 
risk management 
advice to help our 
customers reduce 
their likelihood  
of losses.

We hold sufficient 
capital and 
structure our 
reinsurance 
programme 
and investment 
strategy to ensure 
we can meet 
customers’ needs 
at all times. We 
only invest in 
businesses  
that are  
meeting, or have 
the potential to 
meet, the Group’s 
return on  
capital target.

We act in a way 
that builds trust 
with our customers 
and seek to be 
recognised for 
fairness and 
providing a 
consistently  
high level of 
service that 
anticipates and 

meets  
customer  
and business  
partner 
expectations.

People and culture

Deliver  
sustainable  
profit to 
support  
charitable  
giving.

We seek to attract and retain high-performing staff and invest in their development  
to ensure Group businesses maintain their competitive edge. 

We aim to be seen as a ‘go to’ employer for professionals looking to pursue 
careers in the core technical disciplines of financial services businesses.

Section 2  Our Business Model

19

02SECTIONSECTION20 Section 2  Our Strategy

Our Strategy 

Together we will be the most trusted and ethical specialist financial 
services group, giving £50m to charity over three years.
The Group is a distinctive commercial organisation with an ethical 
dimension to its business operations. 

Our ambition is to be: 

The Most Trusted 
Specialist Insurer

The Most Trusted  
Specialist Adviser

The Best Ethical 
Investment Provider 

This will be achieved by delivering a number of initiatives 
to leverage and further strengthen our strategic assets: 

The deep expertise  
and experience 
in each of the Group’s 
business divisions

The strength of our 
relationship 
with the Church of 
England

Our ethics and culture 
which underpin 
our thinking and  
business approach

Our brand and  
reputation that is  
trusted by customers  
and business  
partners alike

Our charitable  
ownership, which  
acts as a differentiator  
in certain areas  
of the market

Together our strategic assets enable the Group’s businesses to build 
strong relationships with customers and business partners.

Left: Image courtesy of TWM and St Andrews Church - Churchdown.

21

02SECTIONSection 2  Our StrategySECTIONMost trusted 
specialist insurer

We aim to be the most trusted specialist insurer, offering unrivalled 
expertise and knowledge in our core sectors, excellent claims  
service and the best products in the market meeting all our 
customers’ needs.

How we are planning to achieve this:

■  Keep customers’ interests at the heart of the way we do business

■  Retain our focus on profitable business lines, leveraging the reshaped business model across the Australian, Irish and UK 

operations while continuing to build the Canadian business

■  Continue to focus on building stronger relationships with brokers through a range of initiatives including joint activities to retain 

significant business

 ■  Continue to invest in our skills and capabilities, particularly in the key areas of risk management, underwriting and claims 

management.

Strategy in action

 ■  We have continued to focus on our core sectors with a refreshed risk appetite, underpinning our efforts to enhance 
profitability across our general insurance businesses. More information can be found on our risk appetite in the Risk 
Management Report on page 47.

 ■  During the year we appointed a new CEO, Warren Hutcheon, to Ansvar Australia.

 ■  Despite Australia having experienced a number of severe weather events, the business has significantly improved 

its underwriting performance as a result of improvements in the skills and capabilities of the Australian team and the 
implementation of new reinsurance arrangements on the property account. Further information on how we manage 
our reinsurance risk can be found in the Credit and Reinsurance Risk sections of the Risk Management Report which 
starts on page 49.

 ■  In Canada, we have emphasised trilateral relationships with our brokers and customers, the benefits of which can be 

seen through the 94% retention rate achieved across our key market segments.

 ■  A programme of corrective actions together with a refreshed risk appetite has delivered a return to profitability ahead 

of schedule for Ecclesiastical Ireland.

 ■  During 2014 we have delivered a number of strategic initiatives to transform our UK business. We now have a new 

leadership team in place, supported by a reshaped business model and regional underwriting hubs.

22 Section 2  Our Strategy

Highlights

Our campaign to reduce theft of metal - ‘Hands Off Our 
Church Roofs’ - won the inaugural CII Public Interest 
Award for the best campaign in the public interest.

We won the 2014 Post Magazine Awards  
in the Training category for our specialist  
property claims training.

Ecclesiastical Canada was named one of  
Canada’s 2014 Top Employers for Young People for 
the third successive year.

In a survey of brokers (carried out by research agency 
FWD), we were considered Best Insurer for charity, 
education and commercial heritage. We have retained 
this position for the eighth consecutive year.

Section 2  Our Strategy

23

02SECTIONSECTIONy
d
u
t
s
e
s
a
C

Strengthening 
our position  
in heritage

In late 2014 the Group secured a new long-term deal for the 
insurances of the Royal Albert Hall in London. 

The Royal Albert Hall was to be the centrepiece of the vision of Prince Albert 
(Queen Victoria’s consort) to establish an area promoting understanding and 
appreciation of the Arts and Sciences. Since opening in 1871, this Grade I  
listed building has been in continuous use.

Retaining this prestigious building was achieved as a result of strong relationships 
with both the broker and customer; our risk management, underwriting and claims 
expertise; and delivering an exemplary service. Through trilateral dialogue between 
the Royal Albert Hall, their broker Willis Group Holdings and our expert teams of 
surveyors and underwriters, we were able to offer a number of enhancements that 
better reflected the nature of the business and its exposures.

24 Section 2  Our Strategy

 
S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

02

y
d
u
t
s
e
s
a
C

Helping our 
customers to 
cope with the 
winter storms

In January and February 2014, many of our customers were badly 
affected by the winter storms in the southern parts of the UK.

Throughout 2014 our claims teams handled over five times as many claims as the 
previous year. As part of our ongoing weather monitoring, our claims teams identified 
the potentially affected areas in advance of the floods happening and contacted 
many customers to give them proactive advice to support them in case of flooding.

We fast-tracked smaller claims and helped get our customers back into their homes 
as quickly as possible and 99% of our customers affected by flooding were happy 
with the claims service that they had received from Ecclesiastical.

“The mass flooding of the Somerset Levels highlighted ‘The Good, The Bad 
and The Ugly’ of insurance companies in how they dealt with flood victims... We 
are delighted to say that, in our opinion, Ecclesiastical was excellent. From the 
moment we called, you dealt with our claim in a most efficient and understanding 
way. We thank you, once again, for giving us back our home and our lives after 
what was a fairly traumatic experience.”

John and Lesley Parker

Section 2  Our Strategy

25

 
y
d
u
t
s
e
s
a
C

Rebuilding  
after fire 
damage

26 Section 2  Our Strategy

Cholderton House is a large privately-owned detached Grade II 
listed manor house which was built in 1690.

In March 2012, a fire was discovered in a ground floor room. Despite the presence 
of 12 fire engines, the blaze destroyed most of the house and caused extensive 
smoke damage. The occupants of the house escaped unhurt.

The rebuilding programme took two years to complete due to the need for a lengthy 
drying out period, the extensive nature of the damage and the intricacies of the 
restoration work. Several original features of the property were salvaged for use in 
the restored property including fireplaces.

“On the fateful day of the devastating fire at Cholderton House, I was frankly 
amazed at the response of Ecclesiastical. I wanted to be able to take the strain 
away from my bewildered mother, who was in a state of complete shock... In turn, 
my hand was held by Ecclesiastical, and over the coming months, I was guided by 
the most compassionate team.” David Cornelius-Reid

“For us, managing a claim like this is not just about getting a house rebuilt, but 
also about supporting our customer through a tragedy with as much care and 
compassion as possible.”   
Sarah Cox, Technical Property Claims Manager at Ecclesiastical

 
S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

02

Section 2  Our Strategy

27

Most trusted 
specialist adviser

We aim to be the most trusted specialist adviser in the markets we 
operate in by providing our customers with the best independent 
and impartial financial advice meeting their needs.

How we are planning to achieve this:

 ■ Provide an excellent service to our customers and their insurers by building long-term sustainable relationships 
 ■ Strengthen our proposition through further deepening of our expertise in our chosen segments, cementing our position as 

market leaders in these areas 

 ■ Build our business for growth through the development of new offerings and schemes which complement our existing niche 

markets and also give us the opportunity to enter into new market segments 

 ■ Identify opportunities for non-organic growth including potential acquisition targets 
 ■ Develop closer operational links between our businesses within the wider Group in order to offer solutions to meet our 

customers’ needs 

 ■ Continue enhancing our processes in order to achieve CII Chartered Status for our broking businesses.

Strategy in action

 ■  SEIB has been in business for over 50 years. From January 2015 we have rebranded to SEIB  

Insurance Brokers to reflect our national reach.

 ■  Significant progress has been made in integrating SEIB and Lansdown Insurance Brokers with the 

completion expected to finish during 2015. Joint sales and marketing planning has been underway since 
mid-2014.

 ■  A new scheme has been launched focusing on country pubs with restaurants. 

 ■  Our fully independent advisory team, EFAS, continues to review and refine their offering to the Anglican 

clergy.

 ■  Closer operational links are being developed between our broking businesses; for example EFAS  
Funeral Plans (using the Perfect Choice brand) now reports into SEIB, thus providing a more  
integrated offering to the National Association of Funeral Directors.

28 Section 2  Our Strategy

Highlights

During April 2014, we acquired the specialist broking firm 
Lansdown Insurance Brokers, which has widened our 
broker proposition to include new specialist areas including 
a scheme for Michelin-starred restaurants.

In the 2014 UK Broker Awards, SEIB was highly 
commended in the Schemes Broker of the Year category 
and was shortlisted in the Claims Service category.

SEIB was shortlisted for Fleet Provider of the Year in the 
2014 Commercial Insurance Awards.

Community activity is very important to SEIB, with regular 
fundraising and participation in charity events. This 
commitment has been recognised as SEIB has been 
shortlisted for the Post Magazine’s Community Award.

Section 2  Our Strategy

29

02SECTIONSECTIONy
d
u
t
s
e
s
a
C

Supporting 
the needs of 
the equestrian 
community  
for almost  
50 years

We began arranging horse insurance almost 50 years ago when 
the Managing Director of SEIB was unable to find cover for his new 
show horse. The depth of expertise we now possess enables us to 
offer the full range of equine cover: from horses to individuals such 
as grooms, farriers and blacksmiths, through to riding clubs, equine 
charities, livery yards plus equine shows and events.

We staff an in-house 24-hour support line which gives our clients the ability to 
receive immediate claims advice or insure a new horse anytime. We understand the 
needs of the equine community, whether the horses are seen as an asset or as a 
member of the family. The SEIB team includes many horse owners and riders thus 
they understand fully the emotional investment owning a horse entails.

Our expertise has allowed us to provide advice on the complexities of liability cover 
for equestrians. We have raised awareness of liability management, including the 
creation of risk management packs for businesses such as riding schools and livery 
yards. Many customers were unaware of how to put a risk management programme 
in place to protect their business against claims for liability and have said that 
they have benefited from our expertise and deep knowledge of both horses and 
businesses.

SEIB is able to offer products that provide reassurance to thousands of equestrians 
and equestrian businesses. Our market-leading position in the equine community is 
underpinned by our role as the equine insurance partner for many groups including 
the British Horse Society, World Horse Welfare and the British Equestrian  
Trade Association.

30 Section 2  Our Strategy

 
Section 2  Our Strategy

31

02SECTIONSECTIONBest ethical 
investment provider

We aim to be the best ethical investment provider and thought 
leader in socially responsible investment by further enhancing our 
own ethical credentials and proposition and by leading the debate 
on ethical investment issues that matter to our customers.

How we are planning to achieve this:

 ■ Maintain the industry-leading reputation of our socially responsible investment funds
 ■ Continue to deliver strong and above average long-term investment performance for all our funds
 ■ Develop and deepen our institutional fund offering, with a focus on the charity funds segment
 ■ Continue the upgrade of our IT capabilities to provide a platform for growth
 ■ Further refine our customer service, in readiness for the changing needs of the regulator and our customers.

Strategy in action

 ■  Our investment team has a depth of knowledge in the socially responsible investment market, with over 25 
years’ experience. Our team was one of the first to launch a socially responsible investment fund for retail.

 ■  Our pooled funds total exceeded £1 billion at the end of 2014, reaching a new milestone for our 

investment management business.

 ■  The growth in our pooled funds was achieved as a result of sustained outperformance across many of our 

funds, combined with our leading profile in the socially responsible investment market.

 ■  2014 saw a further strengthening of the capabilities within the investment business and this was 

demonstrated by greater investment in front-office people, processes and IT systems.  This increased 
investment will continue into 2015.

32 Section 2  Our Strategy

Highlights

Gross inflows for 2014 totalled £291.5m,  
a record figure for a single year in our investment 
management business.

£97.5m

Our performance was strong within a volatile  
investment market and this has been demonstrated  
by our 2014 net inflows totalling £97.5m.

£97.5m

During 2014, our funds and fund managers continued 
to achieve industry recognition, receiving 14 awards and 
accolades, most notably:

The MoneyFacts Best Ethical Investment Provider of the 
Year Award for a remarkable sixth consecutive year

Investment Week’s UK Growth Fund Manager of the Year 
for Andrew Jackson and his UK Equity Growth Fund

We received the highest recognition across  
all players in ethical investments in NMG Consulting’s  
2014 survey.

Our investment management team moved into new  
offices in the City of London during 2015, thus providing  
a further platform for growing the business.

Section 2  Our Strategy

33

02SECTIONSECTIONy
d
u
t
s
e
s
a
C

Consistent 
quality 
performance

The Higher Income Fund was launched just over 20 years ago  
in November 1994. 

Since its inception, the fund has been adeptly managed by Robin Hepworth.  
It has achieved consistent top quartile performance over its lifetime and continues to 
outperform the market. In 2014, our Higher Income Fund was our largest  
selling fund.

34 Section 2  Our Strategy

 
Section 2  Our Strategy

35

02SECTIONSECTIONKey 
Performance 
Indicators 

Financial

Donations 

Measure

The amount donated 
by Ecclesiastical to 
charities and our 
charitable owner 
each year. This is the 
main measure of our 
ambition, which is to 
give £50m to charity 
over three years.

Performance

£m

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

Donations

Profit/loss before tax

SPECIAL 
GRANT

10.0

10.6

2010

11.7

2011

5.7

2012

5.5

2013

25.2

2014

50

2010

-8

2011

38

2012

67

2013

48

2014

PRA capital and ECR cover

Combined Operating Ratio

The ordinary grant to ATL in 2013 reflected challenging underwriting performance.
£m

In 2014, a grant of £8.5m was made in relation to 2013 and a further £15m in response to the

PRA Capital

ECR

improved underwriting performance and continued investment return this year. The remaining  
£1.7m of donations was made to other charitable causes.

400

36 Section 2  Key Performance Indicators

300

200

100

0

3.0 x

3.1 x

2.7 x

2.6 x

2.9 x

387

2010

353

2011

362

2012

371

2013

379

2014

102

105

109

103

96

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

£m

100

50

0

%

85

95

105

115

Donations

Profit/loss before tax

£m

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

£m

400

300

200

100

0

SPECIAL 

GRANT

10.0

10.6

2010

11.7

2011

5.7

2012

5.5

2013

25.2

2014

50

2010

-8

2011

38

2012

67

2013

48

2014

S E C T I O N

02

PRA capital and ECR cover

PRA Capital

ECR

Combined Operating Ratio

3.0 x

3.1 x

2.7 x

2.6 x

2.9 x

387

2010

353

2011

362

2012

371

2013

379

2014

102

105

109

103

96

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

£m

100

50

0

%

85

95

105

115

PRA capital and ECR cover*

Measure

The capital resources 
available to meet 
the Prudential 
Regulation Authority’s 
(PRA) regulatory 
requirements.

The Enhanced Capital 
Requirement (ECR) is 
a risk- based statistical 
calculation based on 
the business written 
and assets held.

ECR coverage is the 
ratio of PRA capital 
available to meet this 
requirement.

Our target is to exceed 
regulatory capital 
requirements at all 
times.

Donations

Profit/(loss) before tax* 

Profit/loss before tax

Performance

PRA capital has increased during the year due to a reduction in assets deemed inadmissible 
for PRA solvency purposes, together with an increase in the net asset value for a number  
of our subsidiary holdings.

Our ECR coverage has increased due to a reduction in our capital requirement. This was 
mainly due to a decrease in our exposure to insurance risk because of the reduction in  
gross written premiums during the year.

Ecclesiastical continues to maintain its capital strength, despite the  
recent period of economic instability and volatility for the  
insurance industry.

£m

100

50

0

Performance

50

2010

-8

2011

38

2012

67

2013

48

2014

The Group’s profit in 2013 was a result of strong investment returns, supporting an 
underwriting loss.
%

Total profit fell in 2014 but it was underpinned by a return to underwriting profit, supported 
by another good year of investment returns and continued contributions  
from our Broking and Advisory division.

85

Combined Operating Ratio

More information on underwriting performance is given below.

See the Financial Performance Report on page 42 for  
more details.

95

105

109

102

103

96

Section 2  Key Performance Indicators

37

10.6

2010

11.7

2011

5.7

2012

5.5

2013

25.2

2014

PRA capital and ECR cover

PRA Capital

ECR

Measure

The Group’s profit 
or loss (excluding 
discontinued 
operations) before 
deduction of tax.

Each year refreshed 
targets are set in 
relation to the Group’s 
business plans for 
profit before tax. 
Details of the target 
that was set for 2014 
can be found in the 
Group Remuneration 
Report on page 112. 
Our medium-term 
target is to generate 
sufficient profit to 
enable us to give 
£50m to charity over 
three years.

SPECIAL 

GRANT

10.0

£m

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

£m

400

300

200

100

0

3.0 x

3.1 x

2.7 x

2.6 x

2.9 x

387

2010

353

2011

362

2012

371

2013

379

2014

105

115

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

SPECIAL 

GRANT

10.0

£m

30

25

20

15

10

5

0

£m

400

300

200

100

0

Donations

Profit/loss before tax

£m

100

50

0

10.6

2010

11.7

2011

5.7

2012

5.5

2013

25.2

2014

50

2010

-8

2011

38

2012

67

2013

48

2014

PRA capital and ECR cover

Combined operating ratio (COR)*

Combined Operating Ratio

PRA Capital

ECR

3.0 x

3.1 x

2.7 x

2.6 x

2.9 x

387

2010

353

2011

362

2012

371

2013

379

2014

%

85

95

105

115

102

105

109

103

96

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

Performance

The improvements we started to see in our underwriting result in 2013, following actions 
taken across our core business areas, continued in 2014. The ratio remains below our 
longer-term target, primarily driven by the strengthening of reserves for abuse liability  
claims, but we are encouraged by the turnaround in performance.

See the Financial Performance Report on page 42 for more details.

Measure

The sum of 
Ecclesiastical’s general 
insurance incurred 
losses and expenses 
divided by earned 
premiums for each 
financial year.

Each year refreshed 
targets are set in 
relation to the Group’s 
business plans for the 
Group COR. Details 
of the target that was 
set for 2014 can be 
found in the Group 
Remuneration Report 
on page 112. Our 
target over the longer 
term is to achieve a 
95% COR.

Gross written premium (GWP)* 

Gross Written Premium

Net Expense Ratio

Measure

The total value of 
general insurance and 
life insurance policies 
that have been written 
during the year.

We do not have 
a specific growth 
target, but our aim is 
to achieve moderate 
growth of around 5% 
in our selected markets 
over the long term, 
with our focus on the 
quality of the business 
we write.

£m

500

400

300

200

100

495

2010

484

2011

481

2012

399

2013

329

2014

35

2010

39

2011

40

2012

36

2013

40

2014

£m

45

40

35

30

25

Performance

Net Inflows

%

GWP continued to fall in 2014 as the decision to reposition ourselves and focus on  
Budget
business where we can leverage our underwriting expertise took effect. We are targeting 
moderate controlled growth going forward, aiming for profitable business that matches  
our risk profile. See the Financial Performance Report on page 42 for more details.  
More information on our risk management processes can be  
found starting on page 46.

Actual

200

150

38 Section 2  Key Performance Indicators

100

50

0

113

2010

142

2011

51

2012

102

2013

98

2014

£m

500

400

300

200

100

%

200

150

100

50

0

Gross Written Premium

Net expense ratio* 

S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

02

Net Expense Ratio

495

2010

484

2011

481

2012

399

2013

329

2014

Net Inflows

Actual

Budget

Measure

Total expenses as a 
proportion of the net 
premium earned in the 
year. These expenses 
include acquisition 
costs, administration 
costs, the movement 
in deferred acquisition 
costs and commission 
paid less commission 
received.

Our aim is to 
make year-on-year 
improvements in the 
net expense ratio.

£m

45

40

35

30

£m
25

500

35

2010

39

2011

40

2012

36

2013

40

2014

Gross Written Premium

Net Expense Ratio

Performance

400

Our net expense ratio increased in 2014 to 40%, with a 22% fall in  
earned premium offsetting a 13% decrease in net expenses. The impact of recent 
efficiency programmes and improved commission agreements was seen in the lower 
expense base.

300

£m

45

40

35

30

25

35

2010

39

2011

40

2012

36

2013

40

2014

Continued expense management and achieving the expected  
controlled growth in premiums should result in the net expense  
ratio starting to fall going forward.

495

484

481

200

100

2010

2011

2012

113

2010

142

2011

51

2012

102

2013

98

2014

Net inflows (investments)*

399

2013

329

2014

Net Inflows

Actual

Budget

%

200

150

100

50

0

Measure

Net inflows are the 
difference between 
the gross sales and 
redemptions made 
during the period 
from third parties in 
the range of funds 
our Investment 
Management division 
offers. Each year 
refreshed targets 
are set which take 
into account current 
market conditions 
and potential new 
initiatives.

113

2010

142

2011

51

2012

102

2013

98

2014

Performance

In the context of a volatile investment market, EIM was able to meet and surpass net new 
money targets for the year based on a number of large well-established intermediary 
relationships who further committed to us as an organisation and our product range.  
The Higher Income Fund had its 20th anniversary and continued to  
show exceptional fund performance over all time frames.  
When combined with the ‘at retirement’ pension changes,

which will come into effect in April 2015, from which the Higher  
Income Fund will benefit, this fund took in by far the largest  
percentage of new money inflows in 2014.

* These figures have not been restated, they are as reported in the appropriate year’s report and accounts

Section 2  Key Performance Indicators

39

Non-Financial

Broker satisfaction 

Broker Satisfaction Survey

SEIB Customer

Satisfaction Survey

%

100

50

0

94%

79%

94%

97%

2012

2013

2014

Extremely satisfied

Very satisfied

Fairly satisfied

2014

Very satisfied

Satisfied

%

100

50

0

Performance

Claims Satisfaction Survey − Direct

%

100

97%

96%

Ecclesiastical’s broker service results have been good over the last three years. For 
97%
2014, 94% of our brokers were satisfied with the service we provided, 57% of these 
were very or extremely satisfied. A 15% improvement in broker satisfaction over the prior 
year reflects the increased effort and focus on engaging with our brokers and refreshing 
our risk appetite. After a period of significant change in the Group the  
themes coming from brokers were to communicate more and be  
consistent in our approach. This became a key focus in the year  
with this result standing testament to its impact.

80

60

40

20

0

2012

2013

2014

Extremely satisfied

Very satisfied

Fairly satisfied

Measure

Results from broker 
opinion surveys carried 
out each year by our 
internal insight team. 
Brokers are asked to 
rate their experience on 
a six-point scale:  
1 - extremely dissatisfied 
to 6 - extremely satisfied.  
We measure the level 
of positive satisfaction, 
particularly extremely 
and very satisfied. Our 
aim is to achieve over 
90% satisfaction.

40 Section 2  Key Performance Indicators

%

100

50

0

%

100

80

60

40

20

0

Broker Satisfaction Survey

SEIB Customer

Satisfaction Survey

94%

79%

94%

97%

%

100

50

0

2012

2013

2014

Extremely satisfied

Very satisfied

Fairly satisfied

2014

Very satisfied

Satisfied

Claims Satisfaction Survey − Direct

S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

02

96%

97%

97%

2012

2013

2014

Extremely satisfied

Very satisfied

Fairly satisfied

Direct customer satisfaction

Measure

Results from internal 
customer satisfaction 
surveys carried out  
each year, relating to 
how well customers 
felt their claims were 
handled. The results 
of this survey include 
settled and partially 
settled property claims.

Customers are asked 
to rate their experience 
on a six-point scale: 1 - 
extremely dissatisfied to 
6 - extremely satisfied.

We measure the level 
of positive satisfaction, 
particularly extremely  
and very satisfied.

Our target is to achieve 
at least 90% very or 
extremely satisfied.

Performance

Ecclesiastical prides itself on maintaining very high levels of satisfaction, particularly in 
relation to claims when customers need us most. In 2014, 92% of customers were either 
extremely or very satisfied with the way their claim was handled and a further 5% were 
fairly satisfied. 

Similar results were also seen for customer surveys on general satisfaction levels.  
In particular, 99% of our home and 98% of our commercial customers  
were satisfied with their new business experience with us.

%

100

50

0

SEIB Customer
Satisfaction Survey

97%

2014

Very satisfied

Satisfied

Performance

This was the first year that a customer satisfaction survey was carried out for SEIB and 
the results were very pleasing with 97% of SEIB’s customers being either very satisfied 
or satisfied. From these results a staggering 90.5% of SEIB’s customers fell into the very 
satisfied category rating the service they received as a 9 or 10. 

This is well above our target for 90% satisfaction.

Section 2  Key Performance Indicators

41

%

100

50

0

%

100

80

60

40

20

0

Broker Satisfaction Survey

SEIB customer satisfaction

94%

79%

94%

Measure

Results from an internal 
customer satisfaction 
survey which was carried 
out for our broker SEIB. 
The survey covered the 
Administration, Claims, 
Commercial Client and New 
Business departments and 
related to how satisfied 
SEIB’s customers were with 
the service they received. 
Customers were asked to 
rate their service experience 
on a 10-point scale: 10 
- very satisfied to 0 - not 
satisfied. We measured the 
level of positive satisfaction 
using the Net Promoter 
Score Model. We based 
the results on scores of 7-8 
being satisfied and scores 
of 9-10 being very satisfied. 
Our target is to achieve at 
least 90% of customers 
being satisfied or very 
satisfied with the service  
they receive.

2012

2013

2014

Extremely satisfied

Very satisfied

Fairly satisfied

Claims Satisfaction Survey − Direct

96%

97%

97%

2012

2013

2014

Extremely satisfied

Very satisfied

Fairly satisfied

Financial 
Performance

In 2014 we achieved a pre-tax profit of £48.2m (2013: 
£66.9m). We saw the benefit of the actions taken over 
the last two years to turn around our general insurance 
business performance and report our first underwriting 
profit since 2009. Our investment and broker businesses 
also continued to grow their contribution to our profits.

General insurance

Our underwriting performance for the year was a profit of £9.2m (2013: £8.2m loss), resulting in a Group 
COR of 95.9% (2013: 102.9%).  As already discussed in the Group Chief Executive’s Review on  
page 12, each of our core underwriting areas saw an improvement in performance this year with every 
territory making a positive contribution to the turnaround in performance.

United Kingdom

Our insurance businesses in the UK reported an underwriting profit of £9.8m (2013: £9.8m).

Refocusing on our core niches and putting into place our new regional structure has seen the core UK 
business improve its performance over recent years, and this performance was sustained in 2014.

The storms and floods that hit the UK at the start of 2014 had a net cost to our property account of £8m. 
However, with no further significant weather events during 2014, the profitability of our property account 
exceeded expectations over the year as a whole.

Having withdrawn from the non-charitable care sector and focused on pricing risks appropriately, the 
performance of the non-abuse related liability account has improved considerably. However, we have taken 
the opportunity to strengthen reserves in respect of physical and sexual abuse claims during the year. 
We recognise and welcome the increase in transparency and openness that means victims of abuse feel 
able to come forward, and believe we are now appropriately reserved for potential claims. This action has, 
however, resulted in the overall liability account remaining loss-making despite the turnaround in underlying 
performance.

As expected, following our exit from the motor business, non-charity care and schemes not aligned to our 
niches, GWP decreased in the year, falling by 20% to £234.0m (2013: £291.3m). While we recognise that 
GWP has fallen significantly we are satisfied that we have taken the correct decisions, as demonstrated 
by the more consistent underwriting profitability in the UK over the last two years. Moderate sustainable 
profitable growth is being targeted as we build on our strengths and continue to position ourselves as the 
insurer of choice in our chosen segments.

42 Section 2  Financial Performance

S E C T I O N

02

Section 2  Financial Performance

43

Ireland

Our operations in Ireland generated an underwriting profit of £0.6m, a significant improvement on the 
2013 loss of £9.1m, which was driven by performance in the liability portfolio. The team identified and 
implemented a series of corrective actions, commencing in late 2013 and continuing throughout 2014.

These actions included lapsing unprofitable business in selected niches and, while they resulted in a 12% 
fall in GWP, before translation, to £11.5m (2013: £13.6m), the quality of the portfolio was improved and 
there were notable new business wins during the year. Retention was in line with expectations and the 
team was strengthened by proactive recruitment across all areas.

Australia

Australia reported an underwriting loss of £1.1m (2013: £4.2m loss). The improvement in the underwriting 
performance was mainly due to the impact of new property reinsurance arrangements and a reduction in 
operating expenses. The Australian business delivered an underlying profit before discount rate movements 
relating to reductions in market interest rates. The negative reserve movements were more than offset by 
corresponding market gains in Ansvar Australia’s investment portfolio which are not included within the 
underwriting result.

A new Chief Executive Officer, Warren Hutcheon, was appointed on 1 May 2014. Following a review of the 
business, a new operating model was announced on 1 September 2014. The key objective of the model is 
to better align the business with our specialist insurer strategy and the needs of our broker partners.

In 2014, GWP reduced by 12% to £40.1m (2013: £45.7m), primarily due to a 12% weakening of the 
Australian dollar against sterling during the year. Retention rates improved significantly in 2014 following 
the completion of the remediation of the business’s property portfolio in mid-2013 and increasing focus on 
retaining core business.

Canada

Our Canadian branch reported an underwriting profit of £1.7m (2013: £1.1m loss), as the territory did not 
suffer the same levels of catastrophe weather events that had driven the losses in the previous year.

The 12% fall in the value of the Canadian dollar against sterling meant that the branch’s contribution 
to Group GWP fell to £39.4m (2013: £41.2m) but GWP grew by 7% before translation, with strong 
retention rates of 94%, continuing a trend that has seen its premiums more than double since 2008.

Central operations

Profits from internal reinsurance arrangements in this segment were offset by corporate costs and a  
further modest strengthening of reserves in respect of adverse development reinsurance cover sold to  
ACS (NZ) Limited in 2012, resulting in an overall loss of £1.7m (2013: £3.7m loss).

Investments

The effects of persistent weak global economic activity and muted inflation were offset by the monetary 
policy measures deployed by the world’s major central banks which helped to support positive returns 
across most asset classes during the year. Over the course of 2014, the FTSE All Share Index produced 
a return of 1.2% while the FTSE 100 Index generated a return of 0.7%. Our UK equity portfolio increased 
by 2.7%, outperforming both indices, reflecting its lower weighting in poorly performing sectors such as oil 
and mining.

44 Section 2  Financial Performance

Government bond yields decreased across the developed world over the course of the final quarter and 
gilts followed the global trend. The prospect of the Bank of England raising base rates has been pushed 
further into the future as inflation pressures  have  diminished,  with  wage  inflation  remaining  restrained 
and  falling  commodity  prices  placing  downward pressure on prices. Yields on corporate bonds reached 
record lows at the end of the year, although they failed to keep pace with gilts as credit spreads widened, 
reflecting both the deteriorating economic picture globally and the move towards gilts as risk aversion 
increased.

Longer dated gilts performed strongly while  shorter dated gilts  (<5 years)  produced total returns of 
2.9%. Our UK bond portfolio produced a total return of 3.6% in 2014, reflecting good performance of 
corporate bonds and preference shares which helped achieve returns above the shorter dated index.

Investment management

EIM’s funds under management grew again in 2014, as new business inflows and positive market 
movements saw a 5% growth to £2.3bn.

For a second year in succession EIM attracted nearly £100m net new flows from third parties into 
Ecclesiastical investment funds. A further £5m was invested into our special charity investment vehicle. 
Overall fee income for EIM increased by 11% to £14.3m and pre-tax profits increased to £3.2m.

EIM further consolidated its position as a leader in sustainable and responsible investment, with the 
company winning the Moneyfacts Best Ethical Investment Provider Award for a sixth consecutive year, 
with it and its funds continuing to win awards, as shown earlier in the Strategic Report on page 33. EIM 
was rated Platinum by Citywire and Andrew Jackson was awarded Fund Manager of the Year for the UK 
Growth sector. Across the team our fund managers continue to be highly rated, with Robin Hepworth, Sue 
Round and Chris Hiorns all holding Citywire ratings.

Long-term insurance

As reported last year, Ecclesiastical Life Limited ceased writing new business from the end of April 2013. 
The result for 2014 was a small loss of £0.2m (2013: £0.4m profit) as pressure on index linked bond yields 
offset the underlying expected favourable run-off of the business.

Broking and Advisory

SEIB continued to provide a steady income stream to the Group, with the acquisition of the business of 
Lansdown Insurance Brokers widening its offering to a number of specialist areas and further building its 
capacity and expertise.  The acquisition and SEIB’s operations in niche markets saw commission and fee 
income grow by 25% to £9.1m (2013: £7.3m). Net profit before tax increased to £3.0m (2013: £2.5m).

EFAS, our small financial advisory business, has reported a loss before tax of £1.0m. The continuing 
business improved its performance following the rationalisation of its independent financial advisers 
business, reducing its loss from £0.8m to £0.4m. The company agreed to sell its mortgage book as part 
of the rationalisation of its operations. This sale completed on 20 January 2015 and a loss on disposal of 
£0.7m was recognised in 2014.

Ian Campbell
Group Chief Financial Officer

Section 2  Financial Performance

45

02SECTIONSECTIONRisk Management

Introduction

The core business of Ecclesiastical is general insurance. 
Thus, risk selection, pricing, reinsurance strategy, portfolio 
management and regulatory compliance play an important part 
in our business model which can be found on page 18.

An enterprise-wide risk management framework has been 
embedded across the Group, with the purpose of providing the 
tools, guidance, policies, standards and defined responsibilities 
which will enable us to achieve our strategy and objectives, and 
ensure that all individual and aggregated risks to our objectives 
are identified and managed on a consistent basis.

The risk management process is integrated into the culture of 
the Group and is led by the Group Management Board (GMB), 
which is supported by three Executive Risk Management 
Committees:

 ■ The (Non-Life) Insurance Risk Committee which has 

oversight of the non-life insurance risks of the Group 
including counterparty risk

 ■ The Investment and Market Risks Committee which has 
oversight of the investment and market risks of the Group
 ■ The Group Operational Risk Committee which has oversight 

of the operational risks of the Group.

The risk management process supports accountability, 
performance measurement and reward, thus promoting 
operational efficiency at all levels.

On an annual basis the GMB identifies key strategic risks and 
allocates responsibility for each of them. Any risk management 
actions that arise are regularly monitored.

Risk culture

Risk strategy

Risk appetite

Risk policies

Purpose

Setting the risk-taking 
direction of the organisation

Own risk and solvency assessment

Understanding the capital 
and solvency impacts

Risk quantification including stress and scenario testing

A T I O N

2. RISK A

S

Understanding and response to the 
risks that the organisation faces

K IDE N TIFI C

RIS

.
1

G
N

I

R

O

T

I

N

O

M

K 

4. RIS

S

E

S

S

M

E

N

T

3

. RIS
K RESP

O

NSE

t
i
d
u
a

l

a
n
r
e
t
n

i

d
n
a
t
n
e
m
s
s
e
s
s
a
-
f
l
e
s
k
s
i
r

l

o
r
t
n
o
C

s
e
e
t
t
i

i

m
m
o
c
t
h
g
s
r
e
v
o
d
n
a
e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

46 Section 2  Risk Management

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The key to the success of this process is the deployment of a 
strong Three Lines of Defence Model whereby:

 ■ The first line (Business Management) is responsible for 

strategy, performance and managing risks arising;

 ■ The second line (Reporting, Oversight and Guidance) is 

responsible for establishing minimum standards, appropriate 
reporting, oversight and challenge of our risk profiles and 
risk management activities within each of our businesses. 
This includes Executive Risk Management Committees and 
is subject to oversight and challenge by the Group Risk 
Committee; and

 ■ The third line (Assurance) provides independent and objective 
assurance of the effectiveness of the Group’s systems of 
internal control. This activity principally comprises the Internal 
Audit function which is subject to oversight and challenge by 
the Group Audit Committee.

We have a continuously evolving approach to Enterprise Risk 
Management and use emerging experience to refine our 
approach. During 2014 key improvements included:

 ■ Strengthening of the Risk function with increased technical 

knowledge and actuarial capability;

 ■ Improved embedding of the risk framework within the 

first line of defence which included establishing local risk 
committees;

 ■ Commencement of risk oversight visits that are being 

conducted by the second line;

 ■ Enhancement of the qualitative risk profiles including an 
increased focus on business plans and emerging risks;

 ■ Continued development of quantitative risk profiling 

capabilities;

 ■ A refreshed Group-wide risk appetite proposal which was 
approved by the Group Risk Committee, and included 
strategic business units’ (SBUs) risk appetites;

 ■ Improved reporting to the Group Risk Committee; and 
 ■ Refinements to the Own Risk Solvency Assessment (ORSA) 
process which were approved by the Board and submitted to 
the PRA.

Risk appetite

The risk appetite defines the level of risk-taking that the Board 
feel is appropriate for the Group as we pursue our business 
objectives. It has been defined in line with the different 
categories of risk that the Group faces, and provides the 
backdrop against which the business plan is developed and 
validated. This ensures that the risk profile resulting from the 
business plan is in line with the risk-taking expectations of the 
Board. Compliance with the risk appetite is reported to the 
Group Risk Committee at each meeting. A formal escalation 
process exists for activities outside of risk appetite.

The risk appetite is refreshed annually and is signed off and 
approved by the Board.

The principles that underpin our risk appetite are based on the 
overall ambition of Ecclesiastical to operate as an independent 
and successful financial services group, operating with the 
highest standards of integrity to deliver financial products and 
services for the benefit of the church and community. As such, 
the Board takes the reputation of the Group seriously and will 
not undertake any activity whose outcome might reasonably 
be expected to have a sufficiently negative reputational impact 
on the Group and undermine the sustainability of the business 
model.

At the highest level of our risk appetite there are strategic 
statements which set the minimum levels of capital and solvency 
that the Group wishes to maintain, and they contain broad 
ranges of the magnitude of exposure to different risk types that 
are desirable. This includes limits on the type, nature, size and 
concentration of insurance risks that will be accepted by the 
Group together with the Board’s requirements for a Group-wide 
reinsurance strategy. We purchase reinsurance cover to protect 
against property catastrophe events that are predicted to occur 
once every 250 to 500 years, depending upon the territory.

A key objective of our risk appetite is to ensure that we have 
sufficient capital to meet our liabilities in extreme adverse 
scenarios. The risk appetite aims to achieve and support a credit 
rating of at least single A minus from Standard & Poor’s (S&P) 
and A.M. Best.

Quantitative risk measures and 
stress testing framework

The primary tool used to measure aggregate risk is our internal 
model, which has been calibrated to estimate the capital 
resources required to deliver our business plan and meet UK 
regulatory risk-based capital requirements.

Over the last year we have improved both the scope and 
methodology of our internal model to better reflect the risk 
profile. The model has become further embedded in our 
strategic decision-making processes. For example, the internal 
model was used to inform the setting of the refreshed risk 
appetite and as an input to the development of our reinsurance 
strategy and pricing decisions.

We have continued to refine a comprehensive stress testing and 
scenario analysis framework to complement our quantitative risk 
measures and meet regulatory requirements.

This framework seeks to stress the business plan and identifies 
potential outcomes generated in the scenarios other than those 
in the central plan assumptions, providing evidence to the Board 
that the plan is robust. This is also used to identify additional 
actions that can be taken, including contingency plans, to 
mitigate any risks or potential adverse experiences identified. 
As such the company uses stress and scenario testing as a key 
component of its business planning process.

Section 2  Risk Management

47

02SECTIONSECTIONPrincipal risks
The following table shows the principal risks we face that could have the highest potential to damage our Group both in the short 
and long term.

Insurance risks

Business mix, underwriting  
and pricing risk

The risk of failing to price adequately 
for claims costs, expenses, cost 
of capital and profit requirements; 
failure to manage portfolio risk; 
failure to manage the underwriting 
cycle; diversification and 
concentration; failure to establish 
appropriate underwriting disciplines.

Why we have it

How we mitigate it

General insurance is a highly 
competitive business. The 
premium required for an 
insurance policy needs to reflect 
the cover provided and the risk 
factors present.

Disciplined underwriting and pricing is central 
to our business and key to the success of the 
Group. Since 2010 we have established sales, 
claims and underwriting academies to support 
these activities and to ensure the correct skill 
set is maintained and developed. Significant 
investment in underwriting and pricing 
capabilities across the Group has continued 
into 2014, and a revised structure has been 
implemented within the UK general insurance 
business. A strict risk appetite has been adopted 
to ensure there is a clear focus on our chosen 
niches and classes of business. Concentration 
risk is a key consideration and limits are 
established within the risk appetite.

The size of this risk has fallen over the year due 
to underwriting actions taken to improve the 
quality of the business we write coupled with the 
investment in our underwriting capabilities.

Claims reserving risk

Why we have it

How we mitigate it

The risk of actual claims payments 
exceeding the amount we are 
holding in relation to our long-tail 
liability risks.

Claims reserving risk is a natural 
consequence of incurring  
insurance claims. Throughout the 
lifecycle of a claim the estimated 
ultimate cost will vary as 
additional information becomes 
available.

Claims development and reserving levels are 
closely monitored. Claims reserving risk primarily 
arises from longer-tail liability business.  For 
statutory and financial reporting purposes 
margins are added to a best estimate outcome 
to allow for uncertainties. This approach 
generally results in a favourable release of 
previous year’s provisions within the current 
financial year. Claims reserves are reviewed and 
signed off by the Board acting on the advice 
and recommendations of the Group Reserving 
Actuary and the Group Audit Committee.

Further information on this risk is given in notes 
2, 3 and 27 to the financial statements in section 
4 of this annual report and accounts.

This risk has not changed materially over the 
year.

48 Section 2  Risk Management

S E C T I O N

Reinsurance risk

Why we have it ave it

How we mitigate it

The risk of failing to access and 
manage reinsurance capacity at a 
reasonable price.

This risk is managed by taking a long-term 
relationship view towards reinsurance purchases 
to deliver sustainable capacity rather than 
opportunistic results. Strict criteria exist which 
relate to the ratings of the reinsurers and a 
Reinsurance Security Forum approves all of our 
reinsurance partners.

The size of this risk has remained broadly similar 
over the year.

Reinsurance is a central 
component of our business 
model, enabling us to insure 
a portfolio of large risks in 
relation to our capital base. The 
Board appetite for our strategic 
exposure to the reinsurance 
market is well established.

The global reinsurance market is 
beginning to see a reshaping of 
the market, with diversification by 
territory and/or class seen as the 
way forward. As a consequence, 
merger and acquisition activity is 
now beginning to take place. Not 
all reinsurers have been prepared 
to follow pricing down and accept 
wider terms and conditions and 
have actively scaled back their 
portfolios including breaking 
long-standing relationships with 
insurers or standing firm on 
terms.

Concentration and model 
error risk

This is the failure to manage risk 
concentrations across our different 
business and risk areas and includes 
the reliance on models which if 
found to be wrong could give rise to 
significant unplanned losses.

Why we have it ve it

How we mitigate it

Exposure measures are 
fundamental to determining our 
reinsurance purchases. Errors 
within the models could fail to 
identify significant concentrations 
of risk and lead to the Group 
having net retentions which are in 
excess of our risk appetite.

Risk appetite limits have been established to 
manage our concentration of risk and these are 
reviewed regularly by the Group Risk Committee.

The risk is mitigated through the use of industry 
recognised models alongside our scenario and 
stress testing framework.

Section 2  Risk Management

49

02SECTIONSECTIONMarket risks

Market risk

Why we have it ave it

How we mitigate it

The risk of adverse movements 
in net asset values arising from a 
change in interest rates, equity and 
property prices and foreign  
exchange rates.

Market risk principally arises 
from investments held by the 
Group. We accept such risks to 
seek enhanced returns on these 
investments. 

Our investment strategy for 
assets backing reserves is 
primarily focused on fixed income 
stocks. This gives us exposure 
to interest rate risk. We also 
hold some of our investments in 
corporate bonds, which expose 
us to credit spread risk, for 
which higher expected yields are 
obtained. 

Market risk also arises as we 
have a significant equity portfolio. 

A proportion of our equity 
portfolio is invested in overseas 
equities. This gives us exposure 
to wider investment opportunities 
and diversified returns, but also 
introduces currency risk.

A robust investment risk management 
framework is in place to mitigate the impact of 
changes in financial markets.

Our fund manager, EIM, manages our funds 
in accordance with the investment strategy 
and guidelines agreed by the Finance and 
Investment Committee of the Board. 

Interest rate risk is partly managed through 
selecting stocks of an appropriate duration 
that will match the expected cash flows from 
longer-term liabilities, and partly through holding 
stocks with a relatively short period to maturity, 
that are not exposed to significant volatility upon 
changes in interest rates.

Credit spread risk is risk is controlled through the 
investment strategy and guidelines agreed by the 
Finance and Investment Committee of the Board. 
It is managed by our investment manager’s 
assessments of risk and by limiting our exposure 
to both non-rated and lower rated bonds and 
ensuring that we adhere to the limits set for 
exposure to any single issuer.

We hold a relatively significant equity portfolio 
in order to deliver a real long-term investment 
return on capital and the Board has long 
accepted a high appetite for variable investment 
returns. When we feel it is appropriate we will 
use derivatives to reduce equity exposure. A 
small amount of hedging of equity risk was in 
place during the first half of 2014.

We manage our exposure to liabilities in our 
overseas businesses by holding appropriate 
levels of cash and investments in local 
currencies. We ensure that currency risk is 
appropriately monitored and controlled and is 
overseen by our Group Finance function to try 
and reduce the impact of fluctuating currency 
rates.  Currency risk arising from holding 
overseas equities is accepted as part of the 
decision to invest in such assets.

Further information on this risk is given in note 4 
to the financial statements on page 138.

This risk has not changed materially  
over the year.

50 Section 2  Risk Management

Credit risk

Credit risk

Why we have it ave it

How we mitigate it

The risk of non-payment of their 
obligations by counterparties and 
financial markets borrowers.

Our principal exposure to credit 
risk arises from reinsurance, 
which is central to our business 
model.

Additional credit risk arises from 
our investment in debt securities, 
cash deposits and amounts 
owed to us by intermediaries and 
policyholders.

Reinsurer credit risk is controlled by the Group 
Reinsurance Security Committee, principally 
through careful selection and monitoring of 
reinsurance partners.  All reinsurers on the 2014 
reinsurance programme had a minimum rating of 
A minus from S&P or an equivalent agency at the 
time of purchase with the exception of MAPFRE 
RE whose rating was adversely impacted by the 
sovereign rating of Spain.  However, MAPFRE 
RE was upgraded by S&P to A minus in February 
2014 and then to A in May 2014 with a  
stable outlook.

Reliance on a single counterparty increased 
during 2014 due to the reinsurance arrangement 
that Ansvar Australia has with National Indemnity, 
who are part of the Berkshire Hathaway Group; 
however, they have a very strong S&P rating  
of AA+.

Investment credit risk is managed using the 
same processes as for credit default risk as 
noted above.

We utilise robust agency and collection 
procedures to ensure that our credit and 
bad debt risk through our intermediaries and 
policyholders is minimised.

The level of this risk increase during the year 
due to market developments but this was tightly 
monitored and controlled.

Further information on this risk is given in note 4 
to the financial statements starting on page 138.

Section 2  Risk Management

51

02SECTIONSECTIONOperational risks

IT systems, data quality and 
business intelligence risk

The risk of shortfalls in the quality 
or availability of management 
information for decision-making, 
inadequate or unsupported systems 
and system failure impacting on 
processing efficiency.

Why we have it ave it

How we mitigate it

Over the last five years an extensive programme 
has focused on accuracy, completeness and 
appropriateness of data and on the development 
of a strategic data warehouse.

The level of this risk has remained the same  
this year.

Accessing claims data in 
relation to the risk offered is a 
key tool in enabling sufficient 
and competitive pricing. Other 
management information 
can enable a quick response 
to claims or other market 
developments.

Efficient and reliable systems are 
paramount to delivering excellent 
customer service and business 
processing.

Regulatory and legal risk

Why we have it ve it

How we mitigate it

Regulatory and legal risk is the risk 
of non-compliance with applicable 
law and regulations, unenforceable 
contractual rights and any dispute 
resolution or other proceedings 
arising in relation to legal rights.  
This includes the conduct elements 
of failing to deliver fair outcomes for 
consumers or those that result in 
consumer detriment.

Regulatory and legal risk arises 
in each territory in which we write 
business and this can result in 
significant cost and reputational 
implications if it is not managed 
appropriately.

Legal and regulatory developments are 
monitored throughout the Group and  working 
parties are established to consider significant 
developments which impact on our business.

The Compliance function which is headed up by 
our Group Compliance Officer has been further 
strengthened during 2014 in response to the 
continued increasing importance of regulatory 
compliance and the evolution of regulation 
though the separate and independent PRA and 
Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) regimes.

The size of this risk has increased during the 
year given the increasing regulatory obligations 
and expectations and also the pace of 
change particularly as we move towards the 
implementation date for Solvency II.

52 Section 2  Risk Management

Other operational risks

Why we have it ave it

How we mitigate it

The risk of unexpected loss or cost 
arising from the operation of the 
business or due to external impacts 
not covered above; this will include 
both Information Security and  
Staff Risks.

We have a relatively complex 
business which operates in a 
number of specialist markets and 
territories. While considerable 
attention to detail is paid, errors 
and non-controllable external 
events do occur.

There has been significant effort during 2014 
on developing the Operational Risk Profiles 
capturing risks and management actions within 
each of our business areas.  These profiles are 
specifically focused on the delivery of individual 
business areas plans and objectives. Risks 
are managed to ensure they comply with the 
levels set by the Board and detailed within 
the risk appetite. Stress and scenario testing 
is undertaken and the results are taken into 
account in capital requirement considerations.

Each area of our Group has a Disaster Recovery 
and Business Continuity Plan in place that is 
regularly tested and updated.

The size of this risk is largely unchanged over  
the year.

Reputational risk

Why we have it ve it

How we mitigate it

The risk of a reduction in trust by 
customers, brokers, reinsurers and 
other stakeholders as a result of an 
event or series of events.

We always aim to be fair to 
our stakeholders.  However, if 
disagreements occur, it could 
result in negative commentary in 
many forms of media.

Reputational risk is primarily managed through 
our approach to treating stakeholders fairly, 
combined with the other actions taken to 
manage risks to our financial position. Our 
Group’s ambition is to be the most trusted and 
ethical specialist financial services group and this 
is reflected in all our business activities. More 
information on our Group’s ambitions can be 
found in our Business Model and Our Strategy 
sections starting on page18 and 21, respectively.

Reputational risk is overseen by the GMB 
together with the Group Risk Committee. Our 
reputation is fundamental to our business and 
we will not accept risks that will materially 
damage our reputation. We monitor a variety of 
communication channels and proactively gather 
feedback to ensure there is no detriment to our 
reputation.

The size of this risk is largely unchanged over  
the year.

Competition

Why we have it ve it

How we mitigate it

The risk of failing to recognise and 
address changes in a competitive 
market, particularly competitor 
actions, distribution channels, an 
imbalance of bargaining power with 
distributors, business concentration 
and resource issues and the impact 
to the Group of a loss of a key 
account or niche market.

General insurance is a highly 
competitive business. There are a 
number of companies operating 
within the same niche markets 
which means that competitor 
activity remains a significant 
threat to our strategic objectives.

The GMB and SBUs monitor key competitors 
on a regular basis, managing their impact on our 
markets. We have a strategy to deliver excellent 
customer service through multiple distribution 
channels to ensure diversification of risk.

The size of this risk is largely unchanged over  
the year.

Section 2 Risk Management

53

02SECTIONSECTIONStrategic risks

Increasing expense base

Why we have it ave it

How we mitigate it

The risk of failing to maintain the 
expenses base within targets.

Controlling expenses relative 
to the size of the Group is 
key to ensuring the continued 
profitability of our business 
model.

Expense analysis and forecasting is undertaken 
with regular monitoring, reporting and challenge 
by senior management. Any material spend has 
to be approved and signed off by the GMB.

The level of this risk has remained similar over 
the year.

Strategic execution and 
business plan delivery

The risk of failing to deliver our 
business plan and a failure to meet 
stakeholder expectations resulting in 
negative reaction from the regulator 
or rating agencies.

Why we have it ve it

How we mitigate it

Delivering our business plan 
is key to ensuring financial 
stability and the confidence of 
key stakeholders, including the 
regulator and rating agencies. 
This is used to prevent the failure 
to define appropriate strategies 
and execute them to enable us to 
deliver on those expectations.

A number of strategic initiatives were identified 
and grouped into three waves which are to be 
delivered over the next three years. The first 
wave largely completed during 2014. 

The size of this risk has remained similar over 
the year.

Group risks

Governance and oversight  
of SBUs 

The risk of failing to effectively 
manage the different parts of the 
Group across different territories and 
regulatory regimes.

Why we have it ave it

How we mitigate it

The Group consists of a number 
of different business divisions 
which operate across a number 
of territories and regulatory 
regimes. Failure to effectively 
manage our operations in line 
with Group expectations could 
lead to sub-optimal business 
performance or damage to our 
reputation.

The expectations of the SBUs have been 
defined and they have all confirmed the adoption 
of the required standard. Alongside this all SBUs 
have locally adopted risk appetites, which have 
been approved at Group level and are regularly 
monitored with formal escalation processes in 
place for potential breaches.

Annual Risk Reviews and Control Risk Self-
Assessments are undertaken. Additionally, Group 
Internal Audit (GIA) reviews are carried out.

The size of this risk is largely unchanged over 
the year.

54 Section 2  Risk Management

Section 2  Risk Management

55

02SECTIONSECTIONCR Highlights in 2014

£25,000

donated to support the  
DEC EBOLA APPEAL

Christmas donations made to  
GREAT ORMOND STREET 
HOSPITAL CHILDREN’S 
CHARITY

£5,000

£16,000

COMPANY MATCHING 
PROVIDED

ANSVAR UK raised 

£9,000

for CHESTNUTS TREE HOUSE 
CHILDREN’S HOSPICE,   
which equates to one day’s running  
costs for the charity

Annual Charity Carol Concert  

£4,700

 raised at GLOUCESTER CATHEDRAL for 
Gloucestershire-based charity partners  
WINSTON’S WISH, AGE UK 
GLOUCESTERSHIRE AND GLOUCESTER 
CIVIC TRUST

ECCLESIASTICAL CANADA

ANSVAR AUSTRALIA 

ECCLESIASTICAL IRELAND

760hrs

 donated to charity1.5 x more 
than in the previous year

$18,500

raised for various charities 
throughout the year

€22,000

raised for selected charity 
partners SOAR during 2014

£23.5 million
Total charitable grants made to ATL

56 Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

 
Corporate 
Responsibility Report

Ecclesiastical is committed to supporting the communities it 
operates in. Doing the right thing and giving back to the communities 
around us have been a part of our corporate DNA since the 
Group’s early days in the 19th century. Our first charitable donation 
of £1,000 was made in 1890 and the amount of donations and 
charitable activities that the Group has been involved in has grown 
ever since. 

A new Group-wide business vision 

In January 2014 Ecclesiastical’s management team launched a new Group-wide vision and goals for the 
business covering the next three years. This is the first time that all of our Group companies, including our 
international territories, have been set a unified vision which clearly links the Group’s business ambitions 
and a charitable giving target. In addition to setting out our aim to become the most trusted and ethical 
financial services group, the new vision has also established a clear and ambitious charitable giving target 
which is to give £50m to charity over three years.

The £50m target specifically encompasses our grants made to our charitable owner, ATL, and excludes 
any additional donations and funds raised by both the Group and our staff through our corporate 
responsibility (CR) programme. During 2014 we donated £23.5m to ATL towards this target as a result of 
strong business performance.

Establishing a way forward

Although we have achieved a great deal over the years with our CR programme, we have recognised that 
there is much more we could do and our CR activities will continue to develop over time. Therefore, during 
2014, we undertook a detailed review of our existing CR programme and looked at how we could devise 
and implement a refreshed CR strategy that will support the achievement of our new vision and goals. The 
new CR strategy entitled the ‘Greater Giving Programme’ was agreed in late 2014 and will be introduced 
throughout the Group during 2015. A high level overview of the Greater Giving Programme is included at 
the end of this CR Report on page 65.

Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

57

02SECTIONSECTIONCR at Ecclesiastical 
in 2014

At Ecclesiastical, CR is embedded in our values and culture and 
drives the way we generate profits. CR encompasses everything we 
do and ranges from the products and services we provide; to our 
claims ethos; the research we fund and technical advice we produce 
to protect customers; the way we look after our employees; our 
ethical investment principles; our community campaigns, donations 
and volunteering; the decisions we make affecting our supply chain 
and the environment; and the impact we have by giving a proportion 
of our profits to our charitable owner ATL for distribution to charities 
and local communities.

Although all of these elements above form part of our comprehensive CR programme, the main focus of the Group’s CR activities 
in 2014 was predominantly on charity and community support, and included: 

■  Our international, national and local charity and community partnerships

■ Helping Hands – our UK employee volunteering programme

■  Payroll Giving – a scheme that enables our employees to donate to any charity, church or charitable association

■  Company matching which gives additional money to funds raised from staff fundraising activities.

Employee diversity

Diversity is important to Ecclesiastical and we recognise that diversity at all levels in the business will enhance our business 
performance. In 2014, our employee survey, ‘My Say’, showed 71% of employees felt that the company they were part of 
respected individual differences such as cultures and backgrounds. During 2015, we will develop a plan to increase levels of 
engagement in this area and enhance our reporting in this regard.

Directors1

Leadership Team2

Employees

Gender

Male

Female

Male

Female

Male

Female

Numbers

7

4

26

12

454

562

1 
This includes Non-Executive and Executive Directors for Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc only 
2 This includes the direct reports and Leadership Team who report to the Group Chief Executive.

58 Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

Core issues at the heart of our CR programme

Over the last few years our programme has focused on issues that are important to both our 
customers and the communities we operate in.

We have used our understanding of our customers within the charity, heritage, faith and education sectors 
and the challenges they face, to focus on three core issues which community investment projects have 
helped to tackle in some way during 2014 and include:

■ Protecting our heritage against crime and anti-social behaviour

■ Supporting vulnerable children and adults in our local communities

■ Supporting the sustainability of local charities that address the specific needs of our communities.

Responsibility for CR in the Group

Formal responsibility and accountability for CR within the Group is attributed as follows:

Director of Group 
Strategy and 
Corporate Affairs

Responsible for providing the overall strategic  
framework for CR within the Group; reporting on progress  
and achievements in CR to the Group Management Board  
and Board of Directors

Group Management 
Board

Responsible for reviewing policies and  
directing CR strategy and objectives

Strategic  
Business Units

Responsible for the local development and  
implementation of the Group CR strategy, monitoring  
and reporting on CR activities

Employee 
Community Panel

Responsible for engaging and inspiring employees  
to get involved in community support activities,  
championing community activity, and leading relationships 
 with local charity partners.

Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

59

02SECTIONSECTIONOur contribution to the 
communities around 
us in 2014

Overview of CR activities by Group territory

GROUP ACTIVITY

DEC Ebola appeal

In the autumn of 2014, as the humanitarian crisis of Ebola in Africa significantly escalated, the UK-based Disasters Emergency 
Committee launched a national appeal to raise funds to manage the crisis. We made an immediate one-off £25,000 donation  
to the appeal. The UK Government had announced that it would match the first £5m of donations made by the public to the  
DEC appeal.

Christmas donation to Great Ormond Street Children’s Hospital

During December we chose Great Ormond Street Children’s Hospital as our Christmas charity for 2014 and made a one-off 
£5,000 donation to the charity. The charity was selected due to its excellent work helping vulnerable children and families and we 
also wanted to offer support to one of the charities we insure.  

Award shortlist for corporate partnership with Carers Trust

In 2012 we chose Carers Trust as our national charity partner for 2012–2013 due to the organisation’s strong links with a 
number of the Group’s core business areas. Our partnership with the charity ended in December 2013. However, the work we 
had carried out with the charity over this two-year period was shortlisted for the 2014 Charity Times Awards in the Corporate 
National Partnership of the Year with a Financial Institution category which recognised the impact that our contribution had on 
the sector during the partnership period.

UNITED KINGDOM

Just some of the activities undertaken by our UK staff to support charities in 2014 

■ Charity weight-loss challenge

■ Broker charity quiz

■ Bake sales

■  Decorating the home of a young disadvantaged family

■  Donating Easter eggs for disadvantaged children

■  Donating beds, toys and food to a dog’s home.

60 Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

Our regional hubs and businesses are all encouraged to engage with the communities around them and to support charitable 
causes local to them. In 2014 our UK regions and businesses worked with and supported the following charities and good 
causes by raising funds for them or offering practical volunteering support through the Group’s Helping Hands programme:   

London 

Manchester

Gloucester

Birmingham

Ansvar UK

SEIB

Haven House 
Children’s 
Hospice

The River 
Manchester

Winston’s  
Wish

Age UK 
Gloucestershire

UK Rock 
Challenge

Mud N Madness 
Charity Challenge 
an event for 
Cancer Research 
UK and a number 
of equine charities

Dear Mark,

I am writing on behalf of Winston’s Wish to thank you and Ecclesiastical Insurance Group so much for fundraising for 
bereaved children. We really appreciate the effort and hard work everybody put into organising the carol concert at 
Gloucester Cathedral which raised an amazing £1,431.14!  It was a lovely evening with great singing.

With contributions like this, Winston’s Wish can continue to be there for children and families after the death of a loved 
one. This is one of the most devastating and sometimes traumatic situations a child can face, and can go on to have a 
detrimental effect on choices they make as they grow up. We believe that with the right support at the right time, we can 
tackle difficult feelings of isolation, anger and confusion so they can continue their lives with confidence and hope.

BITC Business Class programme

The BITC Business Class programme has been set up by the UK Government to provide a systematic framework for businesses 
to support young people facing social disadvantage by forming long-term partnerships with the schools that these young people 
attend. Business in the Community, the organisation behind the programme, believes that these partnerships are one of the most 
effective ways for businesses to support young people. 

This framework is designed to develop partnerships that are rooted in the needs of the school and underpinned by strategic 
support and collaborative action. There are currently over 290 partnerships throughout the UK.  

We are into our third year of providing support to Gloucestershire-based Millbrook Academy through a number of mentoring and 
coaching activities which marked the launch of the UK-wide BITC Business Class programme in Gloucestershire. As part of the 
initiative, schools and businesses in Gloucestershire are grouped together and meet on a regular basis to share best practice and 
pool resources. Programme members are also able to share learning and ideas with other partners nationally.

During 2014 we worked closely with Millbrook Academy for the final year of the partnership and this resulted in:

■ A collaborative event with two other schools to equip students with employability skills;
■ Collaborative work with business areas and students; and
■  Nomination and award of Business in the Community South West Community Champion for one of the teachers instrumental 

to the partnership.

Annual charity carol concert in aid of Gloucestershire charities

■  Our annual charity carol concert held at Gloucester Cathedral for Gloucestershire-based charity partners Winston’s Wish, Age 

UK Gloucestershire and Gloucester Civic Trust raised £4,700.

Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

61

02SECTIONSECTIONIRELAND

SOAR partnership

In 2014 Ecclesiastical Ireland continued to partner with SOAR - a local charity foundation which delivers positive life-skills 
workshops within and outside the school system for young people aged 10-18. These programmes are high energy, youth-
relevant and uniquely different with a focus on key transitional stages in young peoples’ lives.

Our support for SOAR included the following fundraising activities: 

■  Green for St Patrick’s Day: staff were encouraged to wear green and make a €2 donation
■  Women’s Mini Marathon: one employee ran the Dublin Women’s Mini Marathon (10km) 
■  Rough Diamond Challenge in Connemara: four employees (plus one partner) took part in the 21km introductory level 

route comprising a bike ride, assault course and run

■   Cake sale: employees baked and sold their goodies to other colleagues and to other building tenants 
■  Half-day Holiday raffles: quarterly raffle was run to win a half-day holiday  
■  Broker Quiz Night: a real team effort with over 20 employees helping to organise this event (from getting raffle prizes, 

wrapping the quiz prizes, selling raffle tickets, marking answer sheets, meeting and greeting, to generally ensuring everyone 
had a great night) with over 100 attendees including brokers, solicitors and loss adjusters.

In 2014, the Irish team raised over €22,000 (including company matching) in support of the work that SOAR does to make a 
difference to the lives of young people in Ireland. 

Three employees also supported SOAR by attending a number of their school workshops to observe the work that SOAR does 
first hand. More employees plan to attend SOAR workshops in 2015. 

Other community activities and support

■  Irish Heart Foundation – static cycle challenge (13 employees) and Croagh Patrick Climb (two employees)
■  Irish Cancer Society – daffodil day collection
■  Laura Lynn Foundation – Easter egg donations and sponsoring a radio interview
■  Focus Ireland (Homeless Charity) – Christmas presents and pre-loved clothes were donated and a corporate donation 

was also made in lieu of sending Christmas cards. 

In November 2014 Ecclesiastical Ireland undertook a local CR survey to ask employees to nominate a charity that they would 
like to support during 2015 and were asked to help shape the CR agenda for the year ahead. As a result, 70% of respondents 
agreed that they should continue to support SOAR in 2015, and therefore this partnership will continue in the year ahead.

Broker Quiz Night - SOAR

Static Cycle Challenge - Irish Heart Foundation

Rough Diamond Challenge - SOAR

62 Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

AUSTRALIA

In 2014 the team in Australia increased its community involvement significantly with the appointment of an internal committee. 
The committee, aptly named the ‘Ansvar Superheroes’, aims to build team participation in, and increase satisfaction from, the 
contribution to their giving programme, while increasing involvement with the wider community and Community Education 
Program (CEP) grant recipients.

Throughout the year the team held several charity fundraising initiatives, including themed dress-up days, morning teas, trivia 
nights, competitions and raffles - raising a total of $7,100 for Australian charities.

They also collaborated with the CEP grant recipients and other not-for-profit partners and increased team volunteering by 300%. 
Activities included guiding vision impaired people on a charity walk around the city for White Cane Day with Vision Australia, 
supervising and helping disadvantaged youth complete a wall mural painting as part of Youth Week with Mission Australia, a 
backyard blitz for two families in need with the 20th Man Fund and one team member travelling to northern Queensland and the 
Northern Territory to deliver an impactful presentation to schools in remote and rural areas with Motivational Media. Grants of 
$240,000 were given to the CEP during 2014.

Volunteering efforts during 2014 equated to a monetary value of $11,400, and meant that Ansvar Superheroes contributed a 
total of $18,500 to the Australian community.

Basketball Event

Ansvar Superheroes

White Cane Day Challenge - Vision

Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

63

02SECTIONSECTIONCANADA

During 2014 Ecclesiastical Canada staff continued to exemplify and uphold our values of social responsibility, giving back to our 
communities and getting involved in philanthropic activities by giving time and resources to a variety of worthy causes, charities 
and fundraising activities.

Ecclesiastical Canada became a national sponsor of ‘Kids Help Phone’ (KHP) in 2013, a counselling, information and referral 
service that provides professional support to children and young people who are experiencing various types of challenges. Funds 
raised have helped to create an innovative and customised online information and interactive tool for Lesbian, Gay, Bisexual, 
Transgendered and Questioning (LGBTQ) youth. Canadian staff once again lent their support by raising funds and participating in 
the second annual KHP’s ‘Walk So Kids Can Talk’ event which is Canada’s largest annual walk in support of youth mental health 
and wellbeing.

For the third consecutive year the Toronto-based staff got involved in fundraising activities to support the Heart and Stroke 
Foundation’s ‘February is Heart Month’ campaign. Riding a bike built for 30 and pedalling around the local community was a fun 
way for the team to celebrate achieving its fundraising goal. Monies raised supported heart and stroke research, prevention and 
education.

As part of Ecclesiastical Canada’s Business Internship programme, Interns were placed at the Heart and Stroke Foundation and 
KHP as part of their Customer Development placements.

During the Thanksgiving holiday, Toronto-based staff volunteered their time to the Daily Bread Food Bank to support the fight 
against hunger in Toronto. Leading up to this event, the staff ran a food drive to donate non-perishable items to the Food Bank. 
As a result of this more than 230lbs of food items and $485 in cash donations were collected.

Other causes where regional employees lent their time and support included ‘Feed Nova Scotia’ campaign in support of The 
Great Canadian Food Fight, the ‘Calgary Adopt a Family Society’ where a needy family was sponsored during the holiday season, 
Yonge Street Mission by creating hygiene kits for disadvantaged adults and youth, and the Scott Mission’s annual Christmas meal 
to help poor and homeless people.

In total Ecclesiastical Canada employees donated 757 hours of their time to good causes throughout the year which equates to 
more than one-and-a-half times that given in 2013.

Walk so kids can talk event - Canada

64 Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

THE GREATER GIVING PROGRAMME 

A strategic review of our CR programme was carried out in 2014 and a framework has been developed which ties us in to an 
overall set of Group principles, goals and societal causes and will utilise our expertise, support our vision and link our CR activities 
more closely with our core business objectives and the markets we operate in.

Our Greater Giving Programme has been launched in early 2015 and will build on the best of what Ecclesiastical already does. 
The programme will introduce a Group-wide framework for CR that covers all parts of the Group and will enable the individual 
business units and territories to develop CR activity and practice that is relevant to their local markets.

Programme overview: 

The four pillars of our Greater Giving 
Programme are: 

■  Community - giving back  

to local and national communities: 
volunteering, fundraising, corporate 
donations, campaigning across our 
three themes. Individual, joint and 
national giving

■  Workplace - giving opportunities to 
our employees, helping young people 
into employment, supporting diversity, 
staff development and positive 
working environments 

■  Marketplace - giving back to 

customers through fair and ethical 
products and services, transparency 
and regulatory compliance – not just 
doing the bare minimum, but seeking 
to go beyond what is expected 

■  Sustainability - helping to protect 
the environment through green 
initiatives.

Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

65

02SECTIONSECTIONOur Community activities will focus on three core themes which build on the Group’s strengths and are relevant to its 
target markets and include:

1. Preserving  
heritage

2. Supporting vulnerable  
groups in our market niches

3. Promoting ethics in  
financial services

we will support initiatives that protect 
heritage buildings, iconic art, heritage crafts, 
rural practices and cultural traditions.

we will provide support to groups where 
there is an alignment with our expertise 
and/or target markets.

we will seek opportunities to influence 
and improve ethical practice within 
financial services.

The ways in which we will be able to give back are through:

MY GIVING

■ Volunteering – every employee receives one paid day a year to volunteer for a charity of their choice 

■  When the business outperforms, a personal grant of £125 per employee will be available for any charity, or £250 per 

employee if the charity is aligned to one of our core themes

■  The Group will 100% match individual fundraising efforts on causes linked to its core themes and will donate up to £100 to 
supplement individual fundraising for other good causes. In addition, the Group will encourage staff to support charities by 
matching payroll giving by 50%

JOINT GIVING 

■  An additional paid volunteering day per year will be available for employees and teams when collaborating alongside 

customers and business partners to benefit charity 

■  Customers and business partners will be able to shape our programme by voting for shortlisted charities/causes and by 

contributing ideas

NATIONAL GIVING 

■  We will increase our impact by working with fewer selected charity partners on a regional and national basis to support 

causes that relate to our themes 

■ Corporate donations for international crisis appeals and to match staff donations made to these appeals 

■ Support for national fundraising days (e.g. ‘Children in Need’ in the UK)

ECCLESIASTICAL FOUNDATION

■  As part of our 125th anniversary celebrations in 2012, the Group set up the ‘125 Fund’ to support causes within the 

Gloucester community where its head office is located. The Group intends to build on this community initiative to expand the 
fund’s remit to support our three themes on a UK national basis. We anticipate that there will be opportunities to involve our 
staff, customers and business partners to generate ideas and support good causes.

The Strategic Report, outlined on pages 12 to 66, incorporates the Chief Executive’s Review, the Business Model and Strategy, 
the Key Performance Indicators, reviews of Financial Performance and Position and Risk Management and the Corporate Social 
Responsibility Report and when taken as a whole, is considered by the Directors to be fair, balanced and understandable.

By order of the Board

Mark Hews
Group Chief Executive 
24 March 2015

66 Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

Section 2  Corporate Responsibility Report

67

02SECTIONSECTIONS E C T I O N   T H R E E
Corporate Governance

03

Board of Directors 

Directors’ Report 

Corporate Governance 

- Group Finance and Investment Committee Report 

- Group Nominations Committee Report 

- Group Risk Committee Report 

- Group Audit Committee Report 

- Group Remuneration Report 

Independent Auditor’s Report 

70

72

76

80

82

86

88

94

116

Board of Directors

David Christie 
BA, BSc (Econ) 
Dip. Ed.* (a) 
(b) (e) Deputy 
Chairman 
and Senior 
Independent 
Director

Appointed to the 
Board in 2001 
and was appointed 
as the Deputy 
Chairman and 
Senior Independent 
Director in February 
2013. He retired 
as Warden of St 
Edward’s School, 
Oxford, in 2004. 
Previously he taught 
and researched 
economics in 
schools and 
universities in the 
UK and Europe, 
and has been a 
trustee to a number 
of charities. He 
was appointed 
as a Trustee of 
Allchurches Trust 
Limited in June 
2013.

Will Samuel 
BSc, FCA* (a) 
(b) Chairman

Appointed to the 
Board in January 
2006 and became 
Chairman in 
June 2009. He 
is Chairman of 
TSB Bank plc 
and Chairman of 
Howden Joinery 
Group plc (formerly 
Galliform plc). 
Previously he was 
a Senior Adviser 
to Lazard & Co. 
Limited, Senior 
Adviser to the 
PRA, Trustee and 
Honorary Treasurer 
of International 
Alert, a Non-
Executive Director 
of Edinburgh 
Investment Trust, 
Director of Schroder 
plc, Vice Chairman 
of Investment 
Banking of Citigroup 
Europe and Deputy 
Chairman and 
Senior Independent 
Non-Executive 
Director of Inchcape 
plc.

70 Section 3  Board of Directors

Mark Hews BSc 
(Hons), FIA 
Group Chief 
Executive

Jacinta Whyte 
MC Inst. M, 
ACII (c) Deputy 
Group Chief 
Executive

John Hylands 
FFA* (b) (c) (d)

Tony Latham 
ACII* (a) (c) (d)

Appointed to the 
Board in March 
2008. Until 
December 2007 he 
was a member of 
the Group Executive 
of RSA Group plc. 
He is Chairman of 
Pool Reinsurance 
Limited and a 
Director of Codan 
A/S.

Appointed to the 
Board in September 
2007. Until March 
2007 he was an 
Executive Director 
of Standard Life 
plc. He is currently 
a Director of 
Alliance Trust PLC, 
Chairman of the 
trustees of the BOC 
and Standard Life 
pension schemes, 
a Governor of the 
Royal Conservatoire 
of Scotland and a 
school governor.

Appointed Group 
Chief Executive in 
May 2013 and was 
previously the Group 
Chief Financial 
Officer. Appointed 
to the Board in 
June 2009 and 
appointed to the 
Board of MAPFRE 
RE in December 
2013. He was 
formerly a Director 
of HSBC Life and 
Chief Executive 
of M&S Life. Prior 
to this he was 
Finance Director 
at Norwich Union 
Healthcare. He 
started his financial 
career at Deloitte 
as a consultant and 
actuary.

Appointed Deputy 
Group Chief 
Executive and to the 
Board in July 2013. 
She is responsible 
for the Group’s 
general insurance 
business globally, 
is the Interim UK 
Managing Director 
and was also 
appointed to the 
Ansvar Australia 
Board during 
2013. She joined 
Ecclesiastical in 
2003 as a General 
Manager and Chief 
Agent of the Group’s 
Canadian business 
a role which she 
continues to do. 
Starting her career 
as an underwriter 
with RSA in Dublin 
in 1974, she moved 
with them to Canada 
in 1988, holding a 
number of senior 
executive positions 
in both Ireland and 
Canada.

Board of Directors

S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

03

Caroline Taylor 
BSc (Hons)* (e)

Appointed to the 
Board in September 
2014. Until May 
2012 she was an 
Executive Director 
of Goldman Sachs 
Asset Management 
International. She is 
currently a Non-
Executive Director 
of Brewin Dolphin 
Holdings plc.

*Non-Executive 
Directors 
(NEDs) 

Key to membership 
of Group Board 
Committees

(a)  Finance and 
Investment
(b) Nominations 
(c) Risk 
(d) Audit 
(e) Remuneration

The Venerable 
Christine 
Wilson* (e)

Denise Wilson 
BA (Hons), 
FCII* (d) (e)

Tim Carroll BA, 
MBA, FCII* (a) 
(c) (d)

Appointed to the 
Board in June 2012 
and has served 
for 15 years in 
parochial ministry. 
She was Chaplain 
to the High Sheriff 
of East Sussex 
in 2008 and has 
been Archdeacon 
of Chesterfield 
in the Diocese 
of Derby since 
2010. She is also 
a member of the 
Church of England 
General Synod. In 
December 2013 
she was elected as  
the  East Midlands 
female regional 
representative to the 
House of Bishops. 
She has also been 
chair of a number of 
charities.

Appointed to the 
Board in December 
2010. She is 
currently CEO for 
the Lord Davies 
Review of Women 
on Boards and 
Chairman of the 
Friends Board at 
the Royal Academy 
of Arts. In a prior 
executive capacity, 
at National Grid 
until 2011 and 
previously BG 
Group and British 
Gas, she has served 
in many senior 
roles including 
Head of Investor 
Relations, Global 
Audit Director, and 
Commercial and 
Customer Director, 
and started her 
career in insurance 
with RSA.

Appointed to the 
Board in April 
2013. He is an 
international 
business leader 
with significant 
London market and 
Lloyd’s experience, 
including roles 
as CEO of Swiss 
Re’s UK holding 
company, CEO 
Europe of GE 
Insurance Solutions, 
President and CEO 
of GE Reinsurance 
Inc in the USA and 
Active Underwriter 
of Canopius 
Syndicate 4444 
at Lloyd’s. He has 
held a number of 
industry positions 
including Chairman 
of the International 
Underwriting 
Association and 
President of the 
Insurance Institute 
of London.

Ian Campbell, 
BSc (Econ) 
Hons, ACA, 
Group Chief 
Financial 
Officer

Appointed to the 
Board in April 2014. 
He is a Chartered 
Accountant with 
more than 27 years’ 
experience in the 
financial services 
sector. His career 
started at KPMG 
where he spent 
13 years in their 
Insurance and 
Consulting Practice 
covering a wide 
range of projects 
for Lloyd’s, London 
market and life 
insurance companies. 
Since then he has 
held executive 
positions at a 
number of insurance 
companies. Before 
joining Ecclesiastical 
in 2012, he was 
Group Chief Financial 
Officer for Torus 
Insurance where 
his role included 
acquisitions, finance, 
investment and tax 
management, capital 
raising, actuarial and 
reinsurance.

Section 3  Board of Directors

71

Directors’ 
Report

The Directors submit their annual report and accounts for Ecclesiastical 
Insurance Office plc, together with the consolidated financial statements 
of the Group for the year ended 31 December 2014. The Group Chief 
Executive’s Review, Strategic Report, and Corporate Governance section 
(this includes Board Governance, the Group Finance and Investment 
Committee Report, the Group Nominations Committee Report, the Group 
Risk Committee Report, the Group Audit Committee Report and the 
Group Remuneration Report) are all incorporated by reference into this 
Directors’ Report.

Principal activities

The Group operates principally as a provider of general insurance 
in addition to offering a range of financial services, with offices 
in the UK, Ireland, Canada and Australia. A list of the Company’s 
main subsidiary undertakings are given on page 179 and details of 
international branches are shown on page 185.

Ownership

At the date of this report the entire issued Ordinary share capital 
of the Company and none of the issued 8.625% Non-Cumulative 
Irredeemable Preference shares of £1 each (‘Preference shares’) 
were owned by Ecclesiastical Insurance Group plc. In turn, the entire 
issued Ordinary share capital of Ecclesiastical Insurance Group plc 
was owned by Allchurches Trust Limited (ATL), the ultimate parent  
of the Group.

72 Section 3  Directors’ Report

S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

03

There have been no changes to their holdings between the 
end of the financial year and the date of this report.

No contract of significance subsisted during or at the end 
of the financial year in which a Director was or is materially 
interested.

Dividends

Dividends paid on the Preference shares were  
£9,181,000 (2013: £9,181,000).

The Directors do not recommend a final dividend on the 
Ordinary shares (2013: £nil), and no interim dividends were 
paid in respect of either the current or prior year.

Charitable and political donations

Charitable donations paid, and provided for, by the Group in 
the year amounted to £25.2 million (2013: £5.5 million).

During the last 10 years, a total of £115.1 million (2013: £95.3 
million) has been provided by Group companies for church and 
charitable purposes.

It is the Group’s policy not to make political donations.

Board of Directors

The Directors  of the Company at the date of this report are 
stated on page 70 and 71.

Ian Campbell was appointed as Group Chief Financial Officer 
on 30 April 2014. Caroline Taylor was appointed as a NED of 
the Group on 8 September 2014.

In line with the Financial Reporting Council’s (FRC) UK 
Corporate Governance Code (the Code) the Board has 
voluntarily chosen to comply with the recommended annual 
re-election of Directors. All Directors that have served since 
the last annual general meeting (AGM) will be proposed for re-
election at the forthcoming AGM, and Caroline Taylor and Ian 
Campbell will be recommended for election at the forthcoming 
AGM following recommendation from the Group Nominations 
Committee.

The Group has made qualifying third-party indemnity provisions 
for the benefit of its Directors. These were in place throughout 
the year and remain in force at the date of this report.

Neither the Directors nor their connected persons held any 
beneficial interest in any Ordinary shares of the Company 
during the year ended 31 December 2014.  There has been no 
change in this position since the end of the financial year and 
the date of this report.

The following Directors of the Group, and their connected 
persons, held Preference shares in the capital of the Company 
at 31 December 2014:

Director

Nature of interest

Number of Non-Cumulative 
Irredeemable Preference Shares held

David Christie

Director

Mark Hews

Connected person

Will Samuel

Director

11,079

75,342

151,000

Section 3  Directors’ Report

73

Auditor and the disclosure of information to 
auditor

So far as each person who was a Director at the date of 
approving this report is aware, there is no relevant audit 
information that the auditor is unaware of that could be needed 
by the auditor in order to prepare their report. Having made 
enquiries of fellow Directors and the Group’s auditor, each 
Director has taken all the steps that they ought to have taken 
as a Director in order to make themselves aware of any relevant 
audit information and to establish that the auditor is aware of 
that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in 
accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

The Group Audit Committee reviews the reappointment of the 
auditor, including the auditor’s effectiveness and independence, 
and recommends the auditor’s reappointment and remuneration 
to the Board. Further details are disclosed in the Group Audit 
Committee Report starting on page 88.

In accordance with Section 489 of the Companies Act 2006, a 
resolution proposing that Deloitte LLP be reappointed as auditor 
of the Group will be put to the forthcoming AGM.

Employees

The Group recognises the importance of employee 
communication and aims to keep employees informed about its 
affairs through the use of briefing groups, Group newsletters 
and the publication of financial reports. Regular meetings 
are held between management and other employees and 
discussion encouraged. It is the Group’s policy to give full 
consideration to applications for employment by disabled 
persons. Appropriate adjustments are arranged for disabled 
persons, including retraining for alternative work of employees 
who become disabled, to promote their career development 
within the organisation.

Principal risks and uncertainties

The Directors have carried out a robust assessment of the 
principal risks facing the Group including those that threaten 
its business model, future performance, solvency and 
liquidity. The principal risks and uncertainties, together with 
the financial risk management objectives and policies of the 
Group, are included in the Risk Management section of the 
Strategic Report and can be found starting on page 46.

Going concern

The Financial Performance section on page 42 and Risk 
Management section of the Strategic Report starting on 
page 46 provide a review of the Group’s business activities 
and describe the principal risks and uncertainties, including 
exposures to insurance and financial risk.

The Group has considerable financial resources: financial 
investments of £892.4m (including current assets classified 
as held for sale), 98% of which are liquid (2013: financial 
investments of £946.5m, 97% liquid); cash and cash 
equivalents of £107.5m and no borrowings (2013: cash 
and cash equivalents of £107.2m and no borrowings); and 
a regulatory enhanced capital cover of 2.9 (2013: 2.6). As a 
consequence, the Directors have a reasonable expectation 
that the Group is well placed to manage its business risks 
successfully and continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. Accordingly, they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing the annual report and 
accounts.

74 Section 3  Directors’ Report

 
03

Directors’ responsibilities

Responsibility statement

We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

■  The financial statements, prepared in accordance with 
IFRS, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, 
financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the 
undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole;

■  The Strategic Report includes a fair review of the 

development and performance of the business and the 
position of the Company and the undertakings included 
in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a 
description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they 
face; and

■  The annual report and financial statements, taken as a 

whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and provide 
the information necessary for shareholders to assess the 
Company’s position and performance, business model  
and strategy.

By order of the Board

Will Samuel
Chairman 
24 March 2015

Mark Hews
Group Chief Executive 
24 March 2015

The Directors are responsible for preparing the annual report 
and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law 
and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to prepare financial 
statements for each financial year. Under that law the Directors 
are required to prepare the Group financial statements in 
accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards 
(IFRS) as adopted by the European Union and Article 4 of 
the International Accounting Standards (IAS) Regulation and 
have also chosen to prepare the parent company financial 
statements under IFRS as adopted by the European Union. 
Under company law the Directors must not approve the 
accounts unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the Company and of the profit 
or loss of the Company for that period. In preparing these 
financial statements, IAS 1 requires that Directors:

■  Properly select and apply accounting policies;

■  Present information, including accounting policies, in a 
manner that provides relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information;

■  Provide additional disclosures when compliance with the 
specific requirements in IFRS are insufficient to enable 
users to understand the impact of particular transactions, 
other events and conditions on the  Company’s financial 
position and financial performance; and

■  Make an assessment of the Company’s ability to continue as 

a going concern.

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate 
accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the 
Group’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy 
at any time the financial position of the Company and enable 
them to ensure that the financial statements comply with 
the Companies Act 2006. They are also responsible for 
safeguarding the assets of the Group and hence for taking 
reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and 
other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and 
integrity of the corporate and financial information included 
on the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Section 3  Directors’ Report

75

SECTIONSECTION 
Corporate 
Governance

The Board of Directors are committed to applying the highest standards of 
corporate governance and believe that the affairs of the Company should be 
conducted in accordance with best business practice. Accordingly, the Company 
has chosen to voluntarily comply with the Code’s Main Principles and Code 
Provisions, where relevant to the Company. The Code is available from the FRC’s 
website. The Company does not have any shares with a Premium Listing on the 
London Stock Exchange and is therefore not legally required to comply with the 
Code. The corporate governance disclosures include the Board Governance 
section, Group Nominations Committee Report, Group Risk Committee Report, 
Group Audit Committee Report and Group Remuneration Report.

Board governance
The Board
The Chairman and Group Chief Executive

The roles of the Chairman and the Group Chief Executive are undertaken by separate individuals. The Chairman, Will Samuel, 
is responsible for leadership of the Board. The day-to-day management of the business is undertaken by the Group Chief 
Executive, Mark Hews, assisted by the GMB.

Senior Independent Director

David Christie, Deputy Chairman, has been appointed as the Senior Independent Director (SID). The SID supports and acts as 
a sounding board for the Chairman and is responsible for overseeing the governance practices of the Company and leading the 
Directors in their appraisal of the Chairman. Along with the Chairman, the SID is the primary contact for the shareholders and 
they meet regularly to share and understand views.

76 Section 3  Corporate Governance

03

Ecclesiastical Board 
of Directors

Group Finance & 
Investment Committee

Group Nominations 
Committee

Group Risk
Committee

Group Audit 
Committee

Group Remuneration 
Committee

Directors’ conflicts

A Conflicts Register is maintained by the Group Company Secretary to monitor and manage any potential conflicts of interest. 
Training on the Companies Act 2006 has been given to all Directors on the provisions and Directors are regularly reminded of 
their duties. Any conflicts are declared at the first Board meeting at which the Director becomes aware of a potential conflict 
and then recorded in the Conflicts Register. The Board considers all conflicts in line with the provisions set out in the Company’s 
Articles. The Directors are required to review their interests recorded in the Conflicts Register on a biannual basis.

Role of the Board

The Board is responsible to the Group’s shareholders for the long-term success of the Group, its strategy, values and its 
governance. Great importance is placed on a well-informed and decisive Board, and Board meetings are scheduled and held 
regularly throughout the year.

A one-year rolling plan of business for discussion is reviewed and agreed by the Board annually to ensure that the Board is 
focused on the right issues at the right times and sufficient time is allowed for appropriate consideration and debate.

The Board sets annual objectives for each year in addition to setting the Group’s strategic direction. These are implemented 
through approval and regular assessment of the business plan and strategy process. At each Board meeting the Directors 
discuss strategic and business matters, financial, operational and governance issues and other relevant business items that arise. 
Following Committee meetings the Board receives oral reports from the Chairs of each Committee at the next Board meeting.

Board Committees

The Group has five Board Committees which are shown in the diagram above:

Details of all the Board Committees are contained within their respective reports that follow: the Group Finance and Investment 
Committee Report on page 80; the Group Nominations Committee Report on page 82; the Group Risk Committee Report on 
page 86; the Group Audit Committee Report on page 88; and the Group Remuneration Report on page 94.

The terms of reference for all five Board Committees can be obtained from either the Company’s registered office address or the 
website at: www.ecclesiastical.com/general/investorrelations/corporategovernance/termsofreferenceofcommittees

Attendance at meetings

Directors are required to attend all Board meetings and strategy days as well as Committee meetings where they are members. 
In 2014, five scheduled Board meetings and two off-site strategy days were held. In addition, five scheduled training sessions 
took place.

All Directors receive papers and minutes for all meetings, unless restricted due to conflict or sensitivity. Papers are circulated 
electronically, generally one week in advance of all scheduled meetings. All Directors have access to the Group Company 
Secretary and to independent professional advice at the Company’s expense as required.

Section 3  Corporate Governance

77

SECTIONSECTIONBelow is a record of the Directors’ attendance for the Board meetings (including off-site strategy days) during 2014:

Board attendance table

Executive Directors:

Director since

Meetings eligible  
to attend

Meetings  
attended

Mark Hews

S. Jacinta Whyte

Ian Campbell

June 2009

July 2013

April 2014

7

7

5

7

7

5

Non-Executive Directors

Director since

Meetings eligible  
to attend

Meetings  
attended

Will Samuel (Chairman)

David Christie (SID)

Tim Carroll

John Hylands

Denise Wilson

Tony Latham

Christine Wilson

Caroline Taylor

January 2006

January 2001

April 2013

September 2007

December 2010

March 2008

June 2012

September 2014

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

2

7

7

7

7

7

7

7

2

During 2014, the Board made decisions on the following business issues and routine matters:

Routine matters

Operational matters

Projects

• Board’s annual objectives 
• Financial performance and statements 
• Risk management, appetite, and registers 
• Overview of compliance and audit work undertaken for the Group Audit Committee 
• Dividends, charitable donations and Gift Aid 
• Setting and reviewing budgets 
• Committee reports and recommendations 
• Health & Safety

• Performance, strategic and business plans for Group businesses 
• Group reinsurance arrangements 
• General insurance claims reserves 
• Sales and claims 
• Treating Customers Fairly and complaints handling 
• Review of staff pension arrangements 
• Determining NEDs’ fees for recommendation at a general meeting 
• Stakeholder relationships 
• Review of UK general insurance business including niches 
• Review of overseas businesses

• Review of Group structure 
• Proposition review 
• Review of IT strategy 
• Change programme and Group vision 
• Review of broker strategy 
• Rebranding of Investment Management division 
• Review of corporate responsibility (CR) strategy

Governance and 
regulatory matters

• Changes to Executive and NEDs 
• Taxation matters 
• Evaluation of the Board 
• Capital requirements, solvency position and Own Risk Solvency Assessment (ORSA)

78 Section 3  Corporate Governance

03

Internal controls

The Board is ultimately responsible for the systems of risk management and internal control maintained by the Group and 
reviews their appropriateness and effectiveness annually. The Board views the management of risk as a key accountability and 
the responsibility of all management and believes that, for the period in question, the Group has maintained an adequate and 
effective system of risk management and internal control that complies with the Code. Further details are set out in the Risk 
Management section on page 46.

The Group embeds risk management into its strategic and business planning activities whereby major risks that could affect the 
business in the short and long term are identified by the relevant management together with an assessment of the effectiveness 
of the processes and controls in place to manage and mitigate these risks.

The Chartered Institute of Internal Auditors (CIIA) issued guidance during 2013, and as a result of this guidance the internal 
audit and compliance functions now have separate reporting lines. More detail on how the internal audit function operates can be 
found in the Group Audit Committee Report which starts on page 88.

The Group’s internal control framework is vital in setting the tone for the Group and in creating a high degree of control 
consciousness in all employees.

A code of conduct and a code of ethics are embedded into the culture of the Group and are accessible to all staff via the intranet.

Assurance on the adequacy and effectiveness of internal control systems is obtained through management reviews, control self-
assessment and internal audits.

Systems of internal control are designed to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives, and 
can provide reasonable, but not absolute assurance as to the prevention and detection of financial misstatements, errors, fraud or 
violation of law or regulations.

By order of the Board

Mrs. R. J. Hall
Group Company Secretary 
24 March 2015

Section 3  Corporate Governance

79

SECTIONSECTIONGroup Finance 
and Investment 
Committee Report

Chairman’s introduction

I am pleased to present my first Group Finance and Investment 
Committee report describing the work we have undertaken during  
the past year. 

Our main purpose is to ensure that the management 
of the Group’s financial assets, including its 
investment portfolio, is properly governed, controlled 
and performing as expected. We also review and 
advise on any major financial decisions on behalf of 
the Board. This report gives more information on how 
we performed our duties during 2014.

Tim Carroll

Chairman of the Group Finance and Investment Committee

80 Section 3 Group Finance and Investment Committee Report

03

Membership

The members of the Group Finance and Investment Committee are shown in the table below:

Committee member

Member since

Tim Carroll (Chairman)

August 2013*

David Christie

Will Samuel

Tony Latham

September 2010

March 2006

February 2009

Meetings eligible  
to attend

Meetings  
attended

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

*Tim Carroll was appointed Chairman of the Committee with effect from 1 January 2014.

The Committee reviews its terms of reference annually and during the year held four scheduled meetings. The remit of  
the Committee, in line with its terms of reference and designated financial limits, is to:

■  Consider and review Group treasury management and Group tax strategies;
■  Consider and review Group capital management, taking into consideration the Individual Capital Assessment (ICA) and risk 

appetite;

■  Consider and review major capital projects and contracts;
■  Consider and review major investments of the Group including the acquisition or disposal of interests of more than 5% in the 

voting shares of any listed company;

■  Consider and review acquisitions and disposal of investment property or businesses by the Group, and enter into formal 

discussions with the intention of making a takeover offer;

■  Consider and review borrowing monies, committing any Group Company to a guarantee or indemnity for the performance of a 

subsidiary, or authorising a mortgage or a charge over the whole or any part of the Group’s undertaking;

■  Consider and review circulars to shareholders and listing particulars;
■  Provide broad Group strategy and set investment parameters for Group portfolio investment matters including derivative 

instruments within the context of overall risk to the business and monitor adherence to parameters;
■  Consider monthly investment reports and review investment performance against benchmark levels; and
■  Oversee and review performance of delegated funds.

During 2014, the Committee’s main activities were in line with its remit above and included:

■  Review of the annual investment strategy;
■  Review of quarterly investment reports and investment performance against benchmark levels;
■  Review of investment property;
■  Consideration of a potential acquisition by a subsidiary;
■  Review of tax strategy;
■  Consideration of a potential sale of business by a subsidiary; and
■  Consideration of the lease of a new office building.

By order of the Board

Tim Carroll
Chairman of the Group Finance and Investment Committee 
24 March 2015

Section 3  Group Finance and Investment Committee Report

81

SECTIONSECTIONGroup Nominations 
Committee Report

Chairman’s introduction

I am pleased to present the Group Nominations 
Committee’s report describing the work we 
have carried out in 2014. Our main purpose is 
to ensure that there is an appropriate balance 
of skills, knowledge and experience on the 
Board, its Committees and within the Group’s 
subsidiary companies. This report gives more 
detailed information on how we performed our 
duties during the year.

Will Samuel

Chairman of the Group Nominations Committee

Membership

The Group Nominations Committee comprises the NEDs shown below and are appointed by the Board:

Committee member

Member since

Will Samuel (Chairman)

David Christie

John Hylands

June 2008

January 2001

May 2013

Meetings eligible  
to attend

Meetings  
attended

3

3

3

3

3

3

82 Section 3 Group Nominations Committee Report

03

The Committee held three scheduled meetings during the year. The remit of the Committee, in line with its terms of reference, is to:

 ■ Review the structure, size and composition of the Board and its Committees;
 ■ Conduct evaluations of the Board and Committees and make recommendations to the Board;
 ■ Oversee and approve the Board composition and officer changes in Group subsidiaries and senior management changes 

within the Group;

 ■ Consider Board and senior executive succession planning for the Group;
 ■ Assess and review Directors’ skills, knowledge and experience;
 ■ Review the Group’s leadership needs in order to compete effectively in the target markets;
 ■ Undertake recruitment of new Directors and Executives to the Board, utilising external search consultancy as appropriate; and
 ■ Oversee the content and operation of the induction programme, annual training programme, and continuous professional 

development (CPD) of Directors.

The principal activities of the Committee during 2014 included:

 ■ Review of the Board’s composition;
 ■ Review and agreement of the matrix of the Board’s leadership skills and technical skills to identify gaps; 
 ■ Review of the succession plans for the Board and senior management; 
 ■ Commencement of a selection process for a new NED; 
 ■ Selection and recommendation of the appointment of Caroline Taylor as a new NED to the Board;
 ■ Review of diversity trends across the Group; 
 ■ Board evaluation at the end of 2014: selection of an external evaluator for the Board and Committee evaluations and approval 

of the bespoke questionnaires;

 ■ Review of the Directors’ annual appraisal and development needs; 
 ■ Review of the CPD programme for Directors; and
 ■ Review of the Board training programme.

Board composition and independence

The Board comprises a Non-Executive Chairman, seven other NEDs and three Executive Directors. The Group believes the 
size and composition of the Board gives it sufficient independence, balance and broad experience to consider the issues of 
strategy, performance, resources and standards of conduct. The strong representation of NEDs on the Board demonstrates its 
independence, provides a greater depth of experience and facilitates challenge.

Board appointments

All NEDs are provided with a letter of appointment on acceptance of the appointment, which includes the terms and conditions of 
their role. Letters of appointment are available on request from the Group Company Secretary.

Section 3 Group Nominations Committee Report

83

SECTIONSECTIONBoard diversity

Ecclesiastical recognises the benefits of having a diverse Board. It is committed to improving diversity on the Board, including 
gender diversity, and acknowledges diversity both improves performance of the Board and strengthens the business.

Currently the representation of women on the Board stands at 36%, with four women members in a current membership of 
11. The Board will take the opportunity, as and when appropriate, to improve further its gender balance. An external search 
consultancy, Russell Reynolds Associates (who had no other connection with the Group) has been used in the appointment of 
NEDs during the year to ensure best practice is adhered to.

The Board also recognises the importance of improving gender balance at senior levels within the organisation and is actively 
reviewing diversity across the Group.

Board performance and evaluation
Induction

All Directors are required to undertake a formal and comprehensive induction to the Group upon joining the Board. The induction 
is a three-stage process and is undertaken by the Legal and Secretarial Department.

On acceptance of a position on the Board, all Directors receive an induction pack, which includes their appointment letter and 
terms; latest audited report and accounts; constitutional documents; protocols on conflicts of interest, price-sensitive information, 
Directors’ duties, share dealing, data protection and Board procedures; the Code; Board minutes for the current and past year; 
and Board dates and contact details.

After appointment, a two-day induction programme is provided where presentations are given by Legal and Secretarial, Group 
Compliance, Finance, Group Risk, Actuarial, Group Strategy, and heads of the businesses. The programme is also offered to 
other Directors as a refresher every two years and when a programme is being run. New Directors also meet individually with the 
Chairman of the ultimate parent company (Allchurches Trust Limited), the Group Chairman, the Deputy Chairman and SID, and 
each of the Executive Directors.

The third stage of the induction is participation in the Board’s CPD programme.

Training

Throughout the year, Directors participate in the CPD programme, which includes internal training on topical issues (including 
business familiarisation) relevant to the Group’s commercial and regulatory environment and attendance on relevant external 
CPD opportunities, funded by the Company. In 2014, five internal training sessions took place and covered Solvency II, Ethical 
Investments, Conduct Risk and PSA Reserves.

The Group Company Secretary maintains annual CPD records for all Directors, which the Chairman reviews as part of their annual 
appraisal. Training and development needs of Board members are also reviewed in the Committee.

Performance evaluations

At the end of 2014, the Committee led an external evaluation of the Board and its five Board Committees, assisted by the 
Company Secretariat. An external board evaluation provider, Lintstock Limited, conducted this evaluation, and is not connected 
with the Group. All Board and Committee members were required to complete bespoke Board and Committee assessments. 
The outcome of the evaluations was considered by the Board and Group Nominations Committee in February 2015. The Group 
Nominations Committee will monitor the implementation of the agreed recommendations.

A full external evaluation of the Board will be undertaken every two years as recommended by the Code. The next external 
evaluation is expected to take place at the end of 2016.

All Directors receive an annual appraisal from the Chairman. The Chairman is appraised by the Board, in his absence, led by  
the SID.

84 Section 3 Group Nominations Committee Report

03

Re-election of Directors

In line with the Code, the Board has voluntarily chosen to comply with the annual re-election of Directors who have served their 
initial term. NEDs are appointed for a period of three years, and are expected to serve a minimum of two consecutive terms, 
subject to satisfactory performance. Where NEDs have served for more than six years the Committee has undertaken a rigorous 
annual review before their recommendation for annual re-election. The report and accounts accompany the AGM notice and 
therefore provide the biographical information for the Board members seeking election and re-election.

The Chairman is satisfied that the performance of each NED is effective and sufficient time has been spent on the  
Group’s affairs.

By the end of 2014, four NEDs, Will Samuel, David Christie, Tony Latham, and John Hylands, had all served for more than six 
years on the Board. The Committee considered, in their absence, each NED’s respective contribution and attributes, the Board 
composition and succession planning when making their decision. Following rigorous review, the Committee was satisfied that 
their length of service has not affected their independence and has proposed them for re-election at the forthcoming AGM.

The Board believes that all the NEDs were independent throughout 2014. Independence is reviewed as part of each Director’s 
annual appraisal, considered by the Committee, and agreed by the Board annually. The Board has determined that, even though 
David Christie has served as a Director for more than nine years, he should be regarded as an independent NED as he remains 
independent in character and judgement and there are no circumstances or relationships likely to affect his judgement as a 
Director.

Executive Directors’ other commitments

External directorships are considered to be valuable in terms of broadening the experience and knowledge of Executive 
Directors, provided there is no actual or potential conflict of interest, and the commitment required is not excessive. All 
appointments are subject to approval by the Board, and the Conflicts Register maintained by the Group Company Secretary is 
used to monitor external interests. Any monetary payments received by Executive Directors from outside directorships are paid 
over to and retained by the Group.

Non-Executive Directors’ commitments

The Committee evaluates the time NEDs spend on the Company’s business annually and is satisfied that in 2014 the NEDs 
continued to be effective and fulfilled their time commitment as stated in their letters of appointment. Accordingly, all NEDs at the 
date of this report are recommended for re-election at the AGM.

By order of the Board

Will Samuel
Chairman of the Group Nominations Committee 
24 March 2015

Section 3 Group Nominations Committee Report

85

SECTIONSECTIONGroup Risk 
Committee Report

Chairman’s introduction

I am pleased to present the Group Risk 
Committee’s report describing the work done by 
the Committee during the past year. The Group 
has voluntarily chosen to include a Group Risk 
Committee Report in the annual report of the 
Company in addition to the disclosures in the 
Risk Management section on page 46.

Tony Latham

Chairman of the Group Risk Committee

Membership

The Group Risk Committee members and their attendance at meetings during the year are shown below:

Committee member

Member since

Tony Latham (Chairman)

June 2010

S. Jacinta Whyte

Tim Carroll

John Hylands

February 2014*

August 2013

September 2010

Meetings eligible  
to attend

Meetings  
attended

4

4

4

4

4

3

4

4

*S. Jacinta Whyte was appointed to the Committee with effect from 12 February 2014

86 Section 3 Group Risk Committee Report

03

The Group Risk Committee was created in June 2010 and comprises the Directors shown in the table opposite who were 
appointed by the Board. In addition, Will Samuel (Chairman of the Board) is normally in attendance at the meetings.

The Group Chief Risk Officer reports to the Committee and has direct access to the Chairman of the Committee and the NEDs. The 
Committee ensures that they meet with the Group Chief Risk Officer at least once a year without the Executives present.

The remit of the Committee is to:

 ■ Recommend to the Board the Group’s overall risk appetite tolerance and strategy in the context of the current and prospective 

macroeconomic and financial environment and monitor compliance with it; 

 ■ Recommend to the Board the Group’s strategy, policy and processes for risk management, and monitor compliance; 
 ■ Monitor the effectiveness of the Group’s enterprise risk management framework, risk policies and systems;
 ■ Receive and review risk-based management reports and other information, making recommendations for change as appropriate;
 ■ Ensure that material risks facing the Group have been identified and addressed appropriately; 
 ■ Consider the material findings of Compliance and Internal Audit reports carried out for the Group Audit Committee and their effect 

on the Group’s risks; 

 ■ Recommend to the Board the Individual Capital Assessment (ICA);
 ■ Approve the appointment or removal of the Group Chief Risk Officer; 
 ■ Ensure the Board receives adequate training on risk matters; and
 ■ Ensure appropriate liaison with other Board Committees, e.g. the Group Remuneration Committee and the Group Audit Committee.

During 2014, the Committee held four meetings. In addition to the routine matters highlighted above, it also considered specifically:

 ■ The Group’s risk profile, ensuring that this reflected the Group’s key risks during the year;
 ■ The annual review and recommendation of the Group’s risk appetite (including catastrophe risk appetite);
 ■ Reporting against the risk appetite from each of the Executive Risk Committees at each ordinary meeting and where appropriate 

challenging appetite breaches or potential breaches;

 ■ A ‘dry run’ Own Risk and Solvency Assessment (ORSA) at Group level; 
 ■ The risk impact of remuneration proposals and approval of the Group Chief Risk Officer’s reports to the Group Remuneration 

Committee; 

 ■ Property insurance concentrations by business unit; 
 ■ The discussion and approval of reverse stress test results and recommendations arising there from;
 ■ The capital requirements across the Group, and recommendation of the Group’s ICA as at the end of 2013; 
 ■ Amendments to and implementation of the Control and Risk Self-Assessment (CRSA) process at Group level;
 ■ The implementation of Solvency II and the implications for the Group; 
 ■ Continuing development of the Group’s internal model; 
 ■ The governance and overarching policy framework; 
 ■ A report on a crisis management scenario exercise undertaken at the Group’s head office; 
 ■ Reports on technical pricing and outstanding risk; 
 ■ Reports from Group Compliance; 
 ■ The Group’s relationship with its regulators including reviewing the output from PRA and FCA visits; and 
 ■ In conjunction with the Group Audit Committee, further enhancing the Group’s approach in long-tail liability claims reserving.

By order of the Board 

Tony Latham
Chairman of the Group Risk Committee 
24 March 2015

Section 3 Group Risk Committee Report

87

SECTIONSECTIONGroup Audit 
Committee Report

Chairman’s introduction

The Group Audit Committee is responsible for the appropriateness of the 
Group’s financial reporting, the rigour of the external and internal audit 
processes and the Group’s management of its system of internal controls. 

The Committee discusses a broad range of 
topics, raises challenges and questions to support 
understanding and ensures that all appropriate 
considerations have been made. Additional information 
and reporting has been provided on request and there 
has been an open dialogue between the Committee, 
the Group’s management team, the Director of Group 
Internal Audit and the external auditors throughout the 
year. The most significant matters discussed over the 
course of the year are described in this report.

John Hylands

Chairman of the Group Audit Committee

88 Section 3 Group Audit Committee Report

03

Membership

The Committee members have been selected with the aim of providing the wide range of financial and commercial 
expertise necessary to fulfil the Committee’s duties.  The Board considers that John Hylands has recent and relevant 
financial experience, as required by the Code.

The Group Audit Committee members and their attendance at meetings during the year are shown below:

Committee member

Member since

Meetings eligible to 
attend

Meetings 
attended

John Hylands (Chairman)

Tim Carroll

Tony Latham

Denise Wilson

March 2008

April 2013

December 2008

August 2011

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

Committee meetings

During the year, the Committee had six scheduled meetings. In addition to the members of the Committee the Chairman of the 
Board, the Group Chief Executive, the Group Chief Financial Officer and the Director of Group Internal Audit attend meetings by 
invitation. Other relevant people from the business are also invited to attend certain meetings in order to provide a deeper level 
of insight into certain key issues and developments. We also invite our external auditor, Deloitte LLP, to attend our meetings, and 
during 2014 they attended five of the six meetings held.

The Committee also meets with the Director of Group Internal Audit on an annual basis, without management present, to discuss 
the GIA function and any issues arising from its activity. In addition, the Committee also meets with the external auditor on an 
annual basis, without management present, to discuss the external audit and any issues arising from it.

Key objectives

The Committee’s key objectives are to:

 ■ Ensure the integrity of the financial statements;
 ■ Review and assess audit arrangements, both externally and internally; and
 ■ Review the Group’s systems of internal controls and risk management.

The full terms of reference of the Committee are available on Ecclesiastical’s website at: 
http://www.ecclesiastical.com/general/investorrelations/corporategovernance/termsofreferenceofcommittees/index.aspx

Section 3 Group Audit Committee Report

89

SECTIONSECTIONMain activities of the Committee during the year

At its six meetings during the year, the Committee focused on: 

Financial reporting

The primary role of the Committee in relation to financial reporting is to review, challenge and agree the appropriateness of the 
half-year and annual financial statements concentrating on, among other matters:

 ■ The quality and acceptability of the Group’s accounting policies and practices;
 ■ The clarity of the disclosures and compliance with financial reporting standards and relevant financial and governance reporting 

requirements;

 ■ Material areas in which significant judgements have been made by the Group or there has been discussion with the external 

auditor;

 ■ Whether the Group’s annual report and accounts, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable and provide the 
information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s position and performance, business model and strategy; and

 ■ Any correspondence from regulators in relation to financial reporting.

To aid this review, the Committee considered reports from the Group Management Board, the Group Chief Financial Officer and 
reports from the external auditor on the outcomes of their half-year review and annual audit. As a Committee we support Deloitte 
LLP in displaying the necessary professional scepticism their role requires.

A particular focus of the Committee during 2014 was the appropriateness of the Group’s general insurance liability claims 
reserves and the reserves held in respect of PSA claims. The work undertaken by the Committee during the year is described in 
more detail in the first of the significant issues set out in the table opposite.

Audit planning

The Committee oversees the plans for the external audit to ensure it is comprehensive, risk based and cost-effective. Deloitte and 
each component auditor draft initial audit plans in conjunction with executive management and present them for review by the 
Committee. The plans describe the proposed scope of the work and the approach to be taken. They also propose the materiality 
levels to be used. In order to focus the audit work on the right areas the auditors identify particular risk issues based on their 
knowledge of the business and operating environment, discussions with management and the half-year review. The fee for the 
audit is also proposed as part of this discussion.

Review of financial statements and audit findings

The Committee reviewed the full and half-year financial statements and the reports of the external auditor on these statements. 
The Deloitte partner responsible for the Group’s audit attends the Group Audit Committee meetings to present the reports and 
answer questions from Committee members. Senior members of staff from Deloitte who have had day-to-day involvement in the 
conduct of the audit also attend.

The Committee considered the following significant issues during 2014 which can be found in the table on the next page.

90 Section 3 Group Audit Committee Report

03

ISSUE

ASSESSMENT

General 
insurance  
claims  
reserves

The estimation of the ultimate liability arising from claims made under general business insurance contracts is a 
critical accounting estimate. There is uncertainty as to the total number of claims made on each class of business, 
the amounts that such claims will be settled for and the timings of any payments.

As part of its normal duties, the Committee considered detailed reports provided by the Group’s Reserving Actuary 
and the Actuarial Function Director on the adequacy of the Group’s general insurance reserves at both the half  
year and the full year. The Committee also had two separate sessions with management outside of normal 
Committee meetings in order to understand and challenge how the reserves are set and the internal approval 
process and to review the reserving model structure and output in detail with the Group Reserving Actuary. This 
gave the members of the Committee the opportunity to question and challenge key judgements proposed by 
management at a detailed level. Following these sessions and the discussions which took place as normal during 
the November 2014 and February 2015 meetings, the Committee was satisfied that the reserving process and 
outcomes were robust and well managed and that the reserves set are reasonable.

Life insurance 
reserves

The calculation of the Group’s life insurance reserves requires management to make significant judgements about 
bond yields, discount rates, credit risk, mortality rates and current expectations of future expense levels.  
The Actuarial Function Holder’s proposed assumptions are reviewed, challenged and agreed by the Ecclesiastical  
Life Limited Board. Any one-off or unusual items are referred to the Committee for further approval. There were  
no such items referred to the Committee in 2014, and there were no changes made to the methodology previously 
applied to this closed portfolio. The key assumptions were reviewed by the Committee at a high level and, following 
this review and consideration of the report of the external auditor, the Committee was satisfied that the judgements 
made were reasonable and appropriate.

Carrying value 
of goodwill

The judgements in relation to asset impairment largely relate to the assumptions underlying the calculation of the 
value in use of the business being tested for impairment, primarily the achievability of the long-term business plan 
and macroeconomic assumptions underlying the valuation process. The Committee addresses these matters by 
receiving reports from management outlining the basis for the assumptions used. Business plans are reviewed, 
challenged and signed off by the Board.

After review, the Committee agreed with management’s conclusions that no material impairment was required for 
any of the businesses under review.

Valuation of  
defined benefit 
pension  
scheme liability

Although the Group’s main defined benefit pension scheme remains in surplus, the liabilities of the scheme are 
material in comparison to the Group’s net assets and the valuation requires many actuarial assumptions, including 
judgements in relation to long-term interest rates, inflation, longevity and investment returns.

The actuarial assumptions used are based on advice from the Group’s pension adviser, who also performs the 
calculations in respect of the schemes. The Group changed its actuarial adviser during 2014 and the Committee 
considered this additional risk when reviewing management’s proposed assumptions. The approach to setting 
assumptions remained consistent with previous years, but the new adviser has used different sources for the data 
in some instances (for example using a wider population of AA-rated corporate bonds to develop a market-specific 
yield curve in order to determine a discount rate matching the plan liabilities).

The Committee considered the assumptions used, and also compared them to benchmark data. In addition, the 
Committee considered whether it was appropriate to recognise the pension fund surplus as an asset of the Group.

After review of the assumptions used, the external advice provided, benchmark data and careful consideration of 
the requirements of IAS 19(R) and International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC) 14, the 
Committee concluded that reasonable assumptions had been used and recognition of the surplus as an asset of 
the Group was appropriate.

Carrying value  
of tax liabilities

The calculation of tax liabilities requires management to make judgements in respect of the expected tax 
payable for the current and prior periods based on the interpretation of applicable tax legislation. The Group is 
in correspondence with HM Revenue and Customs regarding the treatment of its preference share capital for 
group tax purposes. This brought additional uncertainty and judgement to setting tax provisions, particularly at the 
half year. The Committee considered the tax provisions proposed by management and the material judgements 
management had applied, particularly in relation to the ongoing discussions with HMRC. Following their review,  
the Committee concluded that tax provisions were appropriate at both the half year and full year reporting periods.

Section 3 Group Audit Committee Report

91

SECTIONSECTIONAssessment of the external auditor

The Committee is required to assess the qualifications, expertise, resources and independence of the external auditor and the 
objectivity and effectiveness of the audit process. At the conclusion of each audit the Committee performs a specific evaluation 
of the performance of the external auditor. This assessment was carried out during the year on the basis of the Committee’s own 
appraisal of the performance of the auditor and the views of the senior management team as well as consideration of materials 
provided by the auditor.

The criteria used for this assessment remained unchanged from last year and were as follows:

 ■ Delivery of a thorough and efficient global audit in compliance with agreed plan and timescales;
 ■ Provision of accurate, robust and perceptive advice on key accounting and audit judgements, technical issues and best 

practice;

 ■ A high level of professionalism and technical expertise consistently demonstrated by all audit staff and maintenance of 

continuity within the core audit team; and

 ■ Strict adherence to independence policies and other regulatory requirements.

There were no significant findings from the evaluation this year, although where appropriate, actions were agreed against any 
points raised.

Independence of the external auditor

Deloitte LLP has been the external auditor of the Group since 1998 and there has been no tender held for audit services during 
that time. The Committee monitors arrangements to ensure that the partner in charge of the audit is changed every five years 
and that the relationship between the auditor and management does not affect the auditor’s independence.

The Committee also considers whether the external audit should be tendered. Changes made to the Code in 2012 
recommended that the external audit is put out to tender at least every ten years. Given the long period since the external 
audit was last tendered, the Committee has considered the timing of the next audit tender very carefully, and in particular has 
considered the longer-term implications of the recently adopted EU legislation requiring mandatory audit firm rotation which 
will apply from June 2016. As a result of their considerations, the Committee has determined that an external audit tender will 
commence in April 2015 for the 2015 year-end audit.

The Committee is responsible for the development, implementation and monitoring of the Group’s policy on the provision of 
non-audit services by the external auditor. The policy is reviewed annually by the Committee to ensure alignment with the latest 
standards on auditor objectivity and independence, and compliance with the policy.

The policy covers a number of areas including:

 ■ The Group’s restrictions, procedures and safeguards, relative to the engagement of the external auditor on non-audit services;
 ■ The Group’s requirements for the pre-approval and reporting of fees for non-audit services;
 ■ The Group’s requirements on the appointment of former audit employees of the external auditor; and
 ■ The requirement to keep a register of all former employees of the current external auditor employed by the Group.

The Group determines non-audit services which are prohibited and those which are permitted ‘subject to safeguards’. The 
Group’s aim is to identify appropriate service providers and ensure that any non-audit work is carried out by the most appropriate 
provider in a manner that gives best value for money. The policy is shared with the external auditor of the Group. Adherence to 
the policy and non-audit fees incurred is regularly reviewed by the Committee.

For the year ended 31 December 2014, the Group was charged £349,000 (exc VAT) by Deloitte LLP and its associates for audit 
services. The fees for other assurance services amounted to £90,000, making total fees from Deloitte LLP of £439,000. None 
of the non-audit services provided during the year was in respect of significant engagements. More detail can be found in note 
11 to the financial statements on page 151.

Effectiveness of internal control and risk management

The Group’s approach to internal control and risk management is set out in the Corporate Governance Report on page 76. In 
reviewing the effectiveness of the system of internal control and risk management during 2014 the Committee has:

 ■ Reviewed the findings and agreed management actions arising from both external and internal audit reports issued during  

the year;

 ■ Monitored management’s responsiveness to the findings and recommendations of the Director of GIA;

92 Section 3 Group Audit Committee Report

03

 ■ Met with the Director of GIA once during the year without management being present to discuss any issues arising from 

internal audits carried out;

 ■ Commissioned an independent external review of the effectiveness of the GIA function; and
 ■ Monitored the implementation of recommendations arising from this independent external review.

As explained in the Corporate Governance Report on page 76, the reporting lines for GIA and Group Compliance have now changed, 
having previously reported to the same individual. With effect from 1 January 2014, the Director of GIA continues to report to the 
Chairman of the Group Audit Committee whereas the Group Compliance Officer reports via the Group Chief Risk Officer to the 
Chairman of the Group Risk Committee.

Internal control over financial reporting

Internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance regarding the 
reliability of management and financial reporting in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. Controls over 
financial reporting policies and procedures include controls to ensure that:

 ■ Through clearly defined role profiles and financial mandates, there is effective delegation of authority;
 ■ There is adequate segregation of duties in respect of all financial transactions;
 ■ Commitments and expenditure are appropriately authorised by management;
 ■ Records are maintained which accurately and fairly reflect transactions;
 ■ Any unauthorised acquisition, use or disposal of the Group’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial 

statements is detected on a timely basis;

 ■ Transactions are recorded as required to permit the preparation of financial statements; and
 ■ The Group is able to report its financial statements in compliance with IFRS.

Due to inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Risk management 
and control systems provide reasonable assurance that the financial reporting does not contain any material inaccuracies. 
Through its review of reports received from management, along with those from internal and external auditors, the Committee 
did not identify any material weaknesses in internal controls over financial reporting during the year. The financial systems are 
deemed to have functioned properly during the year under review, and there are no current indications they will not continue to 
do so in the forthcoming period.

Group Internal Audit

Group Internal Audit is guided by the Group Audit Committee and provides independent, objective assurance to the Board that 
the governance processes, management of risk and systems of internal control are adequate and effective to mitigate the most 
significant risks to the Group.

The Committee has oversight responsibility for GIA and the Director of GIA is accountable to the Group Audit Committee 
Chairman, reports administratively to the Group Chief Executive Officer and has access to the Chairman of the Board.

Group Internal Audit’s annual programme of work is risk based and designed to cover areas of higher risk or specific focus 
across the Group. The plan is approved annually in advance by the Group Audit Committee and is regularly reviewed throughout 
the year to ensure that it continues to reflect areas of higher priority. Where necessary, changes to the agreed plan are 
identified as a consequence of the Group’s changing risk profile. All proposed changes to the agreed internal audit plan are 
reviewed, challenged and approved by the Group Audit Committee during the year.

Throughout the year GIA submitted quarterly reports to the Group Audit Committee summarising findings from audit activity 
undertaken and the responses and action plans agreed with management. During the year the Group Audit Committee 
monitored progress of the most significant management action plans to ensure that these were completed in a timely manner 
and to a satisfactory standard.

Legal and regulatory developments

The Committee receives regular reports and considers the impact of legal and regulatory developments on the UK Group to control 
legal and regulatory risk. They monitor the application and impact of any actions required by the business or organisation through to 
completion. Reports are shared with relevant business areas, and with relevant subsidiary Boards and Board Committees.

By order of the Board 

John Hylands
Chairman of the Group Audit Committee 
24 March 2015

Section 3 Group Audit Committee Report

93

SECTIONSECTIONGroup 
Remuneration 
Report

The information contained in the Group 
Remuneration Committee Chairman’s 
Statement and the Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy is not subject to audit.

Membership

The Group Remuneration Committee members and their attendance at meetings during the year are shown below:

Committee member

Member since

Denise Wilson (Chair)

December 2011

David Christie

Christine Wilson

Caroline Taylor

April 2013

April 2013

November 2014*

Meetings eligible to 
attend

Meetings  
attended

4

4

4

0

4

4

4

0

* Caroline Taylor was appointed to the Committee with effect from 26 November 2014.

94 Section 3  Group Remuneration Report

03

Group Remuneration Committee 
Chairman’s statement
General context

As Chair of the Group Remuneration Committee, I am pleased 
to introduce the Group Remuneration Report for the year ending 
31 December 2014 and to highlight some of the key aspects  
of the Committee’s work during the financial year. 

In addition to myself, the Committee during the year comprised 
of three NEDs, David Christie, Christine Wilson and Caroline 
Taylor, who was appointed on 26 November 2014. There were 
four meetings in total, three scheduled meetings and one  
additional meeting.

As has been the case in previous years, while our Group 
structure does not require us to comply with the regulations 
governing the disclosure of executive remuneration to which 
quoted companies are subject, we have chosen to largely 
adopt these reporting requirements in order to provide greater 
transparency and follow best practice. Therefore, following my 
introductory statement, this report is effectively divided into two 
sections: (i) the Directors’ Remuneration Policy which sets out 
the structure and elements of pay for our Directors and how 
these interact and; (ii) the Annual Report on Remuneration 
which describes how the Group’s remuneration policies have 
been implemented in 2014 providing retrospective disclosures 
on Directors’ remuneration for 2014 and setting out how the 
policy will be implemented in 2015.

As described in the Strategic Report starting on page 21, the 
Group has made substantial progress during 2014 in improving 
underwriting profitability and rebuilding the foundations for 
sustainable profit from its core business.

However, significant challenges remain both for the industry and 
for Ecclesiastical and therefore our approach to remuneration 
remains appropriately measured.

During 2014, the Group delivered a strong underwriting profit, 
our first for five years, despite the storms and floods at the start 
of the year in the UK. The Combined Operating Ratio (COR) 
for the Group improved to 95.9% (2013: 102.9%). Our profit 
before tax (PBT) of £48m is below that reported last year 
(2013: £67m) as the positive underwriting result was offset by  
a more ‘normal’ investment return.

Given the Group’s strong performance over the year, the 
Committee is satisfied that (i) the annual bonus awards of 78% 
(Group Chief Executive), 66% (Deputy Group Chief Executive) 
and 64% (Group Chief Financial Officer) of the maximum 
potential value and (ii) the extent to which the LTIP granted in 
2012 vested, were appropriate.

Key Committee activities during the year

During 2014, the Committee has undertaken a strategic 
review of the Group’s Remuneration Policy, including the 
incentive schemes applicable to Executive Directors and senior 
executives, with specialist advice taken from FIT Remuneration 
Consultants LLP. The Committee additionally sought detailed 
advice from the Group Chief Risk Officer in relation to the risk 
impact of each proposed incentive scheme design and targets. 

As part of this review the Committee established a set of 
principles which will underpin the Group’s reward structures 
and ensure Ecclesiastical offers remuneration packages that 
are demonstrably ‘fair’ and aligned to the Group’s strategic 
priorities, values and culture. They also need to reflect regulatory 
requirements, market practice and enable Ecclesiastical to 
attract, retain and motivate the high calibre staff required to 
deliver the Group’s strategy and generate sustainable long-term 
returns to our shareholders. 

An appropriate mix of fixed and performance-related pay 
opportunity will be offered, ensuring that any incentive plans 
have been responsibly designed to take full account of the 
Group’s ethics, values and risk profile, discourage inappropriate 
conduct and support Ecclesiastical’s desire to provide a best in 
class service to its customers. 

From 2015 onwards, based on the principles set out above and 
having considered the advice of the Group Chief Risk Officer, 
the following key changes have been made to the Executive 
Directors’ remuneration packages:

Annual bonus

 ■ We have increased the impact of customer and conduct-
related performance on overall bonus outcomes, to put 
customers at the heart of our decisions. 

 ■ We have dispensed with UK and Ireland COR as a bonus 

metric with COR now being measured on a Group-wide basis 
only to reduce complexity and increase focus on  
Group results. 

 ■ A bonus deferral element has been introduced to align with 

market best practice.

 ■ While no changes have been made to maximum annual 

bonus opportunity, the amount of bonus payable for delivery 
of an ‘on-target’ level of performance has been increased to 
bring it more in line with market practice.

Section 3  Group Remuneration Report

95

SECTIONSECTIONLong-term incentives

 ■ A broader range of metrics will be used to assess 

performance, including new elements based on customer 
and conduct-related performance and delivery of key 
strategic objectives. 

 ■ Maximum award levels will remain unchanged at 100% 
of salary, albeit award levels of some individuals will be 
increased to bring overall opportunity closer to market 
norms. 

 ■ The participant population will be extended to a broader 

group of key executives. 

 ■ Clawback provisions have been introduced.

No material changes have been made to other elements of the 
Executive Directors’ remuneration, except as outlined in the 
tables starting on page 110.

In terms of other matters addressed by the Committee during 
the year, further consideration was given to the remuneration 
package of the Deputy Group Chief Executive, following the 
appointment of S. Jacinta Whyte to this role and to the Board 
in July 2013.

S. Jacinta Whyte continued to exercise her responsibilities as 
General Manager and Chief Agent for Canada during the year, 
alongside her appointment as Deputy Group Chief Executive 
and Managing Director of UK General Insurance. Given the 
global nature of her remit, specialist advice was sought in 
relation to pay benchmarking data, taxation, employment 
legislation and corporate governance requirements in both 
the Province of Ontario, Canada and the UK. In developing 
an appropriate remuneration package and contractual 
arrangements the Committee sought to balance the need to 
align her remuneration package with Ecclesiastical’s long-
term strategic goals, risk appetite, values, culture and high 
standards of conduct; the demands of the role, including 
leading transformational change programmes in both UK 
General Insurance and Ansvar Australia; and to balance 
existing contractual commitments under Ontario law with UK 
corporate governance requirements.

The Committee also reviewed the remuneration package of 
Ian Campbell, who was appointed to the role of Group Chief 
Financial Officer on 30 April 2014, taking account of all 
relevant factors.

Details of the remuneration package and contractual 
arrangements for the Deputy Group Chief Executive and the 
Group Chief Financial Officer can be found starting on  
page 100.

Finally, I value the continued support from our charitable owner 
Allchurches Trust Limited (ATL), and remain mindful of our 
responsibilities to drive sustained and improved performance 
over the long term through our remuneration strategy, policy 
and principles.

Denise Wilson 
Chair of the Group Remuneration Committee  
24 March 2015

96 Section 3 Group Remuneration Report

03

Section 3  Group Remuneration Report

97

SECTIONSECTIONDirectors’ 
Remuneration 
Policy

Not auditable

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy (the ‘Policy’) 
described in this part of the report is intended to 
apply for the year from January to December 2015 
and describes the structure and elements of pay and 
how they interact. A strategic review of the Group’s 
Remuneration Policy was carried out in 2014 and the 
Policy set out below reflects the recommendations  
of this review.

As outlined in the Group’s Strategic Report starting on page 
21, our ambition includes the following strategic objectives: 

 ■ Most trusted specialist insurer 
 ■ Most trusted specialist adviser 
 ■ Best ethical investment provider. 

To support the achievement of the Group’s strategic 
objectives, Ecclesiastical needs to attract, motivate and retain 
highly capable, productive and motivated employees who 
are aligned to the Company’s values and culture. The Group 
therefore needs to provide a progressive, dynamic working 
environment which allows its employees to fulfil their potential 
and an appropriately structured set of remuneration policies.

98 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

03

The Group’s Remuneration Policy outlined in the Group Remuneration Committee Chairman’s statement above is aligned to 
delivery of the Group’s strategic objectives and establishes a set of principles which underpin the Group’s reward structures for 
all Group employees:

 ■ Reward structures will promote the delivery of long-term sustainable returns. As such, the performance measures in the 

annual and long-term incentive plans (LTIP) will reflect and support Ecclesiastical’s underlying strategic goals and risk appetite 
and may comprise both financial and non-financial targets.

 ■ Reward will be performance-related, reflecting individual and business performance, including both what is delivered and the 
way in which results are achieved. However, Ecclesiastical will adopt a prudent and considered approach when determining 
what portion of an employee’s package should be performance-linked and/or variable so as to ensure that irresponsible 
conduct and behaviours are neither encouraged nor rewarded and that customer experience is not prejudiced in any way by 
the operation of its pay arrangements. 

 ■ Reward structures will be straightforward and simple for everyone to understand. 
 ■ Remuneration packages will be set by reference to levels for comparable roles in comparable organisations. However, 

benchmark data will be only one of a number of factors that will determine remuneration packages. 

 ■ Reward structures will deliver an appropriate balance of fixed to variable pay in order to foster a performance culture, with the 
proportion of ‘at risk’ pay typically increasing with seniority. However, high levels of leverage are not appropriate for the Group. 

 ■ Reward structures will achieve a balance between short and long-term incentives, supporting the overall aim of the Group’s 
Remuneration Policy of promoting the long-term success of the Group. The balance between short and long-term incentive 
pay is largely driven by role and seniority, with generally a greater role played by long-term incentives for more  
senior employees.

 ■ The Group will strive to adhere to the highest standards of remuneration-related regulatory compliance and best practice 

guidelines, while ensuring that the Group’s remuneration policies are appropriately tailored to its circumstances, challenges 
and strategic goals.

The Committee considers the Group’s Remuneration Policy annually to ensure that it remains aligned with the needs of 
Ecclesiastical and its longer-term strategy and that it remains appropriately aligned with the external market. The current policy is 
summarised in the table on the next page.

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

99

SECTIONSECTIONBalancing short and long-term remuneration

We have established the remuneration elements set out in this report guided by the Group’s Remuneration Policy principles 
on the previous page. Fixed annual elements including salary, pension and benefits, are to recognise the responsibility and 
experience of our Executive Directors and to ensure current and future market competitiveness. The annual and long-term 
incentives are to incentivise and reward our Executive Directors for making Ecclesiastical successful on a sustainable basis.

Future Policy Table

How the element supports  
our strategic objectives

Operation

Opportunity

Performance measures

Change from 

2014

Salary

To provide a core reward at the level 
needed to attract and retain the 
required level of talent.

Benefits

To provide a market competitive 
reward package and promote the 
wellbeing of employees.

Pension

Salaries are paid in 12 equal monthly instalments during the year.  Salaries are  
reviewed annually with changes taking effect from 1 April each year.

When the annual review is conducted various factors are 

Individual and Group performance

None

Benefits normally comprise a car allowance, a private healthcare scheme and medical  
assessments. Executive Directors also receive life assurance cover on the same basis  
as the wider employee population and in the case of the Deputy Group Chief Executive, 
 health and dental cover, accidental death and dismemberment cover and long-term  
disability cover on the same basis as the wider employee population in our Canadian branch.

Benefits are set at a level taking into account benefit 

Not applicable

None

To aid retention and provide a market 
competitive provision for post-
retirement income.

UK Defined Contribution Scheme: UK-based Executive Directors are eligible to  
participate in the Group Personal Pension plan. Contributions are made by the  
employee and employer.

Canadian EIO plc Defined Contribution Pension plan: the Canadian Defined  
Contribution Pension plan is applicable to Ecclesiastical’s Canadian staff. The  
Deputy Group Chief Executive participates under this plan and does not participate  
in the UK Defined Contribution Scheme. Contributions are made by the employer.

The level of pension contribution takes into account 

Not applicable

None

taken into account, including Company and individual 

performance, relevant market information and levels 

of pay increases in the wider UK or relevant territory 

population.

Relevant pay data including market practice among a 

chosen set of comparator organisations in the financial 

services sector is also considered.

packages offered by comparable organisations for 

comparable roles; benefits offered to the wider employee 

population and the objective of promoting the wellbeing 

of employees.  The costs are those relating to providing 

the benefit.

the seniority of the role and pension benefits offered by 

comparable organisations for comparable roles.

The employer contribution rate to the UK Defined 

Contribution Scheme will be 15% of basic salary.

Any contributions to the UK Defined Contribution 

Scheme that are above the annual or lifetime earnings 

limit are paid in cash, net of NI contributions charge.

The employer contribution rate to the Canadian EIO plc 

Defined Contribution Pension plan will be 12% of basic 

salary.

Any contributions to the Canadian pension plan that are 

above the Canadian government maximum contribution 

limit are paid into a Supplemental Employee Retirement 

Plan (SERP) and are maintained as a liability on the 

Canadian balance sheet and attract interest annually.

100 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

03

How the element supports  

Operation

our strategic objectives

Opportunity

Performance measures

Change from 
2014

Salary

required level of talent.

To provide a core reward at the level 

Salaries are paid in 12 equal monthly instalments during the year.  Salaries are  

needed to attract and retain the 

reviewed annually with changes taking effect from 1 April each year.

To provide a market competitive 

Benefits normally comprise a car allowance, a private healthcare scheme and medical  

reward package and promote the 

assessments. Executive Directors also receive life assurance cover on the same basis  

wellbeing of employees.

as the wider employee population and in the case of the Deputy Group Chief Executive, 

 health and dental cover, accidental death and dismemberment cover and long-term  

disability cover on the same basis as the wider employee population in our Canadian branch.

Benefits

Pension

To aid retention and provide a market 

UK Defined Contribution Scheme: UK-based Executive Directors are eligible to  

competitive provision for post-

participate in the Group Personal Pension plan. Contributions are made by the  

retirement income.

employee and employer.

Canadian EIO plc Defined Contribution Pension plan: the Canadian Defined  

Contribution Pension plan is applicable to Ecclesiastical’s Canadian staff. The  

Deputy Group Chief Executive participates under this plan and does not participate  

in the UK Defined Contribution Scheme. Contributions are made by the employer.

Individual and Group performance

None

Not applicable

None

Not applicable

None

When the annual review is conducted various factors are 
taken into account, including Company and individual 
performance, relevant market information and levels 
of pay increases in the wider UK or relevant territory 
population.

Relevant pay data including market practice among a 
chosen set of comparator organisations in the financial 
services sector is also considered.

Benefits are set at a level taking into account benefit 
packages offered by comparable organisations for 
comparable roles; benefits offered to the wider employee 
population and the objective of promoting the wellbeing 
of employees.  The costs are those relating to providing 
the benefit.

The level of pension contribution takes into account 
the seniority of the role and pension benefits offered by 
comparable organisations for comparable roles.

The employer contribution rate to the UK Defined 
Contribution Scheme will be 15% of basic salary.

Any contributions to the UK Defined Contribution 
Scheme that are above the annual or lifetime earnings 
limit are paid in cash, net of NI contributions charge.

The employer contribution rate to the Canadian EIO plc 
Defined Contribution Pension plan will be 12% of basic 
salary.

Any contributions to the Canadian pension plan that are 
above the Canadian government maximum contribution 
limit are paid into a Supplemental Employee Retirement 
Plan (SERP) and are maintained as a liability on the 
Canadian balance sheet and attract interest annually.

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

101

SECTIONSECTIONHow the element supports  
our strategic objectives

Operation

Opportunity

Performance measures

Change from 

2014

Group annual bonus scheme

To incentivise the Executive Directors 
to achieve key financial and strategic 
goals and targets that have been 
set for the financial year. Deferral 
provides further alignment with 
shareholder interests and promotes 
retention.

This cash bonus is paid annually, normally three months after the end of the financial  
year to which it relates.

Maximum opportunity of 100% of salary with 50% 

The Group annual bonus is subject to a 

Bonus opportunity 

payable for a target level of performance.

range of challenging conditions linked to key 

for on-target 

Targets are set annually and award levels are determined by the Committee based  
on performance against these targets. When agreeing targets, the Committee also  
receives advice from the Group Chief Risk Officer on the extent to which the scheme  
meets the Group’s risk appetite.

Any bonus earned in excess of 75% of an individual’s maximum bonus opportunity  
is deferred over a period of two years.

Bonus already paid, or deferred, is subject to malus/clawback in certain circumstances;  
(i) misstatement; (ii) regulatory censure, material reputational damage and/or  
material non-adherence to the Company’s risk tolerances; and (iii) misconduct.  
A three-year time limit applies.

The Committee has discretion to reduce any bonus in certain circumstances,  
including (but not limited to): (i) there are issues regarding Ecclesiastical’s underlying  
financial strength and position; (ii) there is an actual or potential regulatory censure;  
(iii) the Group is in material breach of its risk policies (including conduct risk) and/ 
or its values/ethics; and (iv) there is a material diminution in the regard by which  
Ecclesiastical is held by its customer base through mismanagement.

Group Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)

To focus the Executives and 
incentivise the achievement of the 
Group’s long-term objectives; to align 
the Executive Directors’ interests 
with those of the shareholders and to 
promote attraction and retention of 
talented individuals.

Cash awards under the Group LTIP vest dependent on the Committee’s assessment  
of performance against the performance conditions over the relevant three-year period.

Targets are set annually for each successive three-year LTIP period. When agreeing  
targets, the Committee also receives advice from the Group Chief Risk Officer on the  
extent to which the scheme meets the Group’s risk appetite.

Any LTIP already vested and any unvested LTIP is subject to malus/clawback in certain  
circumstances: (i) misstatement; (ii) regulatory censure, material reputational damage  
and/or material non-adherence to the Company’s risk tolerances; and (iii) misconduct.  
A three-year time limit applies.

The Committee has discretion to reduce any bonus in certain circumstances, including  
(but not limited to): (i) there are issues regarding Ecclesiastical’s underlying financial  
strength and position; (ii) there is an actual or potential regulatory censure; (iii) the  
Group is in material breach of its risk policies (including conduct risk) and/or its values/ 
ethics; and (iv) there is a material diminution in the regard by which Ecclesiastical is  
held by its customer base through mismanagement.

102 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

strategic priorities. For 2015, the following 

performance has 

performance conditions will apply:

• Ecclesiastical Insurance Group (EIG)  

PBT (including fair value investment gains/

losses)

• Group COR

• Strategic targets

• Customers and conduct  

and

• Personal performance rating.

been brought 

closer to market 

norms.

Performance 

measures revised.

Deferral introduced.

Malus introduced 

(clawback already 

in place).

Under the rules of the LTIP, awards of up to 100% of 

The Group LTIP is subject to a range 

Overall reward 

salary can be made.

the award applies.

At on-target performance a target opportunity of 50% of 

of challenging conditions linked to key 

opportunity under 

strategic priorities. For 2015 awards, the 

the LTIP has been 

following performance conditions will apply:

brought into line 

• EIG PBT (excluding fair value investment 

• EIG PBT (including fair value investment 

measures revised 

Threshold business performance would result in vesting 

of no more than 20% of the award.

LTIP plans granted in respect of 2013-2015 and 2014-

2016 will continue to vest under the previously applicable 

• COR

policy.

gains/losses)

gains/losses)

with market norms.

Performance 

as indicated.

Malus/clawback 

introduced.

• Strategic targets; 

• Customers and conduct.

There is a 36-month performance period 

from the date of grant.

Opportunity

Performance measures

To incentivise the Executive Directors 

This cash bonus is paid annually, normally three months after the end of the financial  

to achieve key financial and strategic 

year to which it relates.

Maximum opportunity of 100% of salary with 50% 
payable for a target level of performance.

The Group annual bonus is subject to a 
range of challenging conditions linked to key 
strategic priorities. For 2015, the following 
performance conditions will apply:

• Ecclesiastical Insurance Group (EIG)  

PBT (including fair value investment gains/
losses)

• Group COR

• Strategic targets

• Customers and conduct  

and

• Personal performance rating.

03

Change from 
2014

Bonus opportunity 
for on-target 
performance has 
been brought 
closer to market 
norms.

Performance 
measures revised.

Deferral introduced.

Malus introduced 
(clawback already 
in place).

To focus the Executives and 

Cash awards under the Group LTIP vest dependent on the Committee’s assessment  

incentivise the achievement of the 

of performance against the performance conditions over the relevant three-year period.

Under the rules of the LTIP, awards of up to 100% of 
salary can be made.

At on-target performance a target opportunity of 50% of 
the award applies.

Threshold business performance would result in vesting 
of no more than 20% of the award.

LTIP plans granted in respect of 2013-2015 and 2014-
2016 will continue to vest under the previously applicable 
policy.

The Group LTIP is subject to a range 
of challenging conditions linked to key 
strategic priorities. For 2015 awards, the 
following performance conditions will apply:

• EIG PBT (excluding fair value investment 

gains/losses)

• EIG PBT (including fair value investment 

gains/losses)

• COR

• Strategic targets; 

• Customers and conduct.

There is a 36-month performance period 
from the date of grant.

Overall reward 
opportunity under 
the LTIP has been 
brought into line 
with market norms.

Performance 
measures revised 
as indicated.

Malus/clawback 
introduced.

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

103

How the element supports  

Operation

our strategic objectives

Group annual bonus scheme

goals and targets that have been 

set for the financial year. Deferral 

provides further alignment with 

shareholder interests and promotes 

retention.

Group Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)

Group’s long-term objectives; to align 

the Executive Directors’ interests 

with those of the shareholders and to 

promote attraction and retention of 

talented individuals.

Targets are set annually and award levels are determined by the Committee based  

on performance against these targets. When agreeing targets, the Committee also  

receives advice from the Group Chief Risk Officer on the extent to which the scheme  

meets the Group’s risk appetite.

Any bonus earned in excess of 75% of an individual’s maximum bonus opportunity  

is deferred over a period of two years.

Bonus already paid, or deferred, is subject to malus/clawback in certain circumstances;  

(i) misstatement; (ii) regulatory censure, material reputational damage and/or  

material non-adherence to the Company’s risk tolerances; and (iii) misconduct.  

A three-year time limit applies.

The Committee has discretion to reduce any bonus in certain circumstances,  

including (but not limited to): (i) there are issues regarding Ecclesiastical’s underlying  

financial strength and position; (ii) there is an actual or potential regulatory censure;  

(iii) the Group is in material breach of its risk policies (including conduct risk) and/ 

or its values/ethics; and (iv) there is a material diminution in the regard by which  

Ecclesiastical is held by its customer base through mismanagement.

Targets are set annually for each successive three-year LTIP period. When agreeing  

targets, the Committee also receives advice from the Group Chief Risk Officer on the  

extent to which the scheme meets the Group’s risk appetite.

Any LTIP already vested and any unvested LTIP is subject to malus/clawback in certain  

circumstances: (i) misstatement; (ii) regulatory censure, material reputational damage  

and/or material non-adherence to the Company’s risk tolerances; and (iii) misconduct.  

A three-year time limit applies.

The Committee has discretion to reduce any bonus in certain circumstances, including  

(but not limited to): (i) there are issues regarding Ecclesiastical’s underlying financial  

strength and position; (ii) there is an actual or potential regulatory censure; (iii) the  

Group is in material breach of its risk policies (including conduct risk) and/or its values/ 

ethics; and (iv) there is a material diminution in the regard by which Ecclesiastical is  

held by its customer base through mismanagement.

SECTIONSECTIONOpportunity

Performance measures

Change 

from 2014

Maximum opportunity of 100% 

There are three areas of performance conditions that apply to this 

None

of salary over the 2014-2016 

award:

performance period.

• 50% dependent upon financial performance 

• 25% dependent on achievement of measurable,  

non-financial results 

• 25% dependent upon achievement of qualitative targets.

Maximum opportunity of £110k1 for 

There are three areas of performance conditions that apply to this 

New element 

for 2013/2014

the performance period from 12 June 

award:

2013 to 30 June 2015.

• 40% dependent upon financial performance 

• 40% dependent on achievement of measurable,  

non-financial results 

• 20% dependent upon achievement of qualitative targets.

Discretionary bonus arrangements

The Committee may decide, from time to time, to incentivise specific Executive Directors, in exceptional circumstances, on either 
a multi-year or single-year basis to achieve specific objectives. These arrangements will either be in place of or in addition to 
existing incentive arrangements. 

In addition to the above arrangements set out in the previous table, the following discretionary bonus arrangements are in 
existence for the Group Chief Executive and Deputy Group Chief Executive.

How the element supports  
our strategic objectives

Operation

Group Chief Executive’s three-year incentive plan

To incentivise the Group Chief Executive 
to achieve specific goals that have been 
set for the period 2014-2016.

No mandatory deferral provision.

Staged payments:

• Year 1 up to 25% of salary.  

• Year 2 up to 50% of salary, less payments made in the previous year. 

• Year 3 up to 100% of salary, less payments made in Year 1 and Year 2 above.

Payments under the plan are subject to clawback in respect of mis-statement  
and misconduct.

Deputy Group Chief Executive’s two-year incentive plan

To incentivise the Deputy Group Chief 
Executive to achieve specific goals that 
have been set for the period 12 June 
2013 to 30 June 2015.

• No mandatory deferral provision.

• Staged payments:

  • Jun-Dec 2013 up to £27.5k1 

  • Jan-Dec 2014 up to £55k1 

  • Jan-Jun 2015 up to £27.5k1.

1 An average 2014 exchange rate of 1.8177 Canadian dollars to 1 GBP has been used.

Notes to the policy table

The Committee selected the performance conditions used for annual bonus and long-term incentives because they are central to 
the Group’s overall strategy and are key metrics used in measuring the performance of the Group. The performance conditions 
are reviewed and set annually by the Committee, following consultation with the Group Chief Risk Officer.

The Committee is of the opinion that the performance targets are commercially sensitive to the Group and that disclosure at 
the beginning of the financial year would be detrimental to its interests. The targets will therefore be disclosed at the end of the 
relevant financial year in that year’s Remuneration Report provided they are not considered commercially sensitive at that time.

Differences in Remuneration Policy for all employees

All employees of Ecclesiastical are entitled to a salary, benefits, pension and annual bonus. The maximum bonus opportunity is 
based on differing levels of seniority.  There is an increased emphasis on performance-related pay for the Executive Directors 
through a higher annual bonus opportunity and participation in the LTIP. This aligns the interests of Directors in the long-term 
performance of the Group with those of the shareholders.

104 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

03

How the element supports  

Operation

our strategic objectives

Group Chief Executive’s three-year incentive plan

To incentivise the Group Chief Executive 

No mandatory deferral provision.

to achieve specific goals that have been 

set for the period 2014-2016.

Staged payments:

• Year 1 up to 25% of salary.  

Deputy Group Chief Executive’s two-year incentive plan

To incentivise the Deputy Group Chief 

• No mandatory deferral provision.

Executive to achieve specific goals that 

have been set for the period 12 June 

2013 to 30 June 2015.

• Staged payments:

  • Jun-Dec 2013 up to £27.5k1 

  • Jan-Dec 2014 up to £55k1 

  • Jan-Jun 2015 up to £27.5k1.

• Year 2 up to 50% of salary, less payments made in the previous year. 

• Year 3 up to 100% of salary, less payments made in Year 1 and Year 2 above.

Payments under the plan are subject to clawback in respect of mis-statement  

and misconduct.

Opportunity

Performance measures

Change 
from 2014

Maximum opportunity of 100% 
of salary over the 2014-2016 
performance period.

There are three areas of performance conditions that apply to this 
award:

None

• 50% dependent upon financial performance 

• 25% dependent on achievement of measurable,  

non-financial results 

• 25% dependent upon achievement of qualitative targets.

Maximum opportunity of £110k1 for 
the performance period from 12 June 
2013 to 30 June 2015.

There are three areas of performance conditions that apply to this 
award:

New element 
for 2013/2014

• 40% dependent upon financial performance 

• 40% dependent on achievement of measurable,  

non-financial results 

• 20% dependent upon achievement of qualitative targets.

Statement of consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the 
Group

The Committee invites the Group HR Director to present at its meeting (normally in March) on proposals for salary increases for 
the general employee population and on any other changes to remuneration practices within the Group.

The Group HR Director consults with the Committee on the performance measures for Executive Directors’ annual bonuses and 
the extent to which these should be cascaded to other employees.  The Committee has oversight of incentive arrangements that 
are in operation for all Group entities.

The Committee is provided with data on the remuneration arrangements for designated senior management below the Executive 
Directors and uses this information to work with the HR function to ensure consistency of approach throughout the Group.

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

105

SECTIONSECTIONApproach to recruitment remuneration

Ecclesiastical is a specialist financial services group competing for talent across a variety of markets and with often much larger 
organisations.

The Committee’s approach is to pay a fair market value to attract appropriate candidates to the role, taking into consideration their 
individual skills and experience and the ethos of the organisation. Where it is thought necessary to compensate an individual’s 
awards from previous employment, the Committee will, as far as practicable, seek to match the expected value of such awards 
through the use of the Company’s existing incentive arrangements. Where this is not possible, it may be necessary to offer some 
form of ‘buy-out’ award, the size of which will in the normal course reflect the commercial value of the award foregone and will also 
(where possible) be subject to some form of clawback if the individual leaves Ecclesiastical within a set time frame.

Any new Executive Director’s package would include the same elements and generally be subject to the same constraints as 
existing Executive Directors.

Element of remuneration

Maximum percentage of salary

Salary

Benefits

Annual bonus

LTIP

Dependent upon position

100%

100%

Pension contribution/allowance

• 15% UK Defined Contribution Scheme

• 12% Canadian EIO plc Defined Contribution Pension plan

Policy on termination payments for Executive Directors
Standard 
provision

Details

Policy

Notice periods in 
Executive Directors’ 
service contracts

Twelve months by Company or Executive Director 
for the Group Chief Executive and six months by 
Company or Executive Director for other Executive 
Directors.

Executive Directors may be required to work 
through their notice period, or may be paid in lieu 
of notice if they are not required to work the full 
notice period.

Payment in lieu of 
notice

The Company may decide if it wishes to make a 
payment in lieu of notice of an amount prescribed 
under the contract. This is salary (and in the case 
of the Group Chief Executive, benefits) for the 
balance of the notice period, excluding bonus and 
accrued holiday entitlement.

Payable as a lump sum within 14 days of 
termination date but, in the case of the Deputy 
Group Chief Executive and Group Chief Financial 
Officer, it can be paid in monthly instalments over 
the balance of the notice period.

Severance payment 
for Deputy Group 
Chief Executive 

The Deputy Group Chief Executive’s pre-existing 
contract of employment before her appointment to 
her new role contained severance provisions in line 
with Canadian law and practice. The policy of the 
Company has been to honour these commitments 
insofar as they relate to accrued service up to the 
date of her appointment to her new role, but not in 
respect of service after that date.

The Executive’s entitlement arises in the case of 
any termination by the Company for ‘No Cause’ as 
defined and represents the sum of £478k and the 
provision of dental and health insurance cover and 
life assurance cover for a period of 21 months after 
the termination date of her employment.

The sums due may be made in monthly instalments 
to allow for mitigation. In addition, any sums 
otherwise due under the rules of any bonus or cash 
incentive plan in respect of the bonus year in which 
the termination date falls or in any subsequent 
year are only payable to the extent that they would 
otherwise exceed £141k.

106 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

03

Standard 
provision

Mitigation

Policy

Details

The Executive Directors’ service contracts do not 
expressly provide for mitigation on termination 
except in the case of the Deputy Group Chief 
Executive’s and Group Chief Financial Officer’s 
contracts which allows for payment in instalments 
over the balance of the notice period.

The Committee will take account of the 
circumstances of the termination and the Director’s 
performance during the period of qualifying service 
to determine whether the exercise of any discretion 
is appropriate.

Treatment of 
annual bonus on 
termination or 
change of control 
under plan rules

No payment unless employed on date of bonus 
payment except for ‘good leavers’ as defined in 
the plan rules (e.g. death, ill health, redundancy, 
retirement) and other circumstances at the 
Committee’s discretion.

If there is a change of control event, then an early 
payment can be calculated and made.

Good leavers are entitled to a bonus payment 
subject to the achievement of bonus criteria which 
is pro-rated down to reflect their service during 
the performance year unless the Committee 
determines that a higher amount is justified. A 
similar provision would apply if there were a change 
of control event.

Treatment 
of long-term 
incentive awards 
on termination or 
change of control 
under plan rules

All awards lapse except for ‘good leavers’ as 
defined in the plan rules (e.g. death, ill health, 
redundancy, retirement) and other reason at the 
discretion of the Committee.

If there is a change of control event, then an early 
payment can be calculated as stated in the rules 
of the plan.

For good leavers, vesting is determined based on 
the application of the performance conditions and 
any award is then pro-rated down based on the 
proportion of the 36-month performance period 
that the employee has served since the grant date 
unless the Committee determines that a higher 
amount is justified. A similar provision would apply if 
there were a change of control event.

The Committee’s determination will take into 
account the circumstances of the Executive 
Director’s departure and the recent performance of 
the Company when using discretion in relation to 
short or long-term bonus payments.

If the Group Chief Executive is a good leaver the 
Committee may decide to make an immediate 
pro-rata payment based on the Executive’s 
performance up to the termination date.

Exercise of 
discretion

Intended to be relied upon only in certain 
circumstances as set out in the future policy table.

Group Chief 
Executive’s three- 
year incentive plan

If the Group Chief Executive ceases to be 
employed in this capacity, the award will lapse 
unless he is a ‘good leaver’.

There is an express provision for clawback in 
respect of misstatement and misconduct.

Deputy Group 
Chief Executive’s 
two-year incentive 
plan

Other matters

If the Deputy Group Chief Executive ceases to 
be employed in this capacity,  the award will be 
treated in accordance with her contract.

The Company’s policy is to honour commitments 
made to contractual arrangements that may have 
been entered into with an employee prior to them 
becoming a Director.

There are no other provisions for termination 
payments or payments for loss of office in 
standard Directors’ service contracts.

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

107

SECTIONSECTIONTotal remuneration opportunity
Minimum

100% Total £480k

The charts below illustrate what each Executive Director could earn in respect of the policy for 2015, under different 
performance scenarios:
On-Target

21% Total £856k

23%

56%

 ■ Minimum: fixed pay only (being basic salary, pension or cash in lieu of pension and benefits) with no annual bonus and 
31%
Maximum

30% Total £1,233k

39%

no vesting of the LTIP

 ■ On-target: fixed pay (being basic salary, pension or cash in lieu of pension and benefits) with annual bonus of 50% of 

basic salary and 50% vesting of the LTIP

 ■ Maximum: fixed pay (being basic salary, pension or cash in lieu of pension and benefits) with maximum bonus of 100% 

of basic salary and 100% vesting of the LTIP.

Minimum

100% Total £371k

On-Target
Mark Hews: Effect of the application of this policy in 
30% Total £987k
Maximum
financial year 2015

22% Total £679k

38%

23%

55%

32%

Minimum
Minimum

On-Target
Minimum
On-Target

Maximum
On-Target
Maximum

100% Total £480k
100% Total £480k

56%
100% Total £335k
56%

23%
23%

21% Total £856k
21% Total £856k

39%
39%

57%

22%

31%
31%

21% Total £591k

30% Total £1,233k
30% Total £1,233k

Maximum
The Group Chief Executive’s three-year incentive plan is not included in the above illustration as the three-
year incentive plan is an additional multi-period bonus arrangement granted in a prior year.
100% Total £480k

Minimum

30% Total £847k

39%

31%

Minimum
On-Target
Minimum

KEY

Fixed pay

100% Total £371k
100% Total £371k

23%
Annual variable

56%

21% Total £856k
Multi-period variable

On-Target
30% Total £1,233k
Maximum
On-Target
S. Jacinta Whyte: Effect of the application of this policy in 
Minimum
Maximum
financial year 2015
Maximum
Minimum

30% Total £987k
30% Total £987k

22% Total £679k
22% Total £679k

100% Total £480k
100% Total £480k

23%
23%

55%
55%

38%
38%

32%
32%

39%

31%

On-Target
On-Target

Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
Minimum
On-Target
Minimum

On-Target
Maximum
On-Target

56%
56%

23%
23%

21% Total £856k
21% Total £856k

100% Total £371k

39%
39%
100% Total £335k
100% Total £335k

23%

55%

31%
31%

22% Total £679k

30% Total £1,233k
30% Total £1,233k

38%

57%
57%

22%
22%

32%

21% Total £591k
21% Total £591k

30% Total £987k

31%
31%

39%
39%

100% Total £371k
100% Total £371k

Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
The Deputy Group Chief Executive’s two-year incentive plan is not included in the above illustration as the 
Minimum
two-year incentive plan is an additional multi-period bonus arrangement granted in a prior year.
On-Target
On-Target
Minimum
Maximum
Maximum
Ian Campbell: Effect of the application of this policy in 
On-Target
financial year 2015
Maximum

100% Total £335k
32%
32%

23%
23%
Annual variable
Annual variable

30% Total £987k
30% Total £987k

22% Total £679k
22% Total £679k

21% Total £591k

Multi-period variable
Multi-period variable

Fixed pay
Fixed pay

38%
38%

55%
55%

57%

22%

KEY
KEY

30% Total £847k
30% Total £847k

30% Total £847k

39%

31%

Minimum
Minimum

On-Target
On-Target

KEY

Fixed pay

Maximum
Maximum

100% Total £335k
100% Total £335k
57%
Annual variable
57%
39%
39%

22%
22%

Multi-period variable

21% Total £591k
21% Total £591k
31%
31%

30% Total £847k
30% Total £847k

KEY
KEY

Fixed pay
Fixed pay

Annual variable
Annual variable

Multi-period variable
Multi-period variable

108 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

03

Notes to the charts:
 ■ Fixed pay is base salary for 2015 plus the value of pension and benefits.
 ■ The value of pension is calculated as described in the future policy table.
 ■ The value of benefits in kind is taken from the single figure table for 2014 which can be found on page 111.
 ■ For consistency, an LTIP of 100% of salary has been assumed for all Executive Directors for the purpose of the charts. 

However, actual award levels will be determined by the Committee at the relevant time.

 ■ On-target performance is the level of performance required to deliver an annual bonus of 50% of basic salary  

and 50% vesting of the LTIP.

 ■ Maximum performance is the level of performance required to deliver a maximum annual bonus award and  

100% vesting of the LTIP.

NEDs’ fees policy

How the element 
supports our strategic 
objectives

To attract NEDs who have 
a range of experience 
and skills to oversee the 
implementation of our 
strategy.

Operation

Opportunity

Performance 
measures

Current fee 
levels are shown 
in the section on 
implementation 
of policy.

NEDs are not eligible 
to participate in any 
performance-related 
arrangements.

NEDs’ fees, including the Committee Chairman’s 
fees, are approved by the Board and at a general 
meeting, following recommendation by the Chairman 
and Executive Directors. The Committee Chair takes 
no part in the discussion relating to their fees. The 
Chairman’s fees are considered and approved by the 
Board in the absence of the Chairman.

Fees are paid in 12 equal monthly instalments during 
the year. Fees are reviewed every two years against 
those for NEDs in companies of a similar scale and 
complexity.

NEDs are not eligible to receive benefits and do not 
participate in incentive or pension plans.

Statement of consideration of shareholder views

The Committee, through the Board, consults with the shareholders on any changes to this policy in order to understand 
expectations with regard to Executive Directors’ remuneration and any changes in shareholders’ views. Any views expressed by 
the shareholders’ are then considered and taken into account at the annual review of the policy. During 2014, the Committee 
consulted with the shareholders on the proposed changes to the Group’s Remuneration Policy and incentive arrangements for 
Executives.

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

109

SECTIONSECTIONAnnual Report on Remuneration

The following information contained in this report is auditable unless otherwise stated.

Statement of implementation of Remuneration Policy in 2015  
(not auditable) 

The implementation of the policy will be consistent with that outlined in the Directors’ Remuneration Policy. Differences between 
the Directors’ Remuneration Policy for 2014 and the Policy for 2015 are set out in the table below:

Element

Operation

Opportunity

Performance measures

Salary

No difference. 

No difference

N/A

Salaries for Executive Directors 
will be subject to review with any 
changes taking effect from  
April 2015.

Benefits

No difference

No difference

N/A

Annual bonus

LTIP

Any bonus earned in excess of 
75% of an individual’s maximum 
bonus opportunity is deferred 
over a period of two years.

Malus/clawback provisions  
apply as set out in the future 
policy table.

The Committee has discretion 
to reduce any bonus in certain 
circumstances on the grounds 
set out in the future policy table.

Malus/clawback provisions apply 
as set out in the future policy 
table.

The Committee has discretion 
to reduce any bonus in certain 
circumstances on the grounds 
set out in the future policy table.

Maximum opportunity 
of 100% of salary is 
unchanged. Bonus 
opportunity for an 
on-target level of 
performance will be 50%.

In 2015, the annual bonus will be subject 
to the following performance conditions: 

• EIG PBT (including fair value 
investment gains/losses) 

• Group COR 

• Strategic targets

• Customers and conduct 

and

• Personal performance rating.

Under the rules of the 
LTIP, awards of up to 
100% of salary can  
be made.

In respect of 2015-2017, the Group 
LTIP will be subject to the following 
performance conditions:

• EIG PBT (excluding fair value 

investment gains/losses)

• EIG PBT (including fair value 

investment gains/losses)

• Group COR

• Strategic targets

• Customers and conduct.

No difference

No difference

No difference

No mandatory deferral provision.

Staged payments:

• Jun-Dec 2013 up to £27.5k1 

• Jan-Dec 2014 up to £55k1 

• Jan-Jun 2015 up to £27.5k1.

Maximum opportunity 
of £110k1 for the 
performance period from 
12 June 2013 to 30 June 
2015.

There are five performance conditions 
that apply to this award: 

• Two performance conditions (40%) are 
dependent upon financial performance 

• Two performance conditions (40%) 
are dependent on achievement of 
measurable, non-financial results 

• One performance condition (20%) 
is dependent upon achievement of 
qualitative targets.

Group Chief 
Executive’s three-
year incentive plan

Deputy Group 
Chief Executive’s 
two-year incentive 
plan

To incentivise the 
Deputy Group 
Chief Executive to 
achieve specific 
goals set for the 
period 12 June 
2013 to 30 June 
2015.

1  

An average 2014 exchange rate of 1.8177 Canadian dollars to 1 GBP has been used. 

Salary increases received by Executive Directors in the year are shown in the table opposite: 

110 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

03

Salary at the annual review date

Name

Salary (£000s)

Salary (£000s)

Percentage increase

Mark Hews

S. Jacinta Whyte

Ian Campbell

1 April 2014

1 April 2013

367.5

300

250

260

250

200

41.3%

19.9%

25.0%

Mark Hews became Group Chief Executive on 1 May 2013 and therefore his salary was increased to £350k with effect from this 
date, with a further increase made on 1 April 2014 to £367.5k.

S. Jacinta Whyte assumed responsibility for the role of Deputy Group Chief Executive on 12 June 2013 which was subject to 
regulatory approval. Regulatory approval was received at a later date and she was formally appointed on 16 July 2013. S. Jacinta 
Whyte continued to exercise her responsibilities as General Manager and Chief Agent for Canada during the year, alongside her 
appointment as Deputy Group Chief Executive and Managing Director of UK General Insurance. Her salary was increased to £286k 
with effect from 12 June 2013. A further increase was made on 1 April 2014 to £300k.

Ian Campbell took on additional finance responsibilities from the beginning of the financial year on 1 January 2014 and was 
formally appointed Group Chief Financial Officer on 30 April 2014. His salary was increased to £250k with effect from 1  
January 2014.

Single total figure of remuneration for Executive Directors

The table below shows a single total figure of remuneration received in respect of qualifying services for the 2014 financial 
year for each Executive Director, together with comparative figures for 2013, where applicable. Aggregate Executive Directors’ 
emoluments are shown on page 114. Details of NEDs’ fees are set out in a separate table on page 114.

Single total
figure for 
Executive 
Directors

Salary

Benefits2

Pension

£000s

£000s

£000s

Annual 
bonus

£000s

LTIP3

Total

£000s

£000s

2014

2013

2014 2013

2014

2013 2014

2013

2014

2013

2014

2013

4
Mark Hews

363

320

5
S. Jacinta Whyte

296

164

Ian Campbell

6

7
Michael Tripp

Steve Wood

8

250

N/A

0

0

196

244

15

18

33

0

0

39

9

N/A

23

32

51

36

34

0

0

48

20

162

30

N/A

161

N/A

25

36

0

0

84

0

5

41

907

569

593

264

N/A

478

N/A

2

3

16

23

330

315

81

0

16

23

287

157

191

Total

909

924

66

103

121

129

610

271

311

51

2,017

1,478

2 

Benefits include items such as a car 
allowance and private medical insurance 
which are valued at their taxable value. It 
also includes travel and accommodation 
benefits, valued at their grossed up tax and 
NI value. The 2013 benefit for Mark Hews 
and Michael Tripp have been adjusted by 
£2k and £4k respectively to include travel 
and accommodation benefits.
3 

LTIP represents the amount payable in 
respect of the three-year LTIP performance 
period 2012-2014 for 2014 and 2011-2013 
for 2013, together with the amounts payable 
in respect of the Group Chief Executive’s 
3-year incentive plan (2014: £85k) and 
the Deputy Group Chief Executive’s 2-year 
incentive plan (2014: £55k; 2013: £27.5k 
as note5). All Executive Directors hold 
unvested LTIP awards in accordance with 
the rules of the LTIP plan.
4 

Mark Hews was appointed Group Chief 
Executive on 1 May 2013. In 2014, Mark 

Hews received a cash allowance in lieu of 
pension for part of the year which is in line 
with company policy that a cash allowance 
of 15% of salary (net of NI contributions) is 
paid to UK-based Executive Directors where 
continued Company contributions would 
result in a breach of the HMRC annual 
allowance.
5 

S. Jacinta Whyte was appointed Deputy 

Group Chief Executive on 16 July 2013. 
During 2014 she received the total sum of 
£19k in salary and £27.5k in respect of 
the Deputy Group Chief Executive’s 2-year 
incentive plan which were attributable to her 
service in 2013. She also received £2k in 
pension contributions in 2014 which was 
attributable to her service in 2013. These 
are all included in the 2013 figures in the 
table above. Contributions to the Canadian 
pension plan that are above the Canadian 
government maximum contribution limit are 
paid into a SERP and are also included 
in the figures shown. An average 2014 

exchange rate of 1.8177 Canadian dollars 
to 1 GBP has been used in respect of both 
2014 and 2013.
6 

Ian Campbell took on additional finance 
responsibilities from the beginning of the 
financial year on 1 January 2014 and was 
formally appointed Group Chief Financial 
Officer on 30 April 2014. His salary was 
increased to £250k with effect from 1 
January 2014.
7 

Michael Tripp resigned from the Board on 

21 May 2013. An LTIP payment of £16k 
was made in 2014 and is in respect of 
performance in the year 2012 in the 2012-
2014 LTIP.
8 

Steve Wood resigned from the Board on 
12 June 2013. The LTIP payment of £23k 
was made in 2014 and is in respect of 
performance in the years 2012 and 2013 in 
the 2012-2014 LTIP.

Mark Hews is also a NED for MAPFRE RE and was appointed to their Board in December 2013. The fees that Mark earns in 
respect of this role are paid directly to the Group by MAPFRE RE.

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

111

SECTIONSECTIONAdditional requirements in respect of the single total figure table

The annual bonus payable to the Group Chief Executive and Group Chief Financial Officer in respect of 2014 is assessed taking 
into account both Group and individual performance, both of which are assessed in a range of 0-2. The two results are multiplied 
together and applied to the on-target bonus opportunity of 25%. For example, if Group performance was assessed at 1.2 and 
individual performance at 1.1, the bonus payable would be 1.2 x 1.1 x 25% = 33%.

Performance targets are set in respect of the Group performance multiplier, and these are shown in the table below. Actual 
results are assessed against these targets to calculate the Group performance multiplier as shown in the second table below. 
The proposed personal performance multiplier is reviewed and agreed by the Committee.

The annual bonus payable to the Deputy Group Chief Executive in respect of 2014 is based both upon the Group annual bonus 
plan applicable to the Group Chief Executive and the Group Chief Financial Officer and the relevant Canadian annual bonus plan, 
with half of the bonus opportunity attributable to each plan. Accordingly, that part of the annual bonus attributable to the Group 
plan is assessed on the same basis as the Group Chief Executive and the Group Chief Financial Officer as described above, 
but divided by two. The Canadian part of the bonus is assessed taking account of Canadian business performance against two 
equally weighted measures: Canadian Net COR and Canadian Gross Written Premium (GWP).

In recognition of the additional duties undertaken by the Deputy Group Chief Executive and the impact of her new role on her 
ability to meet the performance targets, in order to maintain her bonus opportunity, her aggregate potential bonus entitlement, 
for the transitional year 2014 only, was the greater of (i) 100% of her Canadian incentive arrangements and (ii) 50% of her 
Canadian incentive arrangements and 50% of her Group incentive arrangements.

Bonuses are earned in respect of the financial year and are paid in March following the end of the financial year. The bonuses 
accruing to the Executive Directors in respect of 2014 are shown in the single figure table on page 111. None of the 2014 
annual bonuses are subject to deferral.

Annual bonus table

The table below relates to the Group Chief Executive, Group Chief Financial Officer and to the 50% of the Deputy Group Chief 
Executive’s annual bonus that is based on the Group annual bonus plan:

Original targets relating to the Group annual bonus for the financial year 2014 were:

Measure

Group COR

UK & Ireland COR

Group PBT

Group Strategic Priorities

Threshold

On-target

Maximum

Weighting

101.0%

101.0%

£24.4m

0%

99.4%

99.0%

£32.8m

75%

97.0%

97.0%

£53.5m

100%

25%

25%

35%

15%

Actual results relating to the Group annual bonus for the financial year 2014, giving the Group performance multiplier, are:

Measure

Group COR

UK & Ireland COR

Group PBT

Group Strategic Priorities

Overall Multiplier

Result

95.9%

94.0%

£48.2m

89.0%

Range

Weighting

Multiple

2.0

2.0

1.7

1.6

25%

25%

35%

15%

0.50

0.50

0.61

0.23

1.84

112 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

03

The table below relates to the 50% of the Deputy Group Chief Executive’s annual bonus that is based on the Canadian annual 
bonus plan only:

Original targets relating to the Canadian annual bonus for the financial year 2014 were:

Measure

Canadian Net COR 

Canadian GWP

Threshold

On-target

Maximum

Weighting

101.4%

99.4%

89.4%

CAD$72,918

CAD$75,174

CAD$78,933

50%

50%

Actual results relating to the Canadian annual bonus for the financial year 2014 are:

Measure

Canadian Net COR  
Canadian GWP

Result

96.2%

CAD$71,950

Factor

25.4%

0%

Weighting

50%

50%

Performance against conditions for LTIP payment

The LTIP amount included in the single total figure of remuneration is the cash award resulting from the LTIP grant in 2012 for 
the period 2012-2014. Vesting was dependent on performance over the three financial years ending on 31 December 2014 and 
continued service until March 2015.

The LTIP amount included in the single total figure of remuneration for the Deputy Group Chief Executive in respect of the period 
2012-2014 is based both upon the Group LTIP applicable to the Group Chief Executive and the Group Chief Financial Officer 
and the Canadian LTIP, with half of the LTIP opportunity attributable to each plan.

In relation to the Group Chief Executive and Group Chief Financial Officer and Director and to the 50% of the Deputy Group 
Chief Executive’s LTIP award that is based on the Group LTIP, the performance achieved against the performance targets is 
shown below:

Performance 
measure

Threshold  
30% vesting

Target  
50% vesting

Maximum  
100% vesting

Actual

COR

Group PBT

104.0%

£95m

101.2%

£132m

90.0%

£210m

103.0%

£153m

Vesting (% 
of maximum 
for 
performance 
measure)

31.2%

63.4%

In relation to the 50% of the Deputy Group Chief Executive’s LTIP award that is based on the Canadian LTIP, the performance 
achieved against the performance targets is shown below:

Performance 
measure

Canadian Gross 
COR

Threshold 

Target 

Maximum 

Actual

Vesting (% 
of maximum 
for 
performance 
measure)

86.7%

85.7%

80.7%

93.1%

0%

Canadian GWP

CAD$64,038

CAD$67,408

CAD$70,778

CAD$65,704

74.7%

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

113

Single total figure of remuneration for NEDs

NEDs do not participate in any of the Company’s incentive arrangements nor do they receive any benefits. NED fees were last 
reviewed in November 2013 with increased fees becoming effective from 1
January 2014.  We believe that it is appropriate to 
reflect the level of fees paid by organisations of similar size and complexity and that this will enable us to attract NEDs of the 
calibre we require to help us to implement our future strategy.

NEDs’ fees for the current and prior year

Director

Will Samuel9

David Christie

John Hylands

Tony Latham

Denise Wilson

The Venerable Christine Wilson10 

Tim Carroll11 

Caroline Taylor12

Sir Philip Mawer13 

Total

2014 (£000s)

2013 (£000s)

68

60

55

55

53

45

53

16

-

68

42

40

40

36

32

24

-

4

405

286

9 The Chairman has waived £27k of his 2014 fee, which was increased to £95k from 1 January 2014.  
10 The Venerable Christine Wilson was appointed to the Board on 21 June 2012 and her fees are paid directly to charity at her 
request.  
11 Tim Carroll was appointed to the Board on 2 April 2013.  
12 Caroline Taylor was appointed to the Board on 8 September 2014.  
13 Sir Philip Mawer resigned on 6 February 2013.

Statement of Directors’ shareholdings and share interests 

Directors’ shareholdings and share interests are set out in the Directors’ Report on page 73.

Executive Directors’ termination payments

No termination payments were made to Executive Directors in 2014.

Early vesting of LTIP award

There is no early vesting of the Executive Directors’ LTIP. For good leavers grants will vest on the original anniversary date. Any 
payment is then pro-rated to reflect employment during the 36-month performance period.

Payments to past Directors

No payments were made to past Directors except in relation to LTIP awards that vested in the year in relation to a prior 
performance period under the good leaver provisions of the scheme.

Total aggregate emoluments of Directors 

For the purposes of the disclosure required by Schedule 5 to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts 
and Reports) Regulations, the total aggregate remuneration of the Directors in respect of qualifying services during 2014 was 
£1,991k (2013: £1,609k). 

After inclusion of amounts receivable under long-term incentive schemes and pension benefits, the total aggregate emoluments 
of the Directors was £2,422k (2013: £1,764k). The 2013 figures have been adjusted to reflect changes made to prior year 
figures as mentioned in the single figure table on page 111.

114 Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

 
S E C T I O N
S E C T I O N

03

LTIP grant policy (not auditable)

Grants of participation in the LTIP are made annually following the publication of the Company’s accounts. In 2014 awards were 
made to Executive Directors and other designated senior managers in accordance with our normal grant policy. For Executive 
Directors this is included in the single figure table on page111.

Performance graph (not auditable)

As Ecclesiastical does not have equity shares traded on a regulated market, total equity shareholders’ funds growth over time as 
reported each year (plus the grant to ATL) has been used in the performance graph compared with the FTSE 250. Total equity 
excludes Preference shareholders’ capital since this is not attributable to ATL.

Ecclesiactical Insurance  Office plc 10-year to 2014 
TSR performance against the FTSE 250 

Ecclesiastical TSR performance against the FTSE 250 (2004-2014)

l

i

g
n
d
o
h
0
0
1
£

l

a
c
i
t
e
h
t
o
p
y
h
f
o
e
u
a
V

l

Ecclesiastical Total Shareholder Return

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

FTSE 250 Total return

2004

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2014

December of each month

Ecclesiastical Investment Management (EIM) (not auditable) 

EIM is a limited licence investment management firm under IFPRU, at proportionality level 3 for reporting purposes. EIM has 
been subject to the FCA Remuneration Code since 1 January 2011. EIM operates a remuneration policy which is compliant 
with the Remuneration Code, details of which can be found in the EIM Pillar 3 statement on Ecclesiastical’s website.

Consideration by the Committee of matters relating to Directors’ 
remuneration (not auditable) 

Advisers to the Committee

Hewitt New Bridge Street (HNBS) were the appointed advisers to the Committee for 2014. During the year external 
professional advice was sourced from HNBS and, as part of the Group Remuneration Strategy Review, from FIT Remuneration 
Consultants LLP when determining appropriate remuneration packages for Executive Directors and those holding Significant 
Influence functions. HNBS and FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP have no other advisory function within the Group. The 
Committee also has access to benchmarking reports from Towers Watson and McLagan, which provide data to support the 
determination of pay and conditions throughout the Group.

The Committee is content that the advice received from its advisers was impartial.

The Committee is responsible for recommending to the Board the Remuneration Policy for Executive Directors and for setting 
the remuneration packages for each Executive Director, members of the Group Management Board, Remuneration Code 
staff and heads of strategic business units. None of the Executive Directors were involved in discussions relating to their own 
remuneration. The Committee also has overarching responsibility for the Group-wide Remuneration Policy.

Section 3  Directors’ Remuneration Report

115

 
 
 
 
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT TO THE MEMBERS OF 
ECCLESIASTICAL INSURANCE OFFICE PLC

Opinion on financial  
statements of  
Ecclesiastical Insurance  
Office plc

In our opinion:

 ■ the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s 
and of the parent company’s affairs as at 31 December 2014 and of the 
Group’s profit for the year then ended;

 ■ the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance 
with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the 
European Union;

 ■ the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in 

accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and as applied in 
accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006; and

 ■ the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the 

requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial 
statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

The financial statements comprise the Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss, the 
Consolidated and Parent Statement of Comprehensive Income, the Consolidated and 
Parent Statement of Changes in Equity, the Consolidated and Parent Statement of 
Financial Position and the Consolidated and Parent Statement of Cash Flows, and the 
related notes 1 to 34. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their 
preparation is applicable law and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and, as 
regards the parent company financial statements, as applied in accordance with the 
provisions of the Companies Act 2006.

Going concern

We have reviewed the Directors’ statement on page 74 that the Group is a going 
concern. We confirm that:

 ■ we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of accounting 

in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate; and

 ■ we have not identified any material uncertainties that may cast significant doubt on 

the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern.

However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, this statement is 
not a guarantee as to the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern.

Our assessment of risks  
of material misstatement

The assessed risks of material misstatement described below are those that had 
the greatest effect on our audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit and 
directing the efforts of the engagement team.

116 Section 3  Independent Auditor’s Report

03

Risk

How the scope of our audit responded to the risk

General Insurance Technical Reserves 
The assessment of the calculation of the general insurance  
technical reserves requires management to make significant 
judgements about the quantum of the reported losses and the 
estimated incurred but not reported (“IBNR”) losses based on 
past experience and current expectations of future cost levels. 
Gross provisions for outstanding claims total £564m. The more 
judgemental areas of reserving are considered higher risk, being  
the liability claims reserves and in particular the ‘PSA’ reserves, 
referred to by the Group Audit Committee in their report on page 88.

Carrying Value of Goodwill 
The assessment of impairment of goodwill is a judgemental process 
which requires estimates concerning the estimated future cash 
flows and associated discount rates and growth rates based on 
management’s view of future business prospects. The Group’s 
intangible assets include £24m of goodwill relating to acquisitions; 
material goodwill is held in respect of the brokers SEIB and 

Lansdown.

We challenged the key judgements within the calculation of the general 
insurance reserves as set out in note 27 to the financial statements by 
working with our general insurance actuarial specialists to specifically 
assess the movements in prior year reserves, material changes in 
methodology and assumptions and the impact of claims experience in 
the year. Key assumptions and methodologies were benchmarked using 
our industry knowledge. We also tested the design and implementation of 
key controls around reserving and the completeness and accuracy of the 
underlying data used in the reserving.

We challenged management’s key assumptions used in the impairment 
model for goodwill and intangible assets, described in note 16 to the 
financial statements, relating to estimated future cash flows, growth 
rates and the discount rate applied. We compared these to published 
benchmark rates, agreed the prevailing Group cost of capital at the 
year-end and compared to management’s past forecasting accuracy 
and future prospects of the business. We also tested the mathematical 
accuracy of management’s calculations and the design and 
implementation of controls around the impairment review process.

Life Insurance Reserves 
The assessment of the calculation of the life insurance reserves 
requires management to make significant judgements about 
bond yields, discount rates, credit risk, mortality rates and current 
expectations of future expense levels. Although closed for new 
business, the Group maintains reserves for existing business of 
£94m.

We evaluated the key judgements underpinning the calculation of the 
life insurance reserves as set out in note 27 to the financial statements 
by involving our internal life actuarial specialists to benchmark the 
valuation and expense assumptions to those used in the market. We 
also tested the design and implementation of key controls around the 
life reserving and the completeness and accuracy of underlying data 
used in the reserving.

Assumptions Underpinning the Calculation and Recognition of 
Retirement Benefit Obligations and recognition of surpluses 
The determination of the value of the surpluses and deficits relating 
to the Group’s defined benefit pension schemes and liability relating 
to post-employment medical benefits requires significant judgement 
in the selection of key assumptions and is highly sensitive to such 
assumptions. Management make significant judgements in respect 
of mortality, price inflation, discount rates, pension increases and 
earnings growth. The Group recognises a total of £21m for pension 
schemes in surplus and a deficit of £250k for one scheme; the 
post-employment medical benefits scheme has a liability of £12.5m.

Revenue Recognition 
We have identified earning patterns applied to gross written 
premiums (“GWP”) and the risk of data from policy administration 
systems not being reflected appropriately as our revenue risks for 
general insurance business and we have identified the calculation of 
management fees as the revenue risk for investment management 
business. GWP totalled £329m for the year, EIM’s management fee 
income totalled £9.8m.

We evaluated the appropriateness of the assumptions used in deriving 
the defined benefit pension and post-retirement medical benefits 
balances, as set out in note 18 to the financial statements, by involving 
our internal pension specialists to benchmark the assumptions in 
respect of the discount rate, inflation and mortality assumptions to those 
observed in the market.

We tested the design and implementation of key controls around 
pensions balances and the completeness and accuracy of underlying 
data used in the calculation of the retirement benefit obligations; we 
also assessed management’s valuation of pension scheme assets, held 
at fair value, by comparison to observable market prices and evaluated 
the accessibility of the surplus on the main scheme by reference to 
applicable accounting standards and advice received by management 
from external parties.

We have tested the design and implementation and operating 
effectiveness of the key controls over revenue recognition and 
underwriting. We focussed our work on the automated controls and 
interfaces between the underlying policy administration systems and 
the general ledger. Furthermore, we performed tests of details on the 
gross and  unearned premium balances, agreeing a sample to policy 
documents and cash receipts where appropriate. We also performed 
substantive analytical procedures on the writing patterns and unearned 
premium percentage. Our IT audit specialists were involved in the 
testing of systems and controls and also in performing data analytics  
on the premiums population to enable selection of a risk-weighted 
sample for detailed testing. EIM management fee income was tested by 
recalculation and we performed analytical procedures, focussing on fees 
earned compared to funds under management, throughout the year.

Last year our report included a further risk which is not included in our report this year: carrying value of tax liabilities – the 
significant uncertainty regarding these has been eliminated in the year as circumstances became clearer regarding a specific 
issue disclosed last year, as referred to in note 28 to the financial statements. The description of risks above should be read in 
conjunction with the significant issues considered by the Group Audit Committee discussed on page 91. Our audit procedures 
relating to these matters were designed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and not to express an 
opinion on individual accounts or disclosures. Our opinion on the financial statements is not modified with respect to any of the 
risks described above, and we do not express an opinion on these individual matters.

Section 3  Independent Auditor’s Report

117

SECTIONSECTIONOur application of  
materiality

An overview of the scope  
of our audit

We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that 
makes it probable that the economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person 
would be changed or influenced. We use materiality both in planning the scope of our 
audit work and in evaluating the results of our work.

We determined materiality for the group to be £3.1m (2013: £3.7m), which is below 1% 
(2013: below 1%) of both gross written premiums and equity.

We agreed with the Group Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all 
audit differences in excess of £62k (2013: £77k), as well as differences below that 
threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. We also report to 
the Group Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the 
overall presentation of the financial statements.

Our group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its 
environment, including group-wide controls, and assessing the risks of material 
misstatement at the Group level. Based on that assessment, we focused our group 
audit scope primarily on the audit work for the general and life insurance businesses in 
the UK, Ireland, Australia and Canada. Together, these represent the principal business 
units and account for 97% of the Group’s net assets (2013: 96%), 93% of the Group’s 
revenue (2013: 93%) and 92% of the Group’s profit before tax (2013: 85%). All 
significant components were subject to full scope audits which were executed at levels 
of materiality applicable to each individual entity, in the range £4k to £2.8m.

We completed the majority of our audit work in the UK. A senior member of the group 
audit team visited each significant component as part of this year’s audit and we 
discussed the risk assessment with the component auditor, in addition to reviewing 
documentation of the findings from their work.

At the parent entity level we also tested the consolidation process and carried out 
analytical procedures to confirm our conclusion that there were no significant risks 
of material misstatement of the aggregated financial information of the remaining 
components not subject to audit or audit of specified account balances.

Opinion on other matter 
prescribed by the Companies  
Act 2006

In our opinion the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for 
the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the 
financial statements.

Other matters

Directors’ Remuneration

In our opinion the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been 
properly prepared in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006 that 
would have applied were the company a quoted company.

Corporate Governance Statement

Although not required to do so, the directors have voluntarily chosen to make a 
corporate governance statement detailing the extent of their compliance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code. We reviewed the part of the Corporate Governance 
Statement relating to the company’s compliance with ten provisions of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code. We have nothing to report arising from our review.

Matters on which we are  
required to report by exception

Adequacy of explanations  
received and accounting records

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

 ■ we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
 ■ adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns 
adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited by us; or
 ■ the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting 

records and returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

118 Section 3  Independent Auditor’s Report

03

Directors’ remuneration

Our duty to read other  
information  
in the Annual Report

Respective responsibilities  
of Directors and auditor

Scope of the audit of the  
financial statements

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain 
disclosures of Directors’ remuneration have not been made. We have nothing to report 
arising from this matter.

Under International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland), we are required to report to 
you if, in our opinion, information in the annual report is:

 ■ materially inconsistent with the information in the audited financial statements; or
 ■ apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, our 
knowledge of the Group acquired in the course of performing our audit; or

 ■ otherwise misleading.

In particular, we are required to consider whether we have identified any inconsistencies 
between our knowledge acquired during the audit and the Directors’ statement that they 
consider the annual report is fair, balanced and understandable and whether the annual 
report appropriately discloses those matters that we communicated to the Group Audit 
Committee which we consider should have been disclosed. We confirm that we have not 
identified any such inconsistencies or misleading statements.

As explained more fully in the Directors’ Responsibilities Statement, the Directors are 
responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that 
they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on 
the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards 
on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing 
Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors. We also comply with International 
Standard on Quality Control 1 (UK and Ireland). Our audit methodology and tools aim 
to ensure that our quality control procedures are effective, understood and applied. Our 
quality controls and systems include our dedicated professional standards review team 
and independent partner reviews.

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with 
Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken 
so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to 
state to them in an auditor’s report and/or those further matters we have expressly 
agreed to report to them on in our engagement letter and for no other purpose. To the 
fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone 
other than the company and the company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for 
this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial 
statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance that the financial statements are 
free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an 
assessment of: whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s and the 
parent company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately 
disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the 
directors; and the overall presentation of the financial statements. In addition, we read 
all the financial and non-financial information in the annual report to identify material 
inconsistencies with the audited financial statements and to identify any information 
that is apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, the 
knowledge acquired by us in the course of performing the audit. If we become aware of 
any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for 
our report.

Mark McQueen ACA (Senior statutory auditor) 
for and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditor, London, United Kingdom 
24 March 2015

Section 3  Independent Auditor’s Report

119

SECTIONSECTIONS E C T I O N   F O U R
Financial Statements

04

Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss 

Consolidated and Parent Statement of 
Comprehensive Income 

Consolidated and Parent Statement of Changes in Equity 

Consolidated and Parent Statement of Financial Position 

Consolidated and Parent Statement of Cash Flows 

Notes to the Financial Statements 

121

122

123

124

125

126

120   

Section 4  Financial StatementsCONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS
for the year ended 31 December 2014

Revenue
Gross written premiums
Outward reinsurance premiums
Net change in provision for unearned premiums
Net earned premiums

Fee and commission income 
Net investment return
Total revenue

Expenses
Claims and change in insurance liabilities
Reinsurance recoveries
Fees, commissions and other acquisition costs
Other operating and administrative expenses
Total operating expenses

Operating profit
Finance costs
Profit before tax
Tax expense
Profit for the year (attributable to equity holders of the Parent)

Notes

5, 6
6
6

7

8
8
9

5
13
10

2014
£000

2013
£000

328,797
(135,132)
31,178
224,843

62,258
46,197
333,298

(197,170)
62,306
(70,813)
(79,381)
(285,058)

48,240
(86)
48,154
(7,837)
40,317

399,345
(131,274)
24,592
292,663

58,088
77,243
427,994

(234,789)
36,545
(80,285)
(82,411)
(360,940)

67,054
(117)
66,937
(4,819)
62,118

121   

Section 4  Financial StatementsCONSOLIDATED AND PARENT STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME
for the year ended 31 December 2014

Profit for the year

Other comprehensive income
Items that will not be reclassified to profit or loss:
Fair value gains/(losses) on property
Actuarial losses on retirement benefit plans
Attributable tax

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss:
Losses on currency translation differences
Net other comprehensive income

Total comprehensive income attributable to equity holders of 
the Parent 

2014

Group
£000

Parent
£000

2013

Group
£000

40,317

31,359

62,118

30
(13,184)
2,647
(10,507)

30
(13,184)
2,647
(10,507)

(104)
(1,526)
484
(1,146)

(1,697)
(12,204)

(405)
(10,912)

(10,071)
(11,217)

Parent
£000

52,494

 -
(1,526)
453
(1,073)

(2,727)
(3,800)

28,113

20,447

50,901

48,694

122   

Section 4  Financial StatementsCONSOLIDATED AND PARENT STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY
for the year ended 31 December 2014

Group

At 1 January 2014
Profit for the year
Other net income/(expense)
Total comprehensive income
Dividends
Gross charitable grant 
Tax relief on charitable grant
Group tax relief in excess 
of standard rate 
Reserve transfers
At 31 December 2014

At 1 January 2013
Profit for the year
Other net expense
Total comprehensive income
Dividends
Gross charitable grant 
Tax relief on charitable grant
Group tax relief in excess 
of standard rate 
Reserve transfers
At 31 December 2013

Parent

At 1 January 2014
Profit for the year
Other net income/(expense)
Total comprehensive income
Dividends
Gross charitable grant 
Tax relief on charitable grant
Group tax relief in excess 
of standard rate 
Reserve transfers
At 31 December 2014

At 1 January 2013
Profit for the year
Other net income/(expense)
Total comprehensive income
Dividends
Gross charitable grant 
Tax relief on charitable grant
Group tax relief in excess 
of standard rate 
Reserve transfers
At 31 December 2013

Share
capital
£000

120,477
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
120,477

120,477
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
120,477

120,477
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
120,477

120,477
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
120,477

Share
premium
£000

Equalisation Revaluation
reserve
£000

reserve
£000

Translation
reserve
£000

4,632
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
4,632

4,632
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
4,632

4,632
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
4,632

4,632
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
4,632

25,837
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
(538)
25,299

25,590
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
247
25,837

25,837
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
(538)
25,299

25,590
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -
247
25,837

700
 -
40
40
 -
 -
 -

 -
(199)
541

752
 -
(52)
(52)
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
700

563
 -
40
40
 -
 -
 -

 -
(62)
541

542
 -
21
21
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
563

14,340
 -
(1,697)
(1,697)
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
12,643

24,411
 -
(10,071)
(10,071)
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
14,340

6,458
 -
(405)
(405)
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
6,053

9,185
 -
(2,727)
(2,727)
 -
 -
 -

 -
 -
6,458

Retained
earnings
£000

328,157
40,317
(10,547)
29,770
(9,181)
(23,500)
5,053

5
737
331,041

279,795
62,118
(1,094)
61,024
(9,181)
(4,000)
930

(164)
(247)
328,157

270,327
31,359
(10,547)
20,812
(9,181)
(23,500)
5,053

(741)
600
263,370

232,176
52,494
(1,094)
51,400
(9,181)
(4,000)
930

(751)
(247)
270,327

Total
£000

494,143
40,317
(12,204)
28,113
(9,181)
(23,500)
5,053

5
 -
494,633

455,657
62,118
(11,217)
50,901
(9,181)
(4,000)
930

(164)
 -
494,143

428,294
31,359
(10,912)
20,447
(9,181)
(23,500)
5,053

(741)
 -
420,372

392,602
52,494
(3,800)
48,694
(9,181)
(4,000)
930

(751)
 -
428,294

The equalisation reserve is not distributable and must be kept in compliance with the insurance companies' reserves regulations. The
revaluation reserve represents cumulative net fair value gains on owner-occupied property. The translation reserve arises on consolidation of
the Group's and Parent's foreign operations.

123   

Section 4  Financial StatementsCONSOLIDATED AND PARENT STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION
for the year ended 31 December 2014

Assets
Goodwill and other intangible assets
Deferred acquisition costs
Deferred tax assets
Pension assets
Property, plant and equipment
Investment property
Financial investments
Reinsurers' share of contract liabilities
Current tax recoverable
Other assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Current assets classified as held for sale
Total assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium account
Retained earnings and other reserves
Total shareholders' equity

Liabilities
Insurance contract liabilities
Finance lease obligations
Provisions for other liabilities
Pension liabilities
Retirement benefit obligations
Deferred tax liabilities
Current tax liabilities
Deferred income
Other liabilities
Total liabilities

Notes

2014

Group
£000

Parent
£000

2013

Group
£000

Parent
£000

16
17
29
18
19
20
21
27

23
24
25

26

27

28
18
18
29

30

28,998
31,117
1,295
21,068
6,405
69,775
886,186
157,465
 -
119,394
107,526
6,204
1,435,433

120,477
4,632
369,524
494,633

820,328
1,259
3,588
250
12,547
36,014
5,767
16,432
44,615
940,800

4,230
26,974
11
21,068
5,693
69,775
714,428
115,004
 -
102,239
77,774
 -
1,137,196

120,477
4,632
295,263
420,372

618,887
1,259
2,770
250
12,547
35,559
4,962
13,443
27,147
716,824

23,684
34,757
3,261
32,288
7,292
45,099
946,452
132,593
135
124,464
107,241
 -
1,457,266

120,477
4,632
369,034
494,143

848,267
1,624
6,710
 -
11,744
40,116
2,463
14,231
37,968
963,123

3,795
30,542
37
32,288
6,084
45,099
763,926
121,490
135
108,271
80,430
 -
1,192,097

120,477
4,632
303,185
428,294

663,188
1,624
6,566
 -
11,744
39,548
2,171
13,950
25,012
763,803

Total shareholders' equity and liabilities

1,435,433

1,137,196

1,457,266

1,192,097

The financial statements of Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc, registered number 24869, on pages 121 to 180 were approved and authorised
for issue by the Board of Directors on 24 March 2015 and signed on its behalf by:

Will Samuel
Chairman

Mark Hews
Group Chief Executive

124   

Section 4  Financial StatementsCONSOLIDATED AND PARENT STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS
for the year ended 31 December 2014

Profit before tax
Adjustments for:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
(Profit)/loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Amortisation and impairment of intangible assets
Loss on disposal of intangible assets
Net fair value (gains)/losses on financial instruments and investment 
property
Dividend and interest income
Finance costs

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:
Net decrease in insurance contract liabilities
Net (increase)/decrease in reinsurers' share of contract liabilities
Net decrease/(increase) in deferred acquisition costs
Net decrease in other assets
Net increase/(decrease) in operating liabilities
Net (decrease)/increase in other liabilities
Cash (used)/generated by operations

Dividends received
Interest received
Interest paid
Tax recovered/(paid)
Net cash from operating activities

Cash flows from investing activities
Purchases of property, plant and equipment
Proceeds from the sale of property, plant and equipment
Purchases of intangible assets
Acquisition of business, net of cash acquired
Acquisition of shares issued by subsidiary
Purchases of financial instruments and investment property
Sale of financial instruments and investment property
Net cash from/(used by) investing activities

Cash flows from financing activities
Payment of finance lease liabilities
Payment of group tax relief in excess of standard rate
Dividends paid to Company's shareholders
Donations paid to ultimate parent undertaking
Net cash used by financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year
Exchange losses on cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

2014

Group
£000

Parent
£000

2013

Group
£000

48,154

35,644

66,937

1,638
(32)
1,751
19

(8,918)
(34,709)
86

(21,413)
(26,814)
3,327
3,792
8,814
(3,498)
(27,803)

8,624
26,889
(86)
1,127
8,751

(1,369)
677
(1,548)
(5,000)
 -
(152,899)
185,401
25,262

(359)
(15)
(9,181)
(23,500)
(33,055)

958
107,241
(673)
107,526

1,464
(13)
1,092
 -

739
(26,150)
86

(41,066)
6,087
3,377
4,725
1,777
(4,177)
(16,415)

7,863
18,774
(86)
2,512
12,648

(1,171)
126
(1,547)
 -
(300)
(123,780)
144,870
18,198

(359)
(122)
(9,181)
(23,500)
(33,162)

(2,316)
80,430
(340)
77,774

1,930
112
2,770
7

(36,072)
(38,364)
117

(8,689)
5,275
(1,075)
16,385
(777)
48
8,604

9,923
27,388
(117)
(225)
45,573

(1,017)
54
(2,232)
 -
 -
(269,766)
242,082
(30,879)

(418)
(163)
(9,181)
(8,000)
(17,762)

(3,068)
112,584
(2,275)
107,241

Parent
£000

57,394

1,673
(30)
2,017
 -

(32,603)
(28,453)
114

(7,941)
5,056
4,902
12,792
(4,766)
214
10,369

9,228
18,350
(114)
1,117
38,950

(941)
54
(2,096)
 -
 -
(209,153)
182,040
(30,096)

(418)
524
(9,181)
(8,000)
(17,075)

(8,221)
88,963
(312)
80,430

125   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1 Accounting policies

Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc (hereafter referred to as the ‘Company’, or ‘Parent’), a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in
England, together with its subsidiaries (collectively, the ‘Group’) operates principally as a provider of general insurance and in addition offers a
range of financial services, with offices in the UK, Australia, Canada and Ireland. The principal accounting policies adopted in preparing the
Group's International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) financial statements are set out below.

Basis of preparation
The Group’s consolidated financial statements have been prepared using the following accounting policies, which are in accordance with IFRS
applicable at 31 December 2014 issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and endorsed by the European Union (EU).
The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis, except for the revaluation of properties and certain financial
instruments.

The Financial Performance and Risk Management sections of the Strategic Report provide a review of the Group’s business activities and
describe the principal risks and uncertainties,
including exposures to insurance and financial risk. The Group has considerable financial
resources: financial investments of £892.4m (including current assets classified as held for sale), 98% of which are liquid (2013: financial
investments of £946.5m, 97% liquid); cash and cash equivalents of £107.5m and no borrowings (2013: cash and cash equivalents of
£107.2m and no borrowings); and a regulatory enhanced capital cover of 2.9 (2013: 2.6). As a consequence, the Directors have a reasonable
expectation that the Group is well placed to manage its business risks successfully and continue in operational existence for the foreseeable
future. Accordingly, they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the annual report and accounts.

In accordance with IFRS 4, Insurance Contracts , on adoption of IFRS the Group applied existing accounting practices for insurance and
participating investment contracts, modified as appropriate to comply with the IFRS framework and applicable standards, introducing changes
only where they provide more reliable and relevant information.

Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured in the currency of the primary economic environment in
which that entity operates (the 'functional currency'). The consolidated financial statements are stated in sterling, which is the Company’s
functional and presentation currency.

As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, a separate profit and loss account for the Company is not presented.

New and revised Standards
The Standards adopted in the current year are either outside the scope of Group transactions or do not significantly impact the Group.

The following Standards were in issue but not yet effective and have not been applied in these financial statements.

Accounting Standard 

Key requirements

Expected impact on financial statements

Effective date

IFRS 9, Financial 
Instruments

The final phase of IFRS 9 was 
issued in the year and the Standard 
has now been issued in full. It 
provides a new model for the 
classification and measurement of 
financial instruments, a single, 
forward-looking ‘expected loss’ 
impairment model and a reformed 
approach to hedge accounting.

It is expected that equity instruments will continue to 
be measured at fair value through profit or loss. 
There is a possibility that the measurement of debt 
instruments will change to amortised cost or fair 
value through other comprehensive income, although 
this is being assessed and depends on the 
conclusion of IFRS 4 Phase II, the IASB's ongoing 
insurance accounting project.

Annual periods 
beginning on or 
after 1 January 
2018.

IFRS 15, Revenue from 
Contracts with 
Customers

Establishes principles for reporting 
useful information to users of 
financial statements about the 
nature, amount, timing and 
uncertainty of revenue and cash 
flows arising from an entity’s 
contracts with customers.

Insurance contracts are outside the scope of the 
Standard. The impact on fee and commission income 
is being assessed. There is the possibility of 
commission income being recognised earlier if a 
contract is approved and consideration is probable. 
Variable consideration will be recognised earlier if 
receipt is considered highly probable.

Annual periods 
beginning on or 
after 1 January 
2017.

The other Standards in issue but not yet effective are not expected to significantly impact the Group.

Use of estimates
The preparation of financial statements requires the use of estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities,
and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements. Although these estimates are based on
management’s best knowledge of current events and actions, actual results ultimately may differ from those estimates.

126   

Section 4  Financial StatementsOperating profit or loss
Operating profit or loss is stated before finance costs.

Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are those entities over which the Company, directly or indirectly, has control, with control being achieved when the Company has
power over the investee, is exposed to variable return from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to use its power to affect its
returns. The results and cash flows relating to subsidiaries acquired or disposed of in the year are included in the consolidated statement of
inter-company
profit or loss and the consolidated statement of cash flows from the date of acquisition or up to the date of disposal. All
transactions, balances and profits are eliminated.

In the Parent statement of financial position subsidiaries are accounted for within financial investments at cost, in accordance with IAS 27, 
Separate Financial Statements .

The Group uses the acquisition method of accounting to account for business combinations. The cost of an acquisition is measured as the fair
value of the assets given, equity instruments issued and liabilities incurred or assumed at the acquisition date. Identifiable assets acquired and
liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination are measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date. Non-
controlling interests are measured either at fair value or at a proportionate share of the identifiable net assets of the acquiree. Goodwill is
measured as the excess of the aggregate of the consideration transferred, the non-controlling interests and, for an acquisition achieved in
stages, the fair value of previously held equity interest over the fair value of the identifiable net assets acquired. If the cost of acquisition is less
than the fair value of the net assets acquired, the difference is recognised directly through profit or loss.

For business combinations involving entities or businesses under common control, the cost of the acquisition equals the value of net assets
transferred, as recognised by the transferor at the date of the transaction. No goodwill arises on such transactions.

Investment vehicles
Investment vehicles such as mutual funds are consolidated when the Group has a controlling interest.

Foreign currency translation
The assets and liabilities of foreign operations are translated from their functional currencies into the Group's presentation currency using year
end exchange rates, and their income and expenses using average exchange rates for the year. Exchange differences arising from the
translation of the net investment in foreign operations are taken to the currency translation reserve within equity. On disposal of a foreign
operation, such exchange differences are transferred out of this reserve and are recognised in the statement of profit or loss as part of the gain
or loss on sale.

Product classification
Contracts under which the Group accepts significant insurance risk from another party (the policyholder) by agreeing to compensate the
policyholder or other beneficiary if a specified uncertain future event (the insured event) adversely affects the policyholder are classified as
insurance contracts. Contracts that do not transfer significant insurance risk are classified as investment or service contracts. All of the Group's
long-term business contracts are classified as insurance contracts.

Both insurance and investment contracts may contain a discretionary participating feature, which is defined as a contractual right to receive
additional benefits as a supplement to guaranteed benefits. The Group does not have any such participating contracts (referred to as with-profit
contracts). The Company's long-term business contracts are referred to as non-profit contracts in the financial statements.

Premium income
General insurance business
Premiums are shown gross of commission paid to intermediaries and accounted for in the period in which the risk commences. Estimates are
included for premiums not notified by the year end and provision is made for the anticipated lapse of renewals not yet confirmed. Those
proportions of premiums written in a year which relate to periods of risk extending beyond the end of the year are carried forward as unearned
premiums.

Premiums written include adjustments to premiums written in prior periods and estimates for pipeline premiums and are shown net of insurance
premium taxes. Outward reinsurance premiums are accounted for in the same accounting period as the premiums for the related direct
insurance or inwards reinsurance business.

Long-term business
Insurance contract premiums are recognised as income when receivable, at which date the liabilities arising from them are also recognised.

127   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1 Accounting policies (continued)

Fee and commission income
Fee and commission income consists primarily of reinsurance commissions receivable in addition to income from the Group's insurance broking
activities, investment fund management fees, distribution fees from mutual funds and commission revenue from the sale of mutual fund shares.
Reinsurance commissions receivable and other commission income are recognised on the trade date.
Income generated from insurance
placements is recognised at the inception date of the cover.

Fees charged for investment management services are recognised as revenue when the services are provided. Initial fees which exceed the
level of recurring fees and relate to the future provision of services are deferred and amortised over the anticipated period in which services will
be provided. Fees charged for investment management services for institutional and retail fund management are also recognised on this basis.

Net investment return
Net investment return consists of dividends, interest and rents receivable for the year, realised gains and losses, and unrealised gains and
losses on financial instruments and investment properties. Dividends on equity securities are recorded as revenue on the ex-dividend date.
Interest and rental income is recognised as it accrues.

Unrealised gains and losses are calculated as the difference between carrying value and original cost, and the movement during the year is
recognised through profit or loss. The value of realised gains and losses includes an adjustment for previously recognised unrealised gains or
losses on investments disposed of in the accounting period.

Claims
General insurance claims incurred include all losses occurring during the year, whether reported or not, related handling costs, a reduction for
the value of salvage and other recoveries, and any adjustments to claims outstanding from previous years.

Claims handling costs include all internal and external costs incurred in connection with the negotiation and settlement of claims.

Long-term insurance business claims and death claims are accounted for when notified. 

Insurance contract liabilities 
General insurance provisions
(i) Outstanding claims provisions
General insurance outstanding claims provisions are based on the estimated ultimate cost of all claims incurred but not settled at the year end
date, whether reported or not, together with related claims handling costs. Significant delays are experienced in the notification and settlement
of certain types of general
insurance claims, particularly in respect of liability business, the ultimate cost of which cannot be known with
certainty at the year end date. An estimate is made representing the best estimate plus a risk margin within a range of possible outcomes.
Designated insurance liabilities are remeasured to reflect current market interest rates.

(ii) Provision for unearned premiums
The proportion of written premiums, gross of commission payable to intermediaries, attributable to subsequent periods is deferred as a provision
for unearned premiums. The change in this provision is taken to profit or loss in order that revenue is recognised over the period of risk.

(iii) Liability adequacy
At each reporting date, the Group reviews its unexpired risks and carries out a liability adequacy test for any overall excess of expected claims
and deferred acquisition costs over unearned premiums, using the current estimates of future cash flows under its contracts. Unexpired risks
are assessed separately for each class of business. Surpluses and deficits are offset where business classes are considered to be managed
together.

Long-term business provisions
insurance contract liabilities are measured using accounting policies consistent with those adopted
Under current IFRS requirements,
previously. Accounting for such contracts is determined in accordance with the Statement of Recommended Practice issued by the Association
of British Insurers in December 2005, and amended in December 2006.

The long-term business provision is determined using methods and assumptions approved by the Directors based on advice from the Actuarial
Function Holder. Initially it is calculated to comply with the reporting requirements under the Prudential Sourcebook for Insurers. This statutory
solvency basis of valuation is then adjusted by eliminating or adjusting certain reserves advised under insurance companies' regulations and
general contingency reserves. This adjusted basis is referred to as the modified statutory solvency basis.

Reinsurance
The Group assumes and cedes reinsurance in the normal course of business, with retention limits varying by line of business. Premiums on
reinsurance assumed are recognised as revenue in the same manner as direct business. Outwards reinsurance premiums are accounted for in
the same accounting period as the related premiums for the direct or inwards reinsurance business being reinsured. The Group does not
reinsure its long-term business.

128   

Section 4  Financial StatementsReinsurance assets primarily include balances due from both insurance and reinsurance companies for ceded insurance liabilities. Amounts
recoverable from reinsurers are estimated in a manner consistent with the outstanding claims provisions or settled claims associated with the
reinsured policies and in accordance with the relevant reinsurance contract.

Intangible assets
Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s share of the identifiable assets and liabilities of
the acquired subsidiary at the date of acquisition. Goodwill on acquisitions prior to 1 January 2004 (the date of transition to IFRS) is carried at
book value (original cost less amortisation) on that date, less any subsequent impairment. Where it is considered more relevant, the Group uses
the option to measure goodwill initially at fair value, less any subsequent impairment.

Goodwill is tested annually for impairment and carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. Gains and losses on the disposal of an
entity include the carrying amount of goodwill relating to the entity sold.

Computer software
Computer software is carried at historical cost less accumulated amortisation, and amortised over a useful life of between three and five years,
using the straight-line method. The amortisation charge for the period is included in the statement of profit or loss within other operating and
administrative expenses.

Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets consist of acquired brand, customer and distribution relationships, and are carried at cost at acquisition less
accumulated amortisation after acquisition. Amortisation is on a straight-line basis over the weighted average estimated useful life of intangible
assets acquired. The amortisation charge for the period is included in the statement of profit or loss within other operating and administrative
expenses.

Property, plant and equipment
Owner-occupied properties are stated at open market value and movements are taken to the revaluation reserve within equity, net of deferred
tax. When such properties are sold, the accumulated revaluation surpluses are transferred from this reserve to retained earnings. Where the
market value of an individual property is below original cost, any revaluation movement arising during the year is recognised within net
investment return in the statement of profit or loss. Valuations are carried out at least every three years by external qualified surveyors. All other
items classed as property, plant and equipment within the statement of financial position are carried at historical cost less accumulated
depreciation.

Land is not depreciated. No depreciation is provided on owner-occupied properties since such depreciation would be immaterial. Depreciation
is calculated on the straight-line method to write down the cost of other assets to their residual values over their estimated useful lives as
follows:

Computer equipment
Motor vehicles
Fixtures, fittings and office equipment

3 - 5 years
27% reducing balance or length of lease
3 - 15 years

Where the carrying amount of an item carried at historical cost less accumulated depreciation is greater than its estimated recoverable amount,
it is written down to its recoverable amount by way of an impairment charge to profit or loss.

Repairs and maintenance are charged to profit or loss during the financial period in which they are incurred.

Investment property
Investment property comprises land and buildings which are held for long-term rental yields. It is carried at fair value with changes in fair value
recognised in the statement of profit or loss within net investment return. Investment property is valued annually by external qualified surveyors
at open market value.

Financial instruments 
IAS 39, Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement requires the classification of certain financial assets and liabilities into separate
categories for which the accounting requirements differ. 

The classification depends on the nature and purpose of the financial assets and liabilities, and is determined at the time of initial recognition.
Financial instruments are initially measured at fair value. Their subsequent measurement depends on their classification:

-

Financial instruments designated as at fair value through profit or loss and those held for trading are subsequently carried at fair value.
Changes in fair value are recognised through profit or loss in the period in which they arise.

129   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1 Accounting policies (continued)

-

All other financial assets and liabilities are held at amortised cost, using the effective interest method (except for short-term receivables and
payables when the recognition of interest would be immaterial).

The Directors consider that the carrying value of those financial assets and liabilities not carried at fair value in the financial statements
approximates to their fair value.

Offset of financial assets and financial liabilities
Financial assets and liabilities are offset, and the net amount reported in the statement of financial position, when there is a legally enforceable
right to offset the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis, or realise the asset and settle the liability
simultaneously.

Financial investments
The Group classifies its financial
trading) or loans and receivables. 

investments as either financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (designated as such or held for

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Financial investments are classified into this category if they are managed, and their performance evaluated, on a fair value basis. Purchases
and sales of these investments are recognised on the trade date, which is the date that the Group commits to purchase or sell the assets, at
their fair value adjusted for transaction costs. Financial investments within this category are classified as held for trading if they are derivatives
or acquired principally for the purpose of selling in the near term.

The fair values of investments are based on quoted bid prices. Where there is no active market, fair value is established using a valuation
technique based on observable market data where available. There is no current intention to dispose of these investments.

Loans and receivables
Loans and receivables, comprising mortgages and other loans, are recognised when cash is advanced to borrowers. These are carried at
amortised cost using the effective interest method. To the extent that a loan is uncollectable, it is written off as impaired. Subsequent recoveries
are credited to profit or loss.

instruments include financial

Derivative financial instruments
instruments that derive their value from underlying equity instruments. Group derivative
Derivative financial
transactions, while providing effective economic hedges under the Group’s risk management positions, do not qualify for hedge accounting
under the specific IFRS rules and are therefore treated as derivatives held for trading. All derivatives are initially recognised in the statement of
financial position at their fair value, which usually represents their cost, including any premium paid. They are subsequently remeasured at their
fair value with changes in the fair value recognised immediately in net investment return. All derivatives are carried as assets when the fair
values are positive and as liabilities when the fair values are negative.

The notional or contractual amounts associated with derivative financial instruments are not recorded as assets or liabilities on the statement of
financial position as they do not represent the fair value of these transactions. Collateral pledged by way of cash margins on futures contracts is
recognised as an asset on the statement of financial position within cash and cash equivalents.

Deferred acquisition costs
General insurance business
For general insurance business, a proportion of commission and other acquisition costs relating to unearned premiums is carried forward as
deferred acquisition costs or, with regard to reinsurance outwards, as deferred income. Deferred acquisition costs are amortised over the period
in which the related revenues are earned. The reinsurers’ share of deferred acquisition costs is amortised in the same manner as the underlying
asset.

Long-term business
For insurance contracts, acquisition costs comprise direct costs such as initial commission and the indirect costs of obtaining and processing
new business. Acquisition costs which are incurred during a financial year are deferred and amortised over the period during which the costs
are expected to be recoverable, if applicable.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents include cash in hand, deposits held at call with banks, other short-term highly liquid investments with original
maturities of three months or less and bank overdrafts.

Insurance broking debtors and creditors
Where the Group acts as an agent in placing the insurable risks of clients with insurers, debtors arising from such transactions are not included
within the Group's assets. When the Group receives cash in respect of resultant premiums or claims, a corresponding liability is established in
other creditors in favour of the insurer or client. Where the Group provides premium finance facilities to clients, amounts due are included within
other debtors, with the amount owing for onward transmission included in other creditors.

130   

Section 4  Financial StatementsLeases
Leases, where a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership is retained by the lessor, are classified as operating leases. Payments
made as lessees under operating leases are charged to profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease. Rental income
received as a lessor under operating leases is credited to profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease.

Leases, where a significant portion of the risks and rewards of ownership is transferred to the Group, are classified as finance leases. Assets
obtained under finance lease contracts are capitalised as property, plant and equipment and are depreciated over the period of the lease.
Obligations under such agreements are included within liabilities net of finance charges allocated to future periods. The interest element of the
lease payments is charged to profit or loss over the period of the lease. Assets held under finance leases are not significant to these financial
statements.

Provisions and contingent liabilities
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation, as a result of past events, and it is probable that an
outflow of resources, embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation, and a reliable estimate of the amount of the
obligation can be made. Where the Group expects a provision to be reimbursed, the reimbursement is recognised as a separate asset, but only
when the reimbursement is more probable than not.

The Group recognises a provision for onerous contracts when the expected benefits to be derived from a contract are less than the unavoidable
costs of meeting the obligations under the contract.

Contingent liabilities are disclosed if there is a possible future obligation as a result of a past event, or if there is a present obligation but either
an outflow of resources is not probable or the amount cannot be reliably estimated. 

Employee benefits
Pension obligations
The Group operates a number of defined benefit and defined contribution plans, the assets of which are held in separate trustee-administered
funds.

For defined benefit plans, the pension costs are assessed using the projected unit credit method. Under this method, the cost of providing
pensions is charged to profit or loss so as to spread the regular cost over the service lives of employees, in accordance with the advice of
qualified actuaries. The pension obligation is measured as the present value of the estimated future cash outflows using a discount rate based
on market yields for high-quality corporate bonds. The resulting pension plan surplus or deficit appears as an asset or obligation in the
statement of financial position. Any asset resulting from this calculation is limited to past service cost, plus the present value of available
refunds and reductions in future employer contributions to the plan.

In accordance with IAS 19, Employee Benefits , current and past service costs, gains and losses on curtailments and settlements and net
interest expense or income (calculated by applying a discount rate to the net defined benefit liability or asset) are recognised through profit or
loss. Actuarial gains or losses are recognised in full in the period in which they occur in other comprehensive income. 

Contributions in respect of defined contribution plans are recognised as a charge to profit or loss as incurred.

Other post-employment obligations
Some Group companies provide post-employment medical benefits to their retirees. The expected costs of these benefits are accrued over the
period of employment using an accounting methodology similar to that for defined benefit pension plans. Actuarial gains and losses are
recognised immediately in other comprehensive income. Independent qualified actuaries value these obligations annually.

Other benefits
Employee entitlements to annual leave and long service leave are recognised when they accrue to employees. A provision is made for the
estimated liability for annual leave and long service leave as a result of services rendered by employees up to the year end date.

Taxation
Income tax comprises current and deferred tax. Income tax is recognised in the statement of profit or loss except to the extent that it relates to
items recognised in other comprehensive income, in which case it is recognised in the statement of comprehensive income.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable result for the period and any adjustment to the tax payable in respect of previous periods. 

Deferred tax is provided in full on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes
and the amounts used for tax purposes. Deferred tax is measured using tax rates expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is
realised or the deferred tax liability is settled based on tax rates and laws which have been enacted or substantively enacted at the year end
date.

131   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
1 Accounting policies (continued)

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which the temporary
differences can be utilised.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not discounted.

Appropriations
Dividends
Dividends on Ordinary shares are recognised in equity in the period in which they are declared and, for the final dividend, approved by
shareholders. Dividends on Irredeemable Preference shares are recognised in the period in which they are declared and appropriately approved.

Charitable grant to ultimate parent undertaking
Payments are made via Gift Aid to the ultimate parent company, Allchurches Trust Limited, a registered charity. The Group does not regard
these payments as being expenses of the business and, as such, recognises them net of tax in equity in the period in which they are approved.

Assets held for sale
Assets classified as held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell.

Assets are classified as held for sale if their carrying amount will be recovered through a sale transaction rather than through continuing use.
This condition is regarded as met only when the sale is highly probable and expected to qualify for recognition as a completed sale within one
year from the date of classification.

132   

Section 4  Financial Statements2 Critical accounting estimates and judgements in applying accounting policies

The Group makes estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year. Estimates
and judgements are regularly reviewed and based on historical experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are
believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. 

(a) The ultimate liability arising from claims made under general business insurance contracts
The estimation of the ultimate liability arising from claims made under general business insurance contracts is a critical accounting estimate.
There is uncertainty as to the total number of claims made on each class of business, the amounts that such claims will be settled for and the
timings of any payments. There are various sources of uncertainty as to how much the Group will ultimately pay with respect to such contracts.
Such uncertainty includes:

-  whether a claim event has occurred or not and how much it will ultimately settle for; 
-  variability in the speed with which claims are notified and in the time taken to settle them, especially complex cases resolved through the

courts;

-  changes in the business portfolio affecting factors such as the number of claims and their typical settlement costs, which may differ

significantly from past patterns;
new types of claim, including latent claims, which arise from time to time; 

- 
-  changes in legislation and court attitudes to compensation, which may apply retrospectively;
-  the way in which certain reinsurance contracts (principally liability) will be interpreted in relation to unusual/latent claims where aggregation

of claimants and exposure over time are issues; and

-  whether all such reinsurances will remain in force over the long term.

The uncertainties surrounding the estimates of claims payments for the various classes of business are discussed further in note 3, and where
discount rates have been applied these are disclosed in note 27. General business insurance liabilities include a margin for risk and uncertainty
in addition to the best estimates for future claims. The sensitivity of profit or loss to changes in the ultimate settlement cost of claims reserves is
presented in note 27.

(b) Estimate of future benefit payments arising from long-term insurance contracts
The determination of the liabilities under long-term insurance contracts is dependent on estimates made by the Group.

Estimates are made as to the expected number of deaths for each of the years in which the Group is exposed to risk. The Group bases these
estimates on standard industry and national mortality tables that reflect recent historical mortality experience, with allowance also being made
for expected future mortality improvements where prudent. The estimated mortality rates profile provisions for forecast benefit payments net of
forecast premium receipts.

Estimates are also made as to future investment returns arising from the assets backing long-term insurance contracts. These estimates are
based on current market returns as well as expectations about future economic and financial developments.

In addition to the best estimates of future deaths, inflation, investment returns and administration expenses, margins for risk and uncertainty are
added to these assumptions in calculating the liabilities of long-term insurance contracts. The sensitivity of profit or loss to changes in the key
assumptions is presented in note 27.

(c) Pension and other post-employment benefits
The cost of these benefits and the present value of the pension and other post-employment benefit liabilities depend on factors that are
determined on an actuarial basis using a number of assumptions. The assumptions used in determining the charge to profit or loss for these
benefits include the discount rate and, in the case of the post-employment medical benefits, expected medical expense inflation. Any changes
in these assumptions will impact profit or loss and may affect planned funding of the pension plans. The Group determines an appropriate
discount rate at the end of each year, to be used to determine the present value of estimated future cash outflows expected to be required to
settle the pension and other post-employment benefit obligations. 

In determining the appropriate discount rate, the Group considers interest rates of high-quality corporate bonds that are denominated in the
currency in which the benefits will be paid, and that have terms to maturity approximating the terms of the related pension liability. The
expected rate of medical expense inflation is determined by comparing the historical relationship of the actual medical expense increases with
the rate of inflation. Other key assumptions for the pension and post-employment benefit costs and credits are based in part on current market
conditions. 

Additional
assumptions is disclosed in note 18.

information including the sensitivity of pension and post-employment medical benefit scheme liabilities to changes in the key

133   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
2 Critical accounting estimates and judgements in applying accounting policies (continued)

(d) Goodwill
Goodwill is tested annually for impairment and carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. An impairment loss is recognised to the
extent that the carrying value of goodwill exceeds the recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is determined by estimating the value in
use of the business units to which the goodwill has been allocated. The value in use calculation requires the Group to make an estimation of
the future cash flows expected to arise from the business unit and a suitable discount rate to calculate present value. Details of the carrying
value of goodwill at the balance sheet date are shown in note 16.

(e) Carrying value of tax liabilities
Calculating tax liabilities requires management to make judgements in respect of the tax payable for current and prior periods based on the
interpretation of applicable tax legislation. In particular, the material deferred tax liability held by the Group primarily relates to future tax due on
unrealised gains in respect of equities held prior to 2002. Gains on these assets are only recognised for tax purposes when sold and an
estimate has to be made of the tax rate that would be applicable at the point of sale in order to determine the tax liability relating to the gain,
applying tax rates substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

134   

Section 4  Financial Statements3 Insurance risk

Through its general and life insurance operations, the Group is exposed to a number of risks, as summarised in the Risk Management section
of the Strategic Report. The risk under any one insurance contract is the possibility that the insured event occurs and the uncertainty of the
amount and timing of the resulting claim. Factors such as the business and product mix, the external environment including market competition
and reinsurance capacity all may vary from year to year, along with the actual frequency, severity and ultimate cost of claims and benefits. This
subjects the Group to underwriting and pricing risk (the risk of failing to ensure disciplined risk selection and achieve the required premium),
claims reserving risk (the risk of actual claims payments exceeding the amount we are holding in relation to our long-tail liability risks) and
reinsurance risk (the risk of failing to access and manage reinsurance capacity at a reasonable price).

(a) Risk mitigation
Experience shows that the larger and more diversified the portfolio of insurance contracts, the smaller the relative variability in the expected
outcome will be. The Group’s underwriting strategy is designed to ensure that the underwritten risks are well diversified in terms of type and
amount of risk and geographical spread. In all operations pricing controls are in place, underpinned by sound statistical analysis, market
expertise and appropriate external consultant advice. Gross and net underwriting exposure is protected through the use of a comprehensive
programme of reinsurance using both proportional and non-proportional reinsurance and supported by proactive claims handling. The overall
reinsurance structure is regularly reviewed and modelled to ensure that it remains optimum to our needs. The optimum reinsurance structure
long-term capacity to support our specialist business strategy. This
can best be described as the one that provides us with sustainable,
combines effective balance sheet protection at the same time as producing, over time, the required underwriting result and return on capital. 

Catastrophe protection is purchased following an extensive annual modelling exercise of our gross and net (of proportional reinsurance)
exposures. In conjunction with our reinsurance brokers we utilise the full range of proprietary catastrophe models, as well as continue to
develop bespoke modelling options that better reflect the specialist nature of our portfolio. Reinsurance is arranged to cover up to a 1/250 loss, 
which increases to a 1/500 loss where earthquake risk exists. 

(b) Concentrations of risk
The core business of the Group is general insurance, with the principal classes of business written being property and liability. The Group has
also underwritten a small portfolio of motor policies, but this class is in run-off following the decision in November 2012 to focus on the
principal classes. The accident class of business covers injury, death or incapacity as a result of an unforeseen event. The Group's whole-of-life
insurance policies support funeral planning products.

With reference to written premiums, the concentration of insurance risk for the financial year before and after reinsurance by territory in relation
to the type of risk accepted is summarised below.

2014

Group

Territory
United Kingdom

Australia

Canada

Ireland

Total

Parent

Territory
United Kingdom

Canada

Ireland

Total

Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross

Net

Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross

Net

Property
£000

172,097
90,053
22,638
(8,558)
27,918
19,691
7,265
4,453
229,918

105,639

172,097
90,053
27,918
19,691
7,265
4,453
207,280

114,197

General insurance
Liability
£000

Motor
£000

Accident
£000

Life insurance
Funeral plans
£000

51,710
46,017
15,532
13,300
11,447
10,562
4,185
3,770
82,874

73,649

51,710
46,017
11,447
10,562
4,185
3,770
67,342

60,349

183
(924)
763
757
 -
 -
 -
 -
946

(167)

183
(924)
 -
 -
 -
 -
183

(924)

13,664
13,197
1,150
1,105
 -
 -
78
75
14,892

14,377

13,664
13,197
 -
 -
78
75
13,742

13,272

167
167
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
167

167

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -

Total
£000

237,821
148,510
40,083
6,604
39,365
30,253
11,528
8,298
328,797

193,665

237,654
148,343
39,365
30,253
11,528
8,298
288,547

186,894

135   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
3 Insurance risk (continued)

2013

Group

Territory
United Kingdom

Australia

Canada

Ireland

Total

Parent

Territory
United Kingdom

Canada

Ireland

Total

Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross

Net

Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross
Net
Gross

Net

Property
£000

195,720
105,832
27,126
10,784
29,521
19,835
7,876
4,610
260,243

141,061

199,673
105,832
29,521
19,835
7,876
4,610
237,070

130,277

General insurance
Liability
£000

Motor
£000

Accident
£000

Life insurance
Funeral plans
£000

64,578
58,753
16,477
13,869
11,651
10,772
5,691
5,241
98,397

88,635

64,578
58,753
11,651
10,772
5,691
5,241
81,920

74,766

14,467
13,138
861
761
 -
 -
1
1
15,329

13,900

14,467
13,138
 -
 -
1
1
14,468

13,139

17,380
16,519
1,205
1,163
 -
 -
38
40
18,623

17,722

17,380
16,519
 -
 -
38
40
17,418

16,559

6,753
6,753
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
6,753

6,753

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

 -

Total
£000

298,898
200,995
45,669
26,577
41,172
30,607
13,606
9,892
399,345

268,071

296,098
194,242
41,172
30,607
13,606
9,892
350,876

234,741

(c) General insurance risks
Property classes
Property cover mainly compensates the policyholder for damage suffered to their properties or for the value of property lost. Property insurance
may also include cover for pecuniary loss through the inability to use damaged insured commercial properties.

For property insurance contracts, there can be variability in the nature, number and size of claims made in each period.

The nature of claims may include fire, business interruption, weather damage, subsidence, accidental damage to insured vehicles and theft.
Subsidence claims are difficult to predict because the damage is often not apparent for some time. Changes in soil moisture conditions can
give rise to changes in claim volumes over time. The ultimate settlements can be small or large with a greater risk of a settled claim being re-
opened at a later date.

The number of claims made can be affected by weather events, changes in climate and crime rates. Climate change may give rise to more
frequent and severe extreme weather events, such as river flooding, hurricanes and drought, and their consequences, for example, subsidence
claims. If a weather event happens near the end of the financial year then the uncertainty about ultimate claims cost in the financial statements
is much higher because there is insufficient time for adequate data to be received to assess the final cost of claims.

Individual claims can vary in amount since the risks insured are diverse in both size and nature. The cost of repairing property varies according
to the extent of damage, cost of materials and labour charges. 

Contracts are underwritten on a reinstatement basis or repair and renovation basis as appropriate. Costs of rebuilding properties, of
replacement or indemnity for contents and time taken to restart operations for business interruption are the key factors that influence the level
of claims. Individual large claims are more likely to arise from fire, storm or flood damage. The greatest likelihood of an aggregation of claims
arises from earthquake, weather or fire events.

Claims payment, on average, occurs within a year of the event that gives rise to the claim. However, there is variability around this average with
larger claims typically taking longer to settle.

136   

Section 4  Financial StatementsLiability classes
The main exposures are in respect of liability insurance contracts which protect policyholders from the liability to compensate injured
employees (employers' liability) and third parties (public liability).

Claims that may arise from the liability portfolios include damage to property, physical injury, disease and psychological trauma. The Group has
a different exposure profile to most other commercial lines insurance companies as it has lower exposure to industrial risks. Therefore, claims
for industrial diseases are less common for the Group than injury claims such as slips, trips and back injuries.

The frequency and severity of claims arising on liability insurance contracts, including the liability element of motor contracts, can be affected by
several factors. Most significant are the increasing level of awards for damages suffered, the courts’ move to periodic payments awards and the
increase in the number of cases that have been latent for a long period of time. 

The severity of bodily injury claims is highly influenced by the value of loss of earnings and the future cost of care. The settlement value of
claims arising under public and employers' liability is particularly difficult to predict. There is uncertainty as to whether any payments will be
made and, if they are, the amount and timing of the payments. Key factors driving the high levels of uncertainty include the late notification of
possible claim events and the legal process.

Late notification of possible claims necessitates the holding of provisions for incurred claims that may only emerge some years into the future.
In particular the effect of inflation over such a long period can be considerable and is uncertain. A lack of comparable past experience makes it
difficult to quantify the number of claims and, for certain types of claims, the amounts for which they will ultimately settle. The legal and
legislative framework continues to develop which has a consequent impact on the uncertainty as to the length of the claims settlement process
and the ultimate settlement amounts.

Claims payment, on average, occurs about three to four years after the event that gives rise to the claim. However, there is significant variability
around this average.

Provisions for latent claims
The public and employers’ liability classes can give rise to very late reported claims, which are often referred to as latent claims. These can vary
in nature and are difficult to predict. They typically emerge slowly over many years. The Group has reflected this uncertainty and believes that it
holds adequate reserves for latent claims that may result from exposure periods up to the reporting date.

Note 27 presents the development of the estimate of ultimate claim cost for public and employers' liability claims occurring in a given year. This
gives an indication of the accuracy of the estimation technique for incurred claims.

(d) Life insurance risks
The Group provides whole-of-life insurance policies to support funeral planning products, for most of which the future benefits are linked to
inflation and backed by index-linked assets. The risk that actual claims payments exceed the carrying amount of the insurance liabilities may
occur if the timing of claims is different from assumed. 

Uncertainty in the estimation of the timing of future claims arises from the unpredictability of long-term changes in overall levels of mortality.
The Group bases these estimates on standard industry and national mortality tables. The most significant factors that could alter the expected
mortality rates profile are epidemics, widespread changes in lifestyle and continued improvement in medical science and social conditions. The
primary risk on these contracts is the level of future investment returns on the assets backing the liabilities over the life of the policyholders. The
interest rate and inflation risk within this has been largely mitigated by holding index-linked assets of a similar term to the expected liabilities
profile. The main residual risk is the spread risk attaching to corporate bonds held to match the liabilities. The small mortality risk is retained by
the Group and directly impacts shareholders' equity.

137   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

4 Financial risk and capital management

The Group is exposed to financial risk through its financial assets, financial liabilities, reinsurance assets and insurance liabilities. In particular
the key financial risk is that the proceeds from its financial assets are not sufficient to fund the obligations arising from its insurance contracts.
The most important components of financial risk are interest rate risk, credit risk, currency risk and equity price risk.

There has been no change from the prior period in the nature of the financial risks to which the Group is exposed. The Group's management
and measurement of financial risks is informed by either stochastic modelling or stress testing techniques.

(a) Categories of financial instruments

Group

At 31 December 2014
Financial investments
Other assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Assets classified as held for sale
Other liabilities
Net other
Total

At 31 December 2013
Financial investments
Other assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other liabilities
Net other
Total

Parent

At 31 December 2014
Financial investments
Other assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other liabilities
Net other
Total

At 31 December 2013
Financial investments
Other assets
Cash and cash equivalents
Other liabilities
Net other
Total

Financial assets

Designated
at fair value
£000

Loans and
Held for
trading receivables*
£000

£000

Financial
liabilities**
£000

Other assets
and liabilities
£000

886,170
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
886,170

938,383
 -
 -
 -
 -
938,383

664,349
 -
 -
 -
 -
664,349

713,989
 -
 -
 -
 -
713,989

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

158
 -
 -
 -
 -
158

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

158
 -
 -
 -
 -
158

16
116,485
107,526
***6,204
 -
 -
230,231

***7,911
121,411
107,241
 -
 -
236,563

14
99,652
77,774
 -
 -
177,440

14
105,606
80,430
 -
 -
186,050

 -
 -
 -
 -
(40,338)
 -
(40,338)

 -
 -
 -
(31,571)
 -
(31,571)

 -
 -
 -
(23,885)
 -
(23,885)

 -
 -
 -
(19,646)
 -
(19,646)

Total
£000

886,186
119,394
107,526
6,204
(44,615)
(580,062)
494,633

946,452
124,464
107,241
(37,968)
(646,046)
494,143

 -
2,909
 -
 -
(4,277)
(580,062)
(581,430)

 -
3,053
 -
(6,397)
(646,046)
(649,390)

50,065
2,587
 -
(3,262)
(446,922)
(397,532)

714,428
102,239
77,774
(27,147)
(446,922)
420,372

49,765
2,665
 -
(5,366)
(499,321)
(452,257)

763,926
108,271
80,430
(25,012)
(499,321)
428,294

* Cash and cash equivalents have been presented with loans and receivables. 

** Financial liabilities are held at amortised cost.

*** In the prior year financial investments included mortgages secured on residential property which are classified as held for sale in
the current year. See note 25 for details. 

138   

Section 4  Financial Statements(b) Fair value hierarchy
The fair value measurement basis used to value those financial assets and financial liabilities held at fair value is categorised into a fair value
hierarchy as follows:

Level 1: fair values measured using quoted bid prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities. This category includes
listed equities in active markets, listed debt securities in active markets and exchange-traded derivatives.

Level 2: fair values measured using inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either
directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices). This category includes listed debt or equity securities in a market that is not active
and derivatives that are not exchange-traded.

Level 3: fair values measured using inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). This
category includes unlisted debt and equities, including investments in venture capital, and suspended securities. Where a look-through valuation
approach is applied, underlying net asset values are sourced from the investee and adjusted to reflect illiquidity where appropriate, with the fair
values disclosed being directly sensitive to this input.

There have been no transfers between investment categories in the current year.

Analysis of fair value measurement bases

Group

At 31 December 2014
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Financial investments
   Equity securities
   Debt securities
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

At 31 December 2013
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Financial investments
   Equity securities
   Debt securities
   Derivatives
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

Parent

At 31 December 2014
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Financial investments
   Equity securities
   Debt securities
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

At 31 December 2013
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
Financial investments
   Equity securities
   Debt securities
   Derivatives
Total financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

Fair value measurement at the
end of the reporting period based on
Level 1
£000

Level 2
£000

Level 3
£000

Total
£000

269,347
591,542
860,889

209
4,485
4,694

20,349
238
20,587

289,905
596,265
886,170

276,660
636,330
 -
912,990

270
5,416
158
5,844

19,390
317
 -
19,707

296,320
642,063
158
938,541

239,419
403,099
642,518

209
1,036
1,245

20,348
238
20,586

259,976
404,373
664,349

246,756
446,067
 -
692,823

270
1,193
158
1,621

19,386
317
 -
19,703

266,412
447,577
158
714,147

139   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
4 Financial risk and capital management (continued)

Fair value measurements based on level 3
Fair value measurements in level 3 for both the Group and Parent consist of financial assets, analysed as follows:

Group

At 31 December 2014
Opening balance
Total gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss
Closing balance
Total gains/(losses) for the period included in profit or loss for assets
held at the end of the reporting period

At 31 December 2013
Opening balance
Total gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss
Disposal proceeds
Closing balance
Total gains/(losses) for the period included in profit or loss for assets
held at the end of the reporting period

Parent

At 31 December 2014
Opening balance
Total gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss
Closing balance
Total gains/(losses) for the period included in profit or loss for assets
held at the end of the reporting period

At 31 December 2013
Opening balance
Total gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss
Disposal proceeds
Closing balance
Total gains/(losses) for the period included in profit or loss for assets
held at the end of the reporting period

Financial assets at fair value
through profit and loss

Equity
securities
£000

Debt
securities
£000

19,390
959
20,349

959

18,558
832
 -
19,390

317
(79)
238

(79)

6,176
(5,782)
(77)
317

Total
£000

19,707
880
20,587

880

24,734
(4,950)
(77)
19,707

832

(5,782)

(4,950)

19,386
962
20,348

962

18,514
872
 -
19,386

317
(79)
238

(79)

5,703
(5,309)
(77)
317

19,703
883
20,586

883

24,217
(4,437)
(77)
19,703

872

(5,309)

(4,437)

All the above gains or losses included in profit or loss for the period (for both the Group and Parent) are presented in net investment
return within the statement of profit or loss. 

140   

Section 4  Financial StatementsThe valuation techniques used for instruments categorised in levels 2 and 3 are described below.

Listed debt and equity securities not in active market (level 2)
These financial assets are valued using third-party pricing information that
management's knowledge of the markets. Where material, these valuations are reviewed by the Group Audit Committee.

is regularly reviewed and internally calibrated based on

Non exchange-traded derivative contracts (level 2)
The Group's derivative contracts are not traded in active markets. Foreign currency forward contracts are valued using observable forward
exchange rates and interest rates corresponding to the maturity of the contract. Over-the-counter equity or index options and futures are valued
by reference to observable index prices. 

Unlisted equity securities (level 3)
These financial assets are valued using observable net asset data, adjusted for unobservable inputs including comparable price-to-book ratios
based on similar listed companies, and management's consideration of constituents as to what exit price might be obtainable. Where material,
these valuations are reviewed by the Group Audit Committee.

The valuation is most sensitive to the level of underlying net assets, the euro exchange rate, the price-to-book ratio chosen and an illiquidity
discount applied to the valuation to account for the risks associated with holding the asset. If the price-to-book ratio and illiquidity discount
applied changes by +/- 10% the value of unlisted equity securities could move by +/- £3m.

The increase in value during the year is the result of an increase in underlying net assets, partially offset by the movement in the euro exchange
rate from the previous year end.

Unlisted debt (level 3)
Unlisted debt is valued using an adjusted net asset method whereby management uses a look-through approach to the underlying assets
supporting the loan, discounted using observable market interest rates of similar loans with similar risk, and allowing for unobservable future
transaction costs. Where material, these valuations are reviewed by the Group Audit Committee.

The valuation is most sensitive to the level of underlying net assets but it is also sensitive to the interest rate used for discounting and the
projected date of disposal of the asset, with the exit costs sensitive to an expected return on capital of any purchaser and estimated transaction
costs. Reasonably likely changes in unobservable inputs used in the valuation would not have a significant impact on shareholders' equity or the
net result. 

The decrease in value during the year is primarily the result of increased uncertainty regarding the recoverability of the value of an asset.

141   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
4 Financial risk and capital management (continued)

(c) Interest rate risk
The Group’s exposure to interest rate risk arises primarily from movements on financial investments that are measured at fair value and have
fixed interest rates, which represent a significant proportion of the Group’s assets, and from those insurance liabilities for which discounting is
applied at a market interest rate. Investment strategy is set in order to control the impact of interest rate risk on anticipated Group cash flows
and asset and liability values. The fair value of the Group's investment portfolio of fixed income securities reduces as market interest rates rise
as does the present value of discounted insurance liabilities, and vice versa.

Interest rate risk concentration is reduced by adopting asset-liability duration matching principles where appropriate. Excluding assets held to
back the long-term business, the average duration of the Group’s fixed income portfolio is two years (2013: two years), reflecting the relatively
short-term average duration of its general insurance liabilities. The mean term of discounted general insurance liabilities is disclosed in note 27
(a) part (iv).

For the Group’s long-term insurance funeral plan business, benefits payable to policyholders are independent of the returns generated by
interest-bearing assets. Therefore the interest rate risk on the invested assets supporting these liabilities is borne by the Group. This risk can be
mitigated by purchasing fixed interest investments with durations that precisely match the profile of the liabilities. For funeral plan policies,
benefits are linked to the Retail Prices Index (RPI). Assets backing these liabilities are also linked to the RPI, and include index-linked gilts and
corporate bonds. For practical purposes it is not possible to exactly match the durations due to the uncertain profile of liabilities (e.g. mortality
risk) and the availability of suitable assets, therefore some interest rate risk will persist. The Group monitors its exposure by comparing
projected cash flows for these assets and liabilities and making appropriate adjustments to its investment portfolio.

The table below summarises the maturities of long-term business assets and liabilities that are exposed to interest rate risk.

Group long-term business

At 31 December 2014
Assets
Debt securities
Cash and cash equivalents

Liabilities
Long-term business provision

At 31 December 2013
Assets
Debt securities
Cash and cash equivalents

Liabilities
Long-term business provision

Within
1 year
£000

1,053
1,924
2,977

Maturity
Between
1 & 5 years
£000

After
5 years
£000

Total
£000

24,311
 -
24,311

79,490
 -
79,490

104,854
1,924
106,778

6,014

21,816

66,494

94,324

1,104
2,214
3,318

27,024
 -
27,024

73,075
 -
73,075

101,203
2,214
103,417

6,125

22,200

64,121

92,446

Group financial investments with variable interest rates, including cash and cash equivalents, insurance instalment receivables and mortgage
loans are subject to cash flow interest rate risk. This risk is not significant to the Group.

142   

Section 4  Financial Statements(d) Credit risk
The Group has exposure to credit risk, which is the risk of non-payment of their obligations by counterparties and financial markets borrowers.
Areas where the Group is exposed to credit risk are:

- 

- 

- 

- 

reinsurers’ share of insurance liabilities (excluding provision for unearned premiums) and amounts due from reinsurers in respect of
claims already paid;

deposits held with banks;

amounts due from insurance intermediaries and policyholders; and

counterparty default on loans and debt securities.

The carrying amount of financial and reinsurance assets represents the Group's maximum exposure to credit risk. The Group structures the
levels of credit risk it accepts by placing limits on its exposure to a single counterparty. Limits on the level of credit risk are regularly reviewed.

Reinsurance is used to manage insurance risk. This does not, however, discharge the Group's liability as primary insurer. If a reinsurer fails to
pay a claim for any reason, the Group remains liable for the payment to the policyholder. The creditworthiness of reinsurers is considered on a
regular basis through the year by reviewing their financial strength. The Group Reinsurance Security Committee assesses, monitors and
approves the creditworthiness of all reinsurers, reviewing relevant credit ratings provided by the recognised credit rating agencies, as well as
other publicly available data and market information. The Committee also monitors the balances outstanding from reinsurers and maintains an
approved list of reinsurers. 

There has been no significant change in the recoverability of the Group’s reinsurance balances during the year with all reinsurers on the 2014
reinsurance programme having a minimum rating of 'A-' from Standard & Poor’s or an equivalent agency at the time of purchase, with the
exception of MAPFRE RE whose rating was adversely impacted by the sovereign rating of Spain. However, MAPFRE RE was upgraded by
Standard & Poor’s to 'A-' in February 2014 and then to 'A' in May 2014 with a stable outlook.

Group cash balances are regularly reviewed to identify the quality of the counterparty bank and to monitor and limit concentrations of risk.

The Group's credit risk policy details prescriptive methods for the collection of premiums and control of intermediary and policyholder debtor
balances. The level and age of debtor balances are regularly assessed via monthly credit management reports. These reports are scrutinised to
assess exposure in more than one region in respect of aged or outstanding balances. Any such balances are likely to be major international
brokers who are in turn monitored via credit reference agencies and considered to pose minimal risk of default. The Group has no material
concentration of credit risk in respect of amounts due from insurance intermediaries and policyholders due to the well-diversified spread of
such debtors.

is held over loans secured by mortgages. The debt securities portfolio consists of a range of mainly fixed interest instruments
Collateral
local authority issues, corporate loans and bonds, overseas bonds, preference shares and other interest-
including government securities,
bearing securities. Limits are imposed on the credit ratings of the corporate bond portfolio and exposures regularly monitored. Group
investments in unlisted securities represent less than 1% of this category in the current and prior year. The Group’s exposure to counterparty
default on debt securities is spread across a variety of geographical and economic territories, as follows:

2014

2013

Group
£000

424,480
87,037
60,162
24,586
596,265

Parent
£000

319,625
 -
60,162
24,586
404,373

UK
Australia
Canada
Europe
Total

Group
£000

463,879
93,283
58,629
26,272
642,063

Parent
£000

362,676
 -
58,629
26,272
447,577

UK
Australia
Canada
Europe
Total

143   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
4 Financial risk and capital management (continued)

(e) Liquidity risk
Liquidity risk is the risk that funds may not be available to pay obligations when due. The Group is exposed to daily calls on its available cash
resources mainly from claims arising from insurance contracts. An estimate of the timing of the net cash outflows resulting from insurance
contracts is provided in note 27. The Group has robust processes in place to manage liquidity risk and has available cash balances, other
readily marketable assets and access to funding in case of exceptional need. This is not considered to be a significant risk to the Group.

Non-derivative financial liabilities consist of finance leases, which are not material to the Group, and other liabilities for which a maturity analysis
is included in note 30.

(f) Currency risk
The Group operates internationally and its main exposures to foreign exchange risk are noted below. The Group's foreign operations generally
invest in assets and purchase reinsurance denominated in the same currencies as their insurance liabilities, which mitigates the foreign
currency exchange rate risk for these operations. As a result, foreign exchange risk arises from recognised assets and liabilities denominated in
other currencies and net investments in foreign operations. The Group mitigates this risk through the use of derivatives from time to time.

The Group exposure to foreign currency risk within the investment portfolios arises from purchased investments that are denominated in
currencies other than sterling.

The Group's foreign operations create two sources of foreign currency risk:

- 

the operating results of the Group's foreign branches and subsidiaries in the Group financial statements are translated at the average
exchange rates prevailing during the period; and

- 

the equity investment in foreign branches and subsidiaries is translated into sterling using the exchange rate at the year end date.

The largest currency exposures with reference to net assets/liabilities are shown below, representing effective diversification of resources.

2014

2013

Aus $
Can $
Euro
NZ $
Japanese Yen

Group
£000

45,571
34,757
14,625
10,969
1,047

Parent
£000

2,614
34,757
14,625
10,969
1,047

Aus $
Can $
Euro
US $
Japanese Yen

Group
£000

43,053
33,044
12,828
1,479
1,130

Parent
£000

2,747
33,044
12,819
1,479
1,130

(g) Equity price risk
The Group is exposed to equity price risk because of financial investments held by the Group which are stated at fair value through profit or
loss. The Group mitigates this risk by holding a diversified portfolio across geographical regions and market sectors, and through the use of
derivative contracts from time to time which would limit losses in the event of a fall in equity markets.

The concentration of equity price risk by geographical listing, before the mitigating effect of derivatives, to which the Group and Parent are
exposed is as follows:

2014

2013

Group
£000

264,716
20,442
2,583
1,950
214
289,905

Parent
£000

234,787
20,442
2,583
1,950
214
259,976

UK
Europe
Canada
US
Other
Total

Group
£000

273,650
19,393
1,909
979
389
296,320

Parent
£000

243,742
19,393
1,909
979
389
266,412

UK
Europe
Canada
US
Other
Total

144   

Section 4  Financial Statements(h) Market risk sensitivity analysis
The sensitivity of profit and other equity reserves to movements on market risk variables (comprising interest rate, currency and equity price
risk), each considered in isolation, is shown in the following table:

Group

Variable

Interest rate risk

Currency risk

Equity price risk

Parent

Variable

Interest rate risk

Currency risk

Equity price risk

Change in
variable

-100 basis points
+100 basis points
-5%
+5%
+/- 5%

Change in
variable

-100 basis points
+100 basis points
-5%
+5%
+/- 5%

Potential increase/
(decrease) in profit

2014
£000

(4,284)
1,243
1,388
(1,318)
11,379

2013
£000

(254)
(4,769)
811
(770)
11,371

Potential increase/
(decrease) in profit

2014
£000

(1,583)
299
1,388
(1,318)
10,204

2013
£000

1,269
(2,174)
811
(770)
10,224

Potential increase/
(decrease) in
other equity reserves

2014
£000

(15)
18
3,794
(3,605)
 -

2013
£000

(121)
131
3,513
(3,337)
 -

Potential increase/
(decrease) in
other equity reserves

2014
£000

 -
5
1,533
(1,457)
 -

2013
£000

(88)
85
1,391
(1,321)
 -

The following assumptions have been made in preparing the above sensitivity analysis:

- 

the value of fixed income investments will vary inversely with changes in interest rates, and all territories experience the same interest
rate movement;

- 

currency gains and losses will arise from a change in the value of sterling against all other currencies moving in parallel;

-  equity prices will move by the same percentage across all territories; and

- 

change in profit is stated net of tax at the standard rate applicable in each of the Group's territories.

(i) Capital management
The Group's primary objectives when managing capital are to:

- 

- 

comply with the regulators' capital requirements of the markets in which the Group operates; and

safeguard the Group's ability to continue to meet stakeholders' expectations in accordance with its corporate mission, vision and values.

The Group is subject to insurance solvency regulations in all the territories in which it issues insurance and investment contracts, and capital is
managed and evaluated on the basis of regulatory capital.

In the UK, the Group and its UK regulated entities are required to comply with rules issued by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) and the
Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA), and submit PRA returns detailing levels of regulatory capital held. Regulatory capital should be in excess
of the higher of two amounts. The first is an amount which is calculated by applying fixed percentages to premiums and claims (general
insurance business) or by applying fixed percentages to insurance liabilities and applying stress testing (long-term business). The second is an
economic capital assessment by the regulated entity, which the PRA reviews and may amend by issuing Individual Capital Guidance. The Group
sets internal capital standards above the PRA's minimum requirement. For overseas business the relevant capital requirement is the minimum
requirement under the local regulatory regime. Both the Group and the regulated entities within it have complied with all externally imposed
capital requirements throughout the current and prior year.

Regulated subsidiaries are restricted in the amount of cash dividends they transfer to the parent entity in order for them to meet their individual
minimum capital requirements. The Group's total available capital resources are disclosed in note 27 (b).

145   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

5 Segment information

(a) Operating segments
The Group segments its business activities on the basis of differences in the products and services offered and, for general insurance, the
underwriting territory. This reflects the management and internal Group reporting structure. Group activities that are not reportable operating
segments on the basis of size are included within an 'Other activities' category.

The activities of each operating segment are described below.

- General business

United Kingdom
The Group's principal general insurance business operation is in the UK, where it operates under the Ecclesiastical and Ansvar brands.

Australia
The Group has a wholly-owned subsidiary in Australia underwriting general insurance business under the Ansvar brand.

Canada
The Group operates a general insurance Ecclesiastical branch in Canada.

Ireland
The Group operates an Ecclesiastical branch in the Republic of Ireland underwriting general business across the whole of Ireland.

Central operations
This includes the Group's internal reinsurance function, corporate underwriting costs, adverse development cover sold to ACS (NZ)
Limited  and operations that are in run-off or not reportable due to their immateriality.

-  Investment management

The Group provides investment management services both internally and to third parties through Ecclesiastical Investment Management
Limited. 

-  Broking and Advisory

The Group provides insurance broking through South Essex Insurance Brokers Limited and financial advisory services through
Ecclesiastical Financial Advisory Services Limited. 

-  Life business

Ecclesiastical Life Limited provides long-term insurance policies to support funeral planning products. It is closed to new business.

-  Other activities

This includes corporate costs relating to acquisition and disposal of businesses.

Inter-segment and inter-territory transfers or transactions are entered into under normal commercial terms and conditions that would also be
available to unrelated third parties.

146   

Section 4  Financial StatementsSegment revenue
The Group uses gross written premiums as the measure for turnover of the general and life insurance business segments. Turnover of the non-
insurance segments comprises fees and commissions earned in relation to services provided by the Group to third parties. Segment revenues
do not include net investment return or general business fee and commission income, which are reported within revenue in the consolidated
statement of profit or loss. 

Gross
written
premiums
£000

234,000
40,083
39,365
11,528
3,654
328,630
167
 -
 -
328,797

2014

Non-
insurance
services
£000

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
12,045
9,865
21,910

Total
£000

234,000
40,083
39,365
11,528
3,654
328,630
167
12,045
9,865
350,707

Gross
written
premiums
£000

291,338
45,669
41,172
13,606
807
392,592
6,753
 -
 -
399,345

2013

Non-
insurance
services
£000

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
10,535
8,031
18,566

Total
£000

291,338
45,669
41,172
13,606
807
392,592
6,753
10,535
8,031
417,911

General business
   United Kingdom
   Australia
   Canada
   Ireland
   Central operations
Total
Life business
Investment management
Broking and Advisory
Group revenue 

Group revenues are not materially concentrated on any single external customer.

Segment result
General business segment results comprise the insurance underwriting profit or loss,
investment activities and other expenses of each
underwriting territory. The Group uses the industry standard net combined operating ratio (COR) as a measure of underwriting efficiency. The
COR expresses the total of net claims costs, commission and underwriting expenses as a percentage of net earned premiums.

The life business segment result comprises the profit or loss on insurance contracts (including return on assets backing liabilities in the long-
term fund), shareholder investment return and other expenses. 

All other segment results consist of the profit or loss before tax measured in accordance with IFRS.

2014

General business
   United Kingdom
   Australia
   Canada
   Ireland
   Central operations

Life business
Investment management
Broking and Advisory
Other activities
Profit before tax

Combined
operating
ratio

94.1%
106.2%
94.2%
93.2%

95.9%

Insurance
£000

Investments
£000

9,765
(1,129)
1,662
594
(1,693)
9,199
(178)
 -
 -
 -
9,021

23,360
7,619
1,598
288
 -
32,865
1,522
3,164
 -
 -
37,551

Other
£000

70
(139)
 -
 -
 -
(69)
(4)
 -
2,071
(416)
1,582

Total
£000

33,195
6,351
3,260
882
(1,693)
41,995
1,340
3,164
2,071
(416)
48,154

147   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
5 Segment information (continued)

2013

General business
   United Kingdom
   Australia
   Canada
   Ireland
   Central operations

Life business
Investment management
Broking and Advisory
Other activities
Profit before tax

Combined
operating
ratio

95.3%
114.8%
104.0%
186.4%

102.9%

Insurance
£000

Investments
£000

9,815
(4,182)
(1,142)
(9,068)
(3,666)
(8,243)
367
 -
 -
 -
(7,876)

59,726
3,913
1,459
385
 -
65,483
6,627
1,728
 -
 -
73,838

Other
£000

(114)
(2)
 -
 -
 -
(116)
(5)
 -
1,689
(593)
975

Total
£000

69,427
(271)
317
(8,683)
(3,666)
57,124
6,989
1,728
1,689
(593)
66,937

(b) Geographical information
Gross written premiums from external customers and non-current assets, as attributed to individual countries in which the Group operates, are
as follows:

United Kingdom
Australia
Canada
Ireland

2014

2013

Gross
written
premiums
£000

237,821
40,083
39,365
11,528
328,797

Non-current
assets
£000

123,971
257
2,407
 -
126,635

Gross
written
premiums
£000

298,898
45,669
41,172
13,606
399,345

Non-current
assets
£000

73,329
918
1,338
74
75,659

Gross written premiums are allocated based on the country in which the insurance contracts are issued. Non-current assets exclude
rights arising under insurance contracts, deferred tax assets, pension assets and financial
instruments and are allocated based on
where the assets are located.

148   

Section 4  Financial Statements6 Net insurance premium revenue

For the year ended 31 December 2014
Gross written premiums
Outward reinsurance premiums
Net written premiums

Change in the gross provision for unearned premiums
Change in the provision for unearned premiums, reinsurers' share
Change in the net provision for unearned premiums

General
business
£000

Long-term
business
£000

328,630
(135,132)
193,498

23,651
7,527
31,178

167
 -
167

 -
 -
 -

Total
£000

328,797
(135,132)
193,665

23,651
7,527
31,178

Earned premiums, net of reinsurance

224,676

167

224,843

For the year ended 31 December 2013
Gross written premiums
Outward reinsurance premiums
Net written premiums

Change in the gross provision for unearned premiums
Change in the provision for unearned premiums, reinsurers' share
Change in the net provision for unearned premiums

392,592
(131,274)
261,318

27,205
(2,613)
24,592

6,753
 -
6,753

 -
 -
 -

399,345
(131,274)
268,071

27,205
(2,613)
24,592

Earned premiums, net of reinsurance

285,910

6,753

292,663

7 Net investment return

Income from financial assets at fair value through profit or loss
- equity income
- debt income
Income from financial assets not at fair value through profit or loss
- interest income on mortgages and other loans
- cash and cash equivalents income, net of exchange movements
- other income received
Other income
- rental income
Investment income
Fair value movements on financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss
Fair value movements on investment property
Net investment return

2014
£000

8,575
22,936

327
50
1,573

3,818
37,279
6,459
2,459
46,197

2013
£000

9,948
25,118

414
1,933
1,754

2,004
41,171
34,729
1,343
77,243

Included within cash and cash equivalents income are exchange losses of £1,346,000 (2013: £865,000 gains).

Included within fair value movements on financial instruments at fair value through profit or loss are £158,000 losses (2013: £7,813,000
losses) in respect of derivatives classified as held for trading.

149   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

8 Claims and change in insurance liabilities and reinsurance recoveries

For the year ended 31 December 2014
Gross claims paid
Gross change in the provision for claims
Gross change in long-term business provisions
Claims and change in insurance liabilities

Reinsurers' share of claims paid
Reinsurers' share of change in the provision for claims
Reinsurance recoveries

General
business
£000

Long-term
business
£000

188,263
(13)
 -
188,250

(43,034)
(19,272)
(62,306)

7,016
26
1,878
8,920

 -
 -
 -

Total
£000

195,279
13
1,878
197,170

(43,034)
(19,272)
(62,306)

Claims and change in insurance liabilities, net of reinsurance

125,944

8,920

134,864

For the year ended 31 December 2013
Gross claims paid
Gross change in the provision for claims
Gross change in long-term business provisions
Claims and change in insurance liabilities

Reinsurers' share of claims paid
Reinsurers' share of change in the provision for claims
Reinsurance recoveries

206,963
20,526
 -
227,489

(38,888)
2,343
(36,545)

7,854
(44)
(510)
7,300

 -
 -
 -

214,817
20,482
(510)
234,789

(38,888)
2,343
(36,545)

Claims and change in insurance liabilities, net of reinsurance

190,944

7,300

198,244

9 Fees, commissions and other acquisition costs

Fees paid
Commission paid
Change in deferred acquisition costs
Other acquisition costs
Fees, commissions and other acquisition costs

2014
£000

533
51,886
3,327
15,067
70,813

2013
£000

404
62,744
(1,075)
18,212
80,285

150   

Section 4  Financial Statements10 Profit for the year

Profit for the year has been arrived at after charging/(crediting)
Net foreign exchange losses/(gains)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
(Profit)/loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Amortisation of intangible assets
Increase in fair value of investment property
Employee benefits expense including termination benefits
Operating lease rentals

11 Auditor's remuneration

Fees payable to the Company's auditor for the audit of the Company's annual accounts

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for other services:
- The audit of the Company's subsidiaries
Total audit fees

- Audit-related assurance services
- Other assurance services
- Taxation advisory services
Total non-audit fees

Total auditor's remuneration

2014
£000

1,346
1,638
(32)
1,684
(2,459)
62,683
3,576

2014
£000

247

102
349

84
6
 -
90

439

2013
£000

(865)
1,930
112
2,706
(1,343)
64,271
3,671

2013
£000

242

113
355

88
6
9
103

458

Amounts disclosed are net of services taxes, where applicable. Audit-related assurance services include Prudential Regulatory Authority
and other regulatory audit work. 

Fees payable to the Company's auditor in respect of the audit of the Group's associated pension plans amounted to £15,000 (2013:
£15,000). 

151   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

12 Employee information

The average monthly number of employees of the Group, including Executive Directors, during the year by geographical location was: 

United Kingdom
Australia
Canada
Ireland

General
business
No.

2014
Long-term
business
No.

673
101
63
34
871

9
 -
 -
 -
9

Other
No.

108
 -
 -
 -
108

General
business
No.

732
110
60
22
924

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs - defined contribution plans
Pension costs - defined benefit plans
Other post-employment benefits

2013
Long-term
business
No.

9
 -
 -
 -
9

2014
£000

53,479
4,469
2,696
1,465
551
62,660

Other
No.

101
 -
 -
 -
101

2013
£000

50,814
4,192
2,577
1,648
783
60,014

The above figures do not include termination benefits of £23,000 (2013: £4,257,000). 

The remuneration of the Directors (including Non-Executive Directors), who are the key management personnel of the Group, is set out both
individually and in aggregate within the Group Remuneration Report in the Corporate Governance section of this report.

152   

Section 4  Financial Statements13 Tax expense

Current tax

Deferred tax

Total tax expense

- current year
- prior years
- temporary differences
- prior years
- reduction in tax rate

2014
£000

11,063
(3,716)
14
476
 -
7,837

2013
£000

5,192
(1,696)
6,466
(254)
(4,889)
4,819

Tax on the Group’s result before tax differs from the United Kingdom standard rate of corporation tax for the reasons set out in the following
reconciliation: 

Profit before tax

Tax calculated at the UK standard rate of tax of 21.5% (2013: 23.25%)

Factors affecting charge for the year:
Expenses not deductible for tax purposes
Non-taxable income
Life insurance and other tax paid at non-standard rates
Utilisation of tax losses for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised
Impact of reduction in deferred tax rate
Adjustments to tax charge in respect of prior periods
Total tax expense

2014
£000

48,154

10,353

(245)
(1,849)
424
(116)
 -
(730)
7,837

2013
£000

66,937

15,563

101
(3,340)
(389)
(277)
(4,889)
(1,950)
4,819

A deferred tax credit on fair value movements on owner-occupied property of £10,000 (2013: £52,000 credit) and tax relief on charitable
grants of £5,053,000 (2013: £930,000) are taken directly to equity.

A change in the UK standard rate of corporation tax from 23% to 21% became effective from 1 April 2014. Where appropriate, current tax has
been provided at the blended rate of 21.5%. A further reduction in the rate of corporation tax to 20% will become effective from April 2015.
Deferred tax has been provided at the rate of 20%.

14 Appropriations

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the period:

Dividends
Non-Cumulative Irredeemable Preference share dividend

Charitable grants
Gross charitable grants to the ultimate parent company, Allchurches Trust Limited
Tax relief
Net appropriation for the year

2014
£000

2013
£000

9,181

9,181

23,500
(5,053)
18,447

4,000
(930)
3,070

153   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

15 Acquisition of business

On 15 April 2014, South Essex Insurance Brokers Limited acquired the assets of Lansdown Insurance Brokers (hereafter referred to as
Lansdown). Lansdown is an insurance broker across a variety of classes of business, with a particular specialism in blocks of flats and
apartments and high net worth homes. Lansdown was acquired as part of the Group's strategy to identify new market sectors in which to grow,
either organically or through acquisition, and is included within the Broking and Advisory segment in note 5.

The amounts recognised in respect of the identifiable assets acquired are as set out in the table below.

Property, plant and equipment
Intangible assets
Total identifiable assets
Goodwill
Total consideration

Satisfied by:
Cash
Contingent consideration arrangement
Total consideration

£000

12
1,166
1,178
4,392
5,570

5,000
570
5,570

The net cash outflow arising on acquisition was £5,000,000.

The goodwill of £4,392,000 arising from the acquisition consists of intangible assets not qualifying for separate recognition, such as workforce,
synergies and new business opportunities. None of the goodwill is expected to be deductible for income tax purposes.

The fair value of the identifiable intangible assets of £1,166,000 consists of the value of customer relationships and brand acquired.

The contingent consideration arrangement requires £2,100,000 of retained commission income to be received for the twelve months to 15
April 2015, with the potential amount of the future payment that the Group could be required to make being between £nil and £1,000,000.

The fair value of the contingent consideration of £570,000 was estimated based on current commission forecasts, without discounting as the
payment is payable after exactly one year from the date of acquisition.

No material acquisition-related costs were incurred in relation to the transaction.

Lansdown contributed £1,046,000 revenue and £555,000 to the Group's profit before tax for the period between the date of acquisition and
the balance sheet date. If the acquisition of Lansdown had been completed on the first day of the financial year, Group revenues for the period
would have been £333,634,000 and Group profit before tax would have been £48,405,000.

154   

Section 4  Financial Statements16 Goodwill and other intangible assets

Group

Cost
At 1 January 2014
Additions
Acquisition
Disposals
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2014
Accumulated impairment losses and amortisation
At 1 January 2014
Amortisation charge for the year
Impairment losses for the year
Disposals
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2014

Net book value at 31 December 2014

Cost
At 1 January 2013
Additions
Disposals
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2013
Accumulated impairment losses and amortisation
At 1 January 2013
Amortisation charge for the year
Impairment losses for the year
Disposals
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2013

Goodwill
£000

19,387
 -
4,392
 -
 -
23,779

72
 -
67
 -
 -
139

23,640

19,387
 -
 -
 -
19,387

8
 -
64
 -
 -
72

Net book value at 31 December 2013

19,315

Computer
software
£000

Other
intangible
assets
£000

22,140
1,548
 -
(3,816)
(42)
19,830

18,187
1,176
 -
(3,797)
(20)
15,546

4,284

21,629
2,232
(1,206)
(515)
22,140

17,668
2,113
 -
(1,198)
(396)
18,187

3,953

3,918
 -
1,166
 -
 -
5,084

3,502
508
 -
 -
 -
4,010

1,074

3,918
 -
 -
 -
3,918

2,909
593
 -
 -
 -
3,502

416

Total
£000

45,445
1,548
5,558
(3,816)
(42)
48,693

21,761
1,684
67
(3,797)
(20)
19,695

28,998

44,934
2,232
(1,206)
(515)
45,445

20,585
2,706
64
(1,198)
(396)
21,761

23,684

£16,885,000 of the goodwill balance in the current and prior year relates to the acquisition of South Essex Insurance Holdings Limited during
2008. £4,392,000 of the balance relates to the acquisition of Lansdown Insurance Brokers Limited during the current year (see note 15). The
recoverable amounts, determined on a value in use basis, indicate no impairment has arisen. The calculation uses cash flow projections based
on management-approved business plans, covering a three-year period, with forecast annual cash flows at the end of the planning period
continuing thereafter in perpetuity at the UK long-term average growth rate of 2.3% (2013: 2.3%), sourced from the Office for Budget
Responsibility. Discounting is at the Group's long-term targeted return on capital of 12% (2013: 12%).

Assumptions used are consistent with historical experience within the business acquired and external sources of information. The headroom
above the goodwill carrying value is significant and reasonably possible changes to the key assumptions do not result in impairment.

Other intangible assets consist of acquired brand, customer and distribution relationships, which have an overall remaining useful life of nine
years on a weighted average basis.

155   

Section 4  Financial StatementsComputer
software
£000

19,873
1,547
(1,741)
(50)
19,629

16,078
1,092
(1,741)
(30)
15,399

4,230

18,699
2,096
(723)
(199)
19,873

14,888
2,017
(723)
(104)
16,078

3,795

2014

2013

Group
£000

34,757
31,267
(34,594)
(313)
31,117

Parent
£000

30,542
26,964
(30,341)
(191)
26,974

Group
£000

34,626
35,795
(34,720)
(944)
34,757

Parent
£000

35,886
31,023
(35,925)
(442)
30,542

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
16 Goodwill and other intangible assets (continued)

Parent

Cost
At 1 January 2014
Additions
Disposals
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2014
Amortisation
At 1 January 2014
Charge for the year
Disposals
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2014

Net book value at 31 December 2014

Cost
At 1 January 2013
Additions
Disposals
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2013
Amortisation
At 1 January 2013
Charge for the year
Disposals
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2013

Net book value at 31 December 2013

17 Deferred acquisition costs

At 1 January
Increase in the period
Release in the period
Exchange differences 
At 31 December

All balances are current.

156   

Section 4  Financial Statements18 Retirement benefit schemes

Defined benefit pension plans
The Group's main plan is a defined benefit plan operated by the Parent for UK employees, which includes two discrete sections, the EIO
Section and Ansvar Section. The assets of the plan are held separately from those of the Group by the Trustee of the Ecclesiastical Insurance
Office plc Staff Retirement Benefit Fund (the Fund). The Fund is subject to the Statutory Funding Objective under the Pensions Act 2004. An
independent qualified actuary appointed by the Trustee is responsible for undertaking triennial valuations to determine whether the Statutory
Funding Objective is met. Pension costs for the plan are determined by the Trustee, having considered the advice of the actuary and having
consulted with the employer. The most recent triennial valuation was at 31 December 2010. The Trustee is currently working with the employer
in order to finalise the triennial valuation as at 31 December 2013. Actuarial valuations were reviewed and updated by the actuary at 31
December 2014 for IAS 19 (R) purposes. As disclosed in 2013, the Irish plan closed on 31 March 2014 and has been accounted for as a
curtailment and settlement as shown in the tables below.

Since 2000, the Parent has been the sponsoring employer for the Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc Pension and Life Assurance Scheme
(EIOPLA). This is a defined benefit scheme that has been closed to new entrants since 1 July 1998, providing benefits to pensioners of
Methodist Insurance plc, a company with a similar culture and whose insurance risks, excluding terrorism, are fully reinsured by the Parent. The
assets of the scheme are held separately from those of the Parent, and are invested with an insurance company under a Group Funding policy.
The most recent triennial valuation was at 1 January 2011.

The EIOPLA has not previously been reported within the Group accounts and, while it has not been material from a Group perspective, the
scheme should have been included within the Group results. The financial effects of the scheme have therefore been included in the Parent
and Group statement of profit or loss and statement of other comprehensive income for 2014.

The scheme has consistently been in a surplus position but as the recoverability of any surplus is uncertain the asset is derecognised, with any
gains or losses relating to the scheme being eliminated in the year. As a result, there would have been no change to the net assets of the
Group if the scheme had previously been included in the results. Due to the immateriality of the scheme, and the impact of the derecognition of
Instead, the scheme has been brought into the Parent and Group financial statements for
the surplus, prior year results have not been restated.
2014, and is shown as a transfer in in the reconciliation of plan assets and reconciliation of defined benefit obligations shown below. Had the
prior year comparative been restated, the effect on the financial statements would have been a £24,000 increase in profit for the year and no
change to the balance sheet. 

The plans typically expose the Group to risks such as: 

-

-

-

-

Investment risk: The Fund holds some of its investments in asset classes, such as equities, which have volatile market values and, while these
assets are expected to provide the best returns over the long term, any short-term volatility could cause additional funding to be required if a
deficit emerges. Derivative contracts are used from time to time which would limit losses in the event of a fall in equity markets.

Interest rate risk: Scheme liabilities are assessed using market rates of interest to discount the liabilities and are therefore subject to any
volatility in the movement of the market rate of interest. The net interest income or expense recognised in profit or loss is also calculated
using the market rate of interest.

Inflation risk: A significant proportion of scheme benefits are linked to inflation. Although scheme assets are expected to provide a good
hedge against inflation over the long term, movements over the short term could lead to a deficit emerging.

Mortality risk: In the event that members live longer than assumed the liabilities may be understated originally, and a deficit may emerge if
funding has not adequately provided for the increased life expectancy.

During the year, the Trustee of the Fund concluded the appointment of a new Scheme Actuary and Plan Administrator following a competitive
tendering process. A comprehensive review of the Fund's Additional Voluntary Contribution arrangements was also completed.

All Group defined benefit plans are now closed to new entrants but remain open to future accrual. The Group operates a number of defined
contribution pension plans, for which contributions by the Group are disclosed in note 12.

157   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
18 Retirement benefit schemes (continued)

Group and Parent

The amounts recognised in the statement of financial position are determined as follows:
Present value of funded obligations 
Fair value of plan assets 

Restrictions on asset recognised
Net asset in the statement of financial position

Movements in the net asset recognised in the statement of financial position are as follows:
At 1 January
Exchange differences
Expense charged to profit or loss*
Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income
Contributions paid 
At 31 December

The amounts recognised through profit or loss are as follows:
Current service cost
Administration cost
Interest expense on liabilities
Interest income on plan assets 
Gains on settlements/curtailments
Total, included in employee benefits expense

The amounts recognised in the statement of other comprehensive income are as follows:
Return on plan assets, excluding interest income
Experience gains on liabilities
Gains from changes in demographic assumptions
Losses from changes in financial assumptions
Change in asset ceiling
Total included in other comprehensive income

2014
£000

2013
£000

(277,459)
298,840
21,381
(563)
20,818

(255,604)
287,892
32,288
 -
32,288

32,288
22
(1,894)
(12,693)
3,095
20,818

3,516
392
11,549
(13,151)
(412)
1,894

2,391
5,569
5,273
(26,051)
125
(12,693)

36,521
(24)
(1,961)
(5,180)
2,932
32,288

3,441
221
9,971
(11,672)
 -
1,961

16,921
127
 -
(22,228)
 -
(5,180)

* Charge to profit or loss includes £429,000 (2013: £313,000) in respect of member salary sacrifice contributions and costs ultimately
borne by related parties.

The following is the analysis of the defined benefit pension balances for financial reporting purposes:

2014
£000

21,068
(250)
20,818

2013
£000

32,288
 -
32,288

Group and Parent

Pension assets
Pension liabilities

158   

Section 4  Financial StatementsThe principal actuarial assumptions (expressed as weighted averages) were as follows: 

Discount rate 
Inflation (RPI)
Inflation (CPI)
Future salary increases 
Future increase in pensions in deferment
Future pension increases (linked to RPI)
Future pension increases (linked to CPI)

2014
%

3.70
3.10
2.10
4.60
2.10
3.11
2.10

2013
%

4.60
3.50
2.70
5.00
2.70
3.50
2.70

Mortality rate

2014

2013

The average life expectancy in years of a pensioner retiring at age 65, at the year end date, is as 
follows: 
Male
Female

The average life expectancy in years of a pensioner retiring at age 65, 20 years after the year end 
date, is as follows: 
Male
Female

Plan assets are weighted as follows:

Cash and cash equivalents

Equity instruments
   UK quoted
   Overseas quoted

Debt instruments
   UK public sector quoted - fixed interest
   UK non-public sector quoted - fixed interest
   UK quoted - index-linked

Other

The actual return on plan assets was a gain of £15,542,000 (2013: gain of £28,593,000). 

23.7
25.3

26.0
27.6

24.2
26.3

26.5
28.7

2014
%

2013
%

5

25
25
50

2
18
15
35

10

4

30
29
59

3
15
12
30

7

100

100

159   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
18 Retirement benefit schemes (continued)

The movements in the fair value of plan assets and the present value of the defined benefit obligation over the year are as follows: 

Plan assets
At 1 January
Transfer in
Interest income
Return on plan assets, excluding interest income
Pension benefits paid and payable
Contributions paid
Assets distributed on settlements
Exchange differences 
At 31 December

Defined benefit obligation
At 1 January
Transfer in
Current service cost
Administration cost
Interest cost
Pension benefits paid and payable
Experience gains on liabilities
Gains from changes in demographic assumptions
Losses from changes in financial assumptions
Liabilities extinguished on settlements/curtailments
Exchange differences 
At 31 December

Asset ceiling
At 1 January
Transfer in
Change in asset ceiling
At 31 December

History of plan assets and liabilities

Present value of defined benefit obligations
Fair value of plan assets

Restrictions on asset recognised
Surplus

2014
£000

(277,459)
298,840
21,381
(563)
20,818

2013
£000

(255,604)
287,892
32,288
 -
32,288

2012
£000

(225,164)
261,685
36,521
 -
36,521

2014
£000

2013
£000

287,892
2,947
13,151
2,391
(6,079)
3,095
(4,416)
(141)
298,840

255,604
2,259
3,516
392
11,549
(6,079)
(5,569)
(5,273)
26,051
(4,828)
(163)
277,459

 -
688
(125)
563

2011
£000

(199,087)
234,314
35,227
 -
35,227

261,685
 -
11,672
16,921
(5,406)
2,932
 -
88
287,892

225,164
 -
3,441
221
9,971
(5,406)
(127)
 -
22,228
 -
112
255,604

 -
 -
 -
 -

2010
£000

(213,740)
237,440
23,700
 -
23,700

The weighted average duration of the defined benefit obligation at the end of the reporting period is 23 years (2013: 21 years). 

The contribution expected to be paid by the Group during the year ending 31 December 2015 is £2.7 million. 

Significant actuarial assumptions for the determination of the defined benefit obligation are discount rate, inflation, expected salary increases
and mortality. The sensitivity analysis below has been determined on reasonably possible changes of the assumptions occurring at the end of
the reporting period assuming that all other assumptions are held constant.  

Assumption

Change in assumption

Impact on plan liabilities

2014

2013

Discount rate
Inflation
Salary increase
Life expectancy

Increase/decrease by 0.5%
Increase/decrease by 0.5%
Increase/decrease by 0.5%
Increase/decrease by 1 year

Decrease/increase by 10%/12%
Increase/decrease by 10%/9%
Increase/decrease by 3%
Increase/decrease by 3%

Decrease/increase by 10%/12%
Increase/decrease by 10%/10%
Increase/decrease by 3%
Increase/decrease by 3%

160   

Section 4  Financial StatementsPost-employment medical benefits
The Parent operates a post-employment medical benefit plan, for which it chooses to self-insure. The method of accounting, assumptions and
the frequency of valuation are similar to those used for the defined benefit pension plans.

The provision of the plan leads to a number of risks as follows: 

-

-

-

-

Interest rate risk: The reserves are assessed using market rates of interest to discount the liabilities and are therefore subject to volatility in
the movement of the market rates of interest. A reduction in the market rate of interest would lead to an increase in the reserves required to
be held.

Medical expense assumption: Claims experience can be volatile, exposing the Company to the risk of being required to pay over and above
the assumed reserve. If future claims experience differs significantly from that experienced in previous years this will increase the risk to the
Company.

Spouse and widows' contributions: The self-insured benefit includes a potential liability for members who pay contributions in respect of their
spouse and for widows who pay contributions. There is the possibility that the contributions charged may not be sufficient to cover the
medical costs that fall due. 

Mortality risk: If members live longer than expected the Company is exposed to the expense of medical claims for a longer period, with
increased likelihood of needing to pay claims.

The amounts recognised in the statement of financial position are determined as follows: 

Group and Parent

2014
£000

2013
£000

Present value of unfunded obligations and net obligations in the statement of financial position

12,547

11,744

Movements in the net obligations recognised in the statement of financial position are as 
follows: 
At 1 January
Total expense charged to profit or loss
Net actuarial losses/(gains) during the year, recognised in other comprehensive income
Benefits paid 

At 31 December

The amounts recognised through profit or loss are as follows:
Current service cost
Interest cost 

Total, included in employee benefits expense

11,744
551
491
(239)
12,547

33
518
551

14,810
783
(3,654)
(195)
11,744

116
667
783

The weighted average duration of the net obligations at the end of the reporting period is 22 years (2013: 22 years). 

The main actuarial assumptions for the plan are a long-term increase in medical costs of 12.0% (2013: 12.0%) and a discount rate of 3.7%
(2013: 4.6%). The sensitivity analysis below has been determined on reasonably possible changes of the assumptions occurring at the end of
the accounting period assuming that all other assumptions are held constant.  

Assumption

Change in assumption

Impact on plan liabilities

2014

2013

Discount rate
Medical expense inflation
Life expectancy

Increase/decrease by 0.5%
Increase/decrease by 1.0%
Increase/decrease by 1 year

Decrease/increase by 10%/11%
Increase/decrease by 23%/18%
Increase/decrease by 11%/8%

Decrease/increase by 10%/11%
Increase/decrease by 23%/18%
Increase/decrease by 11%/8%

161   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

19 Property, plant and equipment

Group

Cost or valuation
At 1 January 2014
Additions
Acquisition
Disposals
Revaluation
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2014
Depreciation
At 1 January 2014
Charge for the year
Disposals
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2014

Net book value at 31 December 2014

2,595

Cost or valuation
At 1 January 2013
Additions
Disposals
Revaluation
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2013
Depreciation
At 1 January 2013
Charge for the year
Disposals
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2013

3,248
 -
 -
(104)
(79)
3,065

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

Net book value at 31 December 2013

3,065

Land and
buildings
£000

Motor
vehicles
£000

Furniture,
fittings and
equipment
£000

Computer
equipment
£000

3,065
 -
 -
(504)
30
4
2,595

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

2,840
471
 -
(787)
 -
 -
2,524

1,131
454
(507)
 -
1,078

1,446

3,190
621
(971)
 -
 -
2,840

1,259
507
(635)
 -
1,131

1,709

6,157
509
12
(1,227)
 -
(37)
5,414

5,177
379
(1,151)
(32)
4,373

1,041

6,830
58
(612)
 -
(119)
6,157

5,296
518
(548)
(89)
5,177

980

7,530
603
 -
(2,131)
 -
(7)
5,995

5,992
805
(2,125)
 -
4,672

1,323

7,621
867
(604)
 -
(354)
7,530

5,920
905
(540)
(293)
5,992

1,538

Total
£000

19,592
1,583
12
(4,649)
30
(40)
16,528

12,300
1,638
(3,783)
(32)
10,123

6,405

20,889
1,546
(2,187)
(104)
(552)
19,592

12,475
1,930
(1,723)
(382)
12,300

7,292

All properties were revalued at 31 December 2012, with the exception of two properties, which were revalued at 31 December 2014.
Valuations were carried out by Cluttons, an external firm of chartered surveyors, using standard industry methodology to determine a fair market
value. All properties are classified as level 2 assets.

The value of land and buildings on a historical cost basis is £2,867,000 (2013: £3,019,000).

Depreciation expense has been charged in other operating and administrative expenses.

Included within net book value of motor vehicles is £1,182,000 (2013: £1,530,000) in respect of assets held under finance leases.

162   

Section 4  Financial StatementsParent

Cost or valuation
At 1 January 2014
Additions
Disposals
Revaluation
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2014
Depreciation
At 1 January 2014
Charge for the year
Disposals
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2014

Net book value at 31 December 2014

2,295

Cost or valuation
At 1 January 2013
Additions
Disposals
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2013
Depreciation
At 1 January 2013
Charge for the year
Disposals
Exchange differences 
At 31 December 2013

2,360
 -
 -
 -
2,360

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

Net book value at 31 December 2013

2,360

Land and
buildings
£000

Motor
vehicles
£000

Furniture,
fittings and
equipment
£000

Computer
equipment
£000

2,360
 -
(95)
30
 -
2,295

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

2,701
370
(685)
 -
 -
2,386

1,047
417
(447)
 -
1,017

1,369

3,051
621
(971)
 -
2,701

1,195
487
(635)
 -
1,047

1,654

5,731
505
(995)
 -
(37)
5,204

4,922
352
(995)
(32)
4,247

957

5,762
29
(23)
(37)
5,731

4,532
464
(36)
(38)
4,922

809

5,628
510
(640)
 -
(12)
5,486

4,367
695
(640)
(8)
4,414

1,072

5,239
820
(389)
(42)
5,628

4,062
722
(389)
(28)
4,367

1,261

Total
£000

16,420
1,385
(2,415)
30
(49)
15,371

10,336
1,464
(2,082)
(40)
9,678

5,693

16,412
1,470
(1,383)
(79)
16,420

9,789
1,673
(1,060)
(66)
10,336

6,084

The Company’s properties were revalued at 31 December 2012, with the exception of a certain property, which was revalued at 31 December
2014. Valuations were carried out by Cluttons, an external firm of chartered surveyors, using standard industry methodology to determine a fair
market value. All properties are classified as level 2 assets.

The value of land and buildings on a historical cost basis is £2,467,000 (2013: £2,484,000).

Depreciation expense has been charged in other operating and administrative expenses.

Included within net book value of motor vehicles is £1,182,000 (2013: £1,530,000) in respect of assets held under finance leases.

163   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

20 Investment property

Group and Parent

Net book value at 1 January
Additions
Disposals
Fair value gains
Net book value at 31 December

2014
£000

45,099
23,817
(1,600)
2,459
69,775

2013
£000

27,315
17,894
(1,453)
1,343
45,099

The Group’s investment properties were last revalued at 31 December 2014 by Cluttons, an external firm of chartered surveyors. Valuations
were carried out using standard industry methodology to determine a fair market value. All properties are classified as level 2 assets.

Investment properties are held for long-term capital appreciation rather than short-term sale. Rental
income arising from the investment
properties owned by both the Group and Parent amounted to £3,818,000 (2013: £2,004,000) and is included in net investment return. Other
operating and administrative expenses include £391,000 (2013: £350,000) relating to investment property.

21 Financial investments

Financial investments summarised by measurement category are as follows: 

Financial investments at fair value through profit or loss
Equity securities
- listed
- unlisted
Debt securities
- government bonds
- listed
- unlisted
Derivative financial instruments
- options

Loans and receivables
Loans secured by mortgages *
Other loans

Parent investments in subsidiary undertakings
Shares in subsidiary undertakings

2014

Group
£000

Parent
£000

2013

Group
£000

Parent
£000

269,556
20,349

196,179
399,848
238

 -
886,170

 -
16
16

 -

239,628
20,348

118,947
285,188
238

 -
664,349

 -
14
14

276,930
19,390

225,413
416,445
205

158
938,541

7,892
19
7,911

247,026
19,386

147,418
299,954
205

158
714,147

 -
14
14

50,065

 -

49,765

Total financial investments

886,186

714,428

946,452

763,926

Current
Non-current

327,552
558,634

296,566
417,862

391,205
555,247

357,674
406,252

* Included as current assets held for sale in the statement of financial position in the current year (also see note 25).

All investments in subsidiary undertakings are unlisted. 

164   

Section 4  Financial Statements22 Derivative financial instruments

The Group utilises non-hedge derivatives to mitigate equity price risk arising from investments held at fair value. 

Group and Parent

Equity/Index contracts
Options

All balances are current.

Contract/
notional
amount
£000

2014

Fair value
asset
£000

Fair value
liability
£000

Contract/
notional
amount
£000

2013

Fair value
asset
£000

Fair value
liability
£000

 -

 -

 -

30,000

158

 -

The notional amount above reflects the aggregate of individual derivative positions on a gross basis and so gives an indication of the overall
scale of the derivative transaction. It does not reflect current market values of the open positions.

The derivative fair value assets are recognised within financial investments (note 21).

23 Other assets

Receivables arising from insurance and reinsurance contracts
- due from contract holders
- due from agents, brokers and intermediaries 
- due from reinsurers

Other receivables
- accrued interest and rent
- other prepayments and accrued income
- amounts owed by related parties 
- other debtors

Current
Non-current

2014

2013

Group
£000

24,469
40,645
7,230

7,032
3,074
20,586
16,358
119,394

97,936
21,458

Parent
£000

24,468
29,735
5,437

5,317
2,745
34,596
(59)
102,239

69,323
32,916

Group
£000

25,474
43,287
8,808

7,876
3,268
17,566
18,185
124,464

107,206
17,258

Parent
£000

25,456
31,727
8,051

5,821
2,868
31,006
3,342
108,271

78,015
30,256

The Group has recognised a charge of £449,000 (2013: credit of £77,000) in other operating and administrative expenses in the statement of
profit or loss for the impairment of its trade and other receivables during the year. The Parent has recognised a charge of £502,000 (2013:
charge of £17,000).

The Group balance due from reinsurers comprises £14,415,000 (2013: £11,728,000) receivable net of £7,185,000 (2013: £2,920,000)
payable. The Parent balance comprises £12,622,000 (2013: £10,971,000) receivable net of £7,185,000 (2013: £2,920,000) payable.

The Group balance owed by related parties comprises £20,587,000 (2013: £17,584,000) receivable net of £1,000 (2013: £18,000) payable.
The Parent balance comprises £34,714,000 (2013: £31,610,000) receivable net of £118,000 (2013: £604,000) payable.

There has been no significant change in the recoverability of the Group's trade receivables, for which no collateral
is held. The Directors
consider that the amounts are recoverable at their carrying values, which are stated net of an allowance for doubtful debts for those debtors
that are individually determined to be impaired.

165   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
23 Other assets (continued)

Movement in the allowance for doubtful debts

Balance at 1 January
Movement in the year
Balance at 31 December

2014

2013

Group
£000

323
(109)
214

Parent
£000

189
(20)
169

Group
£000

882
(559)
323

Parent
£000

553
(364)
189

Included within trade receivables of the Group is £3,365,000 (2013: £2,964,000) overdue but not impaired, of which £3,020,000 (2013:
£2,558,000) is not more than three months overdue at the reporting date. Included within trade receivables of the Parent is £2,095,000 (2013:
£2,115,000) overdue but not impaired, of which £1,844,000 (2013: £1,887,000) is not more than three months overdue at the reporting date.

24 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash at bank and in hand 
Short-term bank deposits 

2014

2013

Group
£000

48,167
59,359
107,526

Parent
£000

29,428
48,346
77,774

Group
£000

48,298
58,943
107,241

Parent
£000

30,715
49,715
80,430

Included within cash at bank and in hand of the Group is £4,808,000 (2013: £4,948,000) pledged as collateral in respect of an insurance
liability.

25 Current assets held for sale

Ecclesiastical Financial Advisory Services Limited ceased to offer new mortgages following a strategic review in 2007, although it continued to
administer the existing book. During the current year management have decided to dispose of the mortgage book in order to more clearly focus
their attention on the current elements of the business.

After the end of the financial year the Company entered into an agreement to transfer its legacy mortgage business to Holmesdale Building
Society. The transfer was completed on 1 February 2015. 

The current assets held for sale consist of mortgages secured on residential property. 

Cost at 1 January 
Repayments and redemptions
Market value adjustment

Carrying value at 31 December 

2014
£000

7,892
(1,022)
(666)

6,204

The effective interest rate on the mortgages is 4.71% (2013: 4.42%). 

Clients have the option to redeem mortgages before the end of the mortgage term. The Directors consider that the carrying value approximates
to fair value. 

There are no debts which are past due at the reporting date and no amounts have been impaired during the current or prior year. 

The major class of assets comprising the operations classified as held for sale is financial investments. 

166   

Section 4  Financial Statements26 Called up share capital

Ordinary shares of 4p each
8.625% Non-Cumulative Irredeemable Preference shares of £1 each

The number of shares in issue are as follows:

Ordinary shares of 4p each
At 1 January and 31 December

8.625% Non-Cumulative Irredeemable Preference shares of £1 each
At 1 January and 31 December

Issued, allotted and 
fully paid 

2014
£000

14,027
106,450
120,477

2013
£000

14,027
106,450
120,477

350,678

350,678

106,450

106,450

On winding up, the assets of the Company remaining after payment of its liabilities are to be applied to holders of the Irredeemable Preference
shares in repaying the nominal capital sum paid up on the shares and an amount equal to all arrears of accrued and unpaid dividends up to the
date of the commencement of the winding up. The residual interest in the assets of the Company after deducting all liabilities belongs to the
Ordinary shareholders.

Holders of the Irredeemable Preference shares are not entitled to receive notice of, or to attend, or vote at any general meeting of the Company
unless at the time of the notice convening such meeting, the dividend on such shares which is most recently payable on such shares shall not
have been paid in full, or where a resolution is proposed varying any of the rights of such shares, or for the winding up of the Company.

167   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

27 Insurance liabilities and reinsurance assets

Gross
Claims outstanding
Unearned premiums 
Long-term business provision
Total gross insurance liabilities

Recoverable from reinsurers
Claims outstanding
Unearned premiums 
Total reinsurers’ share of insurance liabilities

Net
Claims outstanding
Unearned premiums 
Long-term business provision
Total net insurance liabilities

Gross insurance liabilities
Current
Non-current

Reinsurance assets
Current
Non-current

2014

Group
£000

564,380
161,624
94,324
820,328

107,331
50,134
157,465

457,049
111,490
94,324
662,863

Parent
£000

477,881
141,006
 -
618,887

75,324
39,680
115,004

402,557
101,326
 -
503,883

2013

Group
£000

569,179
186,642
92,446
848,267

89,472
43,121
132,593

479,707
143,521
92,446
715,674

Parent
£000

498,705
164,483
 -
663,188

78,610
42,880
121,490

420,095
121,603
 -
541,698

324,979
495,349

280,408
338,479

372,878
475,389

328,088
335,100

92,728
64,737

75,532
39,472

105,451
27,142

97,058
24,432

(a) General business insurance contracts
(i) Reserving methodology
Reserving for non-life insurance claims is a complex process and the Group adopts recognised actuarial methods, and, where appropriate, other
calculations and statistical analysis. Actuarial methods used include chain ladder, the Bornhuetter-Ferguson and average cost methods.

Chain ladder methods extrapolate paid amounts, incurred amounts (paid claims plus case estimates) and the number of claims or average cost
of claims, to ultimate claims based on the development of previous years. This method assumes that previous patterns are a reasonable guide
to future developments. Where this assumption is felt to be unreasonable, adjustments are made or other methods such as Bornhuetter-
Ferguson or average cost are used. The Bornhuetter-Ferguson method places more credibility on expected loss ratios for the most recent loss
years. For smaller portfolios the materiality of the business and data available may also shape the methods used in reviewing reserve adequacy.

The selection of results for each accident year and for each portfolio depends on an assessment of the most appropriate method. Sometimes a
combination of techniques is used. The average weighted term to payment is calculated separately by class of business and is based on historic
settlement patterns.

(ii) Calculation of uncertainty margins
To reflect the uncertain nature of the outcome of the ultimate settlement cost of claims an uncertainty margin is added to the best estimate.
The addition for uncertainty is assessed primarily by the Thomas Mack actuarial method, based on at least the 75th percentile confidence level
for each portfolio. For smaller portfolios where the Thomas Mack method cannot be applied, provisions are calculated at a level intended to
provide an equivalent probability of sufficiency. Where the standard methods cannot allow for changing circumstances then additional
uncertainty margins are added and are typically expressed as a percentage of outstanding claims. This approach generally results in a
favourable release of provisions in the current financial year, arising from the settlement of claims relating to previous financial years, as shown
in part (c) of the note.

(iii) Calculation of provisions for latent claims
The Group adopts commonly used industry methods including those based on claims frequency and severity and benchmarking.

168   

Section 4  Financial Statements(iv) Discounting
General
discounted provisions are held in the following territories:

insurance outstanding claims provisions are undiscounted, except for certain designated long-tail classes of business for which

Discount rate

Mean term of discounted
liabilities

Geographical territory

2014

2013

2014

2013

UK and Ireland
Canada
Australia

0.8% to 3.3%
1.3% to 3.0%
2.3%

0.4% to 3.8%
1.1% to 3.2%
3.3%

14
14
4

15
14
5

Parent consists of UK, Ireland and Canada. Group also includes Australia. 

The above rates of interest are based on government bond yields of the relevant currency and term at the reporting date. Adjustments are
made, where appropriate, to reflect portfolio assets held and to allow for future investment expenses. At the year end the undiscounted gross
outstanding claims provision was £606,259,000 for
(2013:
£540,739,000).

the Group (2013: £626,418,000), and £514,453,000 for

the Parent

At 31 December 2014, it is estimated that a fall of 1% in the discount rates used would increase the Group's net outstanding claims provisions
by £13,865,000 (2013: £12,402,000). Financial investments backing these liabilities are not hypothecated across general insurance classes
of business. The sensitivity of Group profit or loss and other equity reserves to interest rate risk, taking into account the mitigating effect on
asset values is provided in note 4 (h).

(v) Assumptions
The Group follows a process of reviewing its reserves for outstanding claims on a quarterly basis. This involves an appraisal of each portfolio
with respect to ultimate claims liability for the recent exposure period as well as for earlier periods, together with a review of the factors that
have the most significant impact on the assumptions used to determine the reserving methodology. The work conducted on each portfolio is
subject to an internal peer review and management sign-off process.

insurance reserves are the anticipated number and ultimate
The most significant assumptions in determining the undiscounted general
settlement cost of claims, and the extent to which reinsurers will share in the cost. Factors which influence decisions on assumptions include
legal and judicial changes, significant weather events, other catastrophes, subsidence events, exceptional claims or substantial changes in
claims experience and developments in older or latent claims. Significant factors influencing assumptions about reinsurance are the terms of
the reinsurance treaties, the anticipated time taken to settle a claim and the incidence of large individual and aggregated claims.

(vi) Changes in assumptions
There are no significant changes in assumptions.

(vii) Sensitivity of results
The ultimate amount of claims settlement is uncertain and the Group's aim is to reserve to at least the 75th percentile confidence level.

If final settlement of insurance claims reserved for at the year end turns out to be 10% higher or lower than the reserves included in these
financial statements, the following pre-tax Group loss or profit will be realised:

Liability

Property

Motor

- UK
- Overseas
- UK
- Overseas
- UK

2014

2013

Gross
£000

28,100
11,000
5,500
4,700
2,200

Net
£000

25,600
8,500
3,100
2,000
1,100

Gross
£000

28,300
12,000
6,900
5,200
2,900

Net
£000

25,500
9,900
4,100
3,200
2,500

169   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
27 Insurance liabilities and reinsurance assets (continued)

(viii) Claims development tables
The nature of liability classes of business is that claims may take a number of years to settle and before the final liability is known. The tables
below show the development of the undiscounted estimate of ultimate gross and net claims cost for these classes across all territories. 

Estimate of gross ultimate claims

Group

At end of year
One year later
Two years later
Three years later
Four years later
Five years later
Six years later
Seven years later
Eight years later
Nine years later

Current estimate of 
ultimate claims 
Cumulative payments 
to date 

Parent

At end of year
One year later
Two years later
Three years later
Four years later
Five years later
Six years later
Seven years later
Eight years later
Nine years later

Current estimate of 
ultimate claims 
Cumulative payments 
to date 

2005
£000

2006
£000

2007
£000

2008
£000

2009
£000

2010
£000

2011
£000

2012
£000

2013
£000

2014
£000

Total
£000

46,155
32,998
35,001
30,365
26,835
25,860
25,893
25,312
25,753
26,818

45,688
45,900
40,092
36,168
30,791
28,470
27,154
27,377
28,534

50,840
47,307
43,270
35,510
35,556
34,925
34,036
33,917

56,420 74,742 84,476
53,552 59,807 75,550
47,643 55,250 62,239
57,134 66,422
44,658
40,433 55,695 61,330
37,546 58,631
37,864

82,095 100,612 81,725
88,046 80,027
76,371
71,543
78,196
68,587

61,901

26,818

28,534

33,917 37,864

58,631 61,330

68,587

78,196

80,027

61,901 535,805

(27,728) (30,331)

(22,528)
4,290

(23,052)
5,482

Outstanding liability
Effect of discounting
Present value
Discounted liability in respect of earlier years
Total discounted gross liability (for liability classes) included in insurance liabilities in the statement of financial position

(17,905)
(239,949)
60,291 71,952 60,559 295,856
(14,462)
281,394
108,802
390,196

(39,684) (40,931) (28,373)
7,533 18,947 20,399 40,214

(8,075)

(1,342)

6,189

2005
£000

2006
£000

2007
£000

2008
£000

2009
£000

2010
£000

2011
£000

2012
£000

2013
£000

2014
£000

Total
£000

39,338 38,332 41,927 46,882 60,810 69,230 66,864
27,128 37,518 38,967 43,344 46,660 60,202 63,770
28,917 33,711 33,464 37,204 43,853 50,834 62,587
24,960
30,329 28,093 37,669 49,444 53,390 60,653
21,643 24,731 28,569 34,514 47,970 50,526
21,095 24,821 28,679 33,384 47,482
20,919 24,450 29,217 33,667
20,348 24,710 29,904
21,434 25,717
22,444

84,511 71,798 52,350
77,629
60,950
69,580

22,444 25,717 29,904 33,667 47,482 50,526 60,653

69,580 60,950 52,350 453,273

(18,480) (20,886) (24,313)
5,591
4,831

(27,114) (35,186) (33,337) (25,124)
6,553 12,296 17,189 35,529

3,964

Outstanding liability
Effect of discounting
Present value
Discounted liability in respect of earlier years
Total discounted gross liability (for liability classes) included in insurance liabilities in the statement of financial position

(6,772)
(15,862)
53,718 54,178

(1,074) (208,148)
51,276 245,125
(12,330)
232,795
97,899
330,694

170   

Section 4  Financial StatementsEstimate of net ultimate claims

Group

At end of year
One year later
Two years later
Three years later
Four years later
Five years later
Six years later
Seven years later
Eight years later
Nine years later

Current estimate of 
ultimate claims 
Cumulative payments to 
date 

2005
£000

2006
£000

2007
£000

2008
£000

2009
£000

2010
£000

2011
£000

2012
£000

2013
£000

2014
£000

Total
£000

39,528 41,007 46,235 51,795 64,476 73,218 75,302 88,247
76,729
32,780 40,976 43,107 48,432 53,700 64,796 72,336 79,272 66,475
31,287 35,783 38,979 44,498 50,805 57,758 68,057 73,735
28,641 33,145 34,180 42,524 50,168 59,353 66,822
25,665 30,283 35,004 39,321 50,062
25,391 28,230 34,688 37,208 49,879
25,150
26,926 33,702 37,606
24,024 27,150 33,718
24,534 28,016
25,726

55,975

59,633

25,726 28,016 33,718 37,606 49,879 55,975 66,822 73,735 66,475 59,633 497,585

4,161

(21,565) (22,885) (27,529) (30,121) (37,829)
6,189

Outstanding liability
Effect of discounting
Present value
Discounted liability in respect of earlier years
Total discounted net liability (for liability classes) included in insurance liabilities in the statement of financial position

(1,324) (231,736)
7,485 12,050 19,400 38,751 55,897 58,476 58,309 265,849
(14,462)
251,387
92,646
344,033

(36,575) (28,071) (17,838)

(7,999)

5,131

2005
£000

2006
£000

2007
£000

2008
£000

2009
£000

2010
£000

2011
£000

2012
£000

2013
£000

2014
£000

Total
£000

57,135 59,011 74,361 67,690 50,025
59,873 69,805 57,538

29,284 29,650 33,814 40,198 48,250 59,997 65,297

32,394 33,318 36,959 41,631 51,226
26,772 32,547 34,656 38,270 39,841 49,060
25,279
23,304 27,449 26,905 34,983 43,879 51,827 59,352
20,929 24,103 28,322 34,458 44,064 49,171
20,551 24,707 28,670 33,366
20,811 24,407 29,203 33,666
20,100 24,696 29,904
21,119 25,699
22,157

43,640

22,157 25,699 29,904 33,666 43,640 49,171 59,352 65,297 57,538 50,025 436,449

Parent

At end of year
One year later
Two years later
Three years later
Four years later
Five years later
Six years later
Seven years later
Eight years later
Nine years later

Current estimate of 
ultimate claims 
Cumulative payments to 
date 

(18,364) (20,885) (24,313)
5,591
4,814

3,793

(27,114) (33,678)

(15,860)
(32,783) (25,066)
9,962 16,388 34,286 49,437

(6,749)
50,789

Outstanding liability
Effect of discounting
Present value
Discounted liability in respect of earlier years
Total discounted net liability (for liability classes) included in insurance liabilities in the statement of financial position

6,552

(1,074)
48,951

(205,886)
230,563
(12,330)
218,233
83,201
301,434

171   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
27 Insurance liabilities and reinsurance assets (continued)

(b) Long-term insurance contracts
(i) Assumptions
The most significant assumptions in determining long-term business reserves are as follows:

Mortality
An appropriate base table of standard mortality is chosen depending on the type of contract. Where prudent, an allowance is made for future
mortality improvements based on trends identified in population data.

Investment returns
Projected investment returns are based on actual yields for each asset class less an allowance for credit risk, where appropriate. The risk
adjusted yields after allowance for tax and investment expenses for the current valuation are as follows:

UK government bonds: non-linked
UK government bonds: index-linked
Corporate debt instruments: index-linked

2014

1.52%
-0.98%
-0.32%

2013

2.76%
-0.31%
0.42%

The investment return assumption is determined by calculating an overall yield on all cash flows projected to occur from the portfolio of
financial assets which are assumed to back the relevant class of liabilities. This is in accordance with a modification to PRA Rule INSPRU
3.1.35R, which was granted in September 2011. For index-linked assets, the real yield is shown.

Funeral plans renewal expense level and inflation
Numbers of policies in force and both projected and actual expenses are considered when setting the base renewal expense level. The unit
renewal expense assumption for this business is £2.70 per annum (2013: £2.70 per annum). Additionally, now the business volumes are
expected to fall, a number of expenses have been reserved for in a separate exercise. A reserve for these expenses is held at £4.8 million.

Expense inflation is set with reference to the index-linked UK government bond rates of return, and published figures for earnings inflation, and
is assumed to be 3.68% per annum (2013: 4.05%).

Tax
It has been assumed that tax legislation and rates applicable at 1 January 2014 will continue to apply. All in-force business is classed as
protection business and is expected to be taxed on a profits basis.

(ii) Changes in assumptions
Projected investment returns have been revised in line with the changes in the actual yields of the underlying assets. As a result, liabilities have
increased by £7.3 million (2013: £1.9 million decrease).

Changes to unit renewal expense assumptions (described in (i) above), had no effect on insurance liabilities (2013: £0.4 million increase).

(iii) Sensitivity analysis
The sensitivity of profit before tax to changes in the key assumptions used to calculate the long-term business insurance liabilities is shown in
the following table. No account has been taken of any correlation between the assumptions.

Variable

Deterioration in annuitant mortality
Improvement in annuitant mortality
Increase in fixed interest/cash yields
Decrease in fixed interest/cash yields
Worsening of base renewal expense level
Improvement in base renewal expense level
Increase in expense inflation
Decrease in expense inflation

172   

Change in
variable

Potential increase/
(decrease) in the result

2014
£000

500
(600)
1,000
(1,700)
(600)
500
(900)
700

2013
£000

100
(100)
(1,400)
(1,100)
(500)
500
(700)
600

+10%
-10%
+1% pa
-1% pa
+10%
-10%
+1% pa
-1% pa

Section 4  Financial Statements(iv) Available capital resources

2014
Shareholders' equity
Adjustments to assets/liabilities
Total available capital resources
Policyholder liabilities
- life insurance business
Net actuarial liabilities on statement of financial 
position 

2013
Shareholders' equity
Adjustments to assets/liabilities
Total available capital resources
Policyholder liabilities
- life insurance business
Net actuarial liabilities on statement of financial 
position 

Non-profit
life
fund
£000

(1,314)
7,500
6,186

94,324

94,324

(1,136)
7,500
6,364

92,446

92,446

Share-
holders'
fund
£000

43,008
(7,500)
35,508

 -

 -

41,515
(7,500)
34,015

 -

 -

Total
life
business
£000

41,694
 -
41,694

94,324

94,324

40,379
 -
40,379

92,446

92,446

Other
activities
£000

Group
total
£000

452,939
(115,468)
337,471

494,633
(115,468)
379,165

453,764
(123,040)
330,724

494,143
(123,040)
371,103

Shareholders' equity/(deficit) in the non-profit fund represents the net profit or loss generated by this fund not transferred, to date, to the
shareholders' fund. The life shareholders' fund is the balance of shareholder equity in the life business. Available capital resources of the life
business include an allowance for solvency reserves which do not meet the recognition criteria in the accounts.

Other activities include the general insurance business of the Parent and its subsidiaries, and consequently all Group capital not required to
meet the solvency requirements of the general business is available to meet the solvency requirements of the life business.

The available capital resources in the non-profit life fund, subject to the regulatory capital requirements of the fund itself, are available to meet
requirements elsewhere in the Group. The capital requirements of the life business are based on the PRA capital requirements.

The Group uses both its Individual Capital Assessment and its Individual Capital Guidance as a tool for determining capital requirements and
their sensitivity to various risks. The Group manages these risks by means of its underwriting strategy, reinsurance strategy,
investment
strategy, and management control framework.

(v) Movements in life capital

Published capital resources as at 31 December 2013
Effect of new business
Variance between actual and expected experience 
Effect of changes to valuation interest rates
Effect of change to expense assumption 
Effect of change in inflation assumption 
Other movements
Capital resources as at 31 December 2014

Non-profit
life
fund
£000

6,364
44
146
(642)
(23)
120
177
6,186

Share-
holders'
fund
£000

34,015
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
1,493
35,508

Total
life
business
£000

40,379
44
146
(642)
(23)
120
1,670
41,694

173   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
27 Insurance liabilities and reinsurance assets (continued)

(c) Movements in insurance liabilities and reinsurance assets

Group

Claims outstanding
At 1 January 2014
Cash (paid)/received for claims settled in the year 
Change in liabilities/reinsurance assets
- arising from current year claims
- arising from prior year claims
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2014
Provision for unearned premiums
At 1 January 2014
Increase in the period 
Release in the period
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2014
Long-term business provision
At 1 January 2014
Effect of claims during the year
Changes in assumptions 
Other movements 
At 31 December 2014

Claims outstanding
At 1 January 2013
Cash (paid)/received for claims settled in the year 
Change in liabilities/reinsurance assets
- arising from current year claims
- arising from prior year claims
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2013
Provision for unearned premiums
At 1 January 2013
Increase in the period 
Release in the period
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2013
Long-term business provision
At 1 January 2013
Effect of new business during the year 
Effect of claims during the year
Changes in assumptions 
Change in methodology
Other movements 
At 31 December 2013

174   

Gross
£000

Reinsurance
£000

Net
£000

569,179
(195,279)

(89,472)
43,034

479,707
(152,245)

183,977
11,315
(4,812)
564,380

186,642
162,393
(186,044)
(1,367)
161,624

92,446
(7,176)
7,317
1,737
94,324

(44,824)
(17,482)
1,413
(107,331)

(43,121)
(50,549)
43,022
514
(50,134)

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

139,153
(6,167)
(3,399)
457,049

143,521
111,844
(143,022)
(853)
111,490

92,446
(7,176)
7,317
1,737
94,324

565,937
(214,817)

(94,902)
38,888

471,035
(175,929)

238,818
(3,519)
(17,240)
569,179

219,798
191,426
(218,631)
(5,951)
186,642

92,956
6,291
(7,569)
(1,335)
(21)
2,124
92,446

(37,309)
764
3,087
(89,472)

(46,109)
(43,370)
45,983
375
(43,121)

 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -
 -

201,509
(2,755)
(14,153)
479,707

173,689
148,056
(172,648)
(5,576)
143,521

92,956
6,291
(7,569)
(1,335)
(21)
2,124
92,446

Section 4  Financial StatementsParent

Claims outstanding
At 1 January 2014
Cash (paid)/received for claims settled in the year 
Change in liabilities/reinsurance assets
- arising from current year claims
- arising from prior year claims
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2014
Provision for unearned premiums
At 1 January 2014
Increase in the period 
Release in the period
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2014

Claims outstanding
At 1 January 2013
Cash (paid)/received for claims settled in the year 
Change in liabilities/reinsurance assets
- arising from current year claims
- arising from prior year claims
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2013
Provision for unearned premiums
At 1 January 2013
Increase in the period 
Release in the period
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2013

Gross Reinsurance
£000
£000

Net
£000

498,705
(167,475)

(78,610)
34,767

420,095
(132,708)

156,631
(7,865)
(2,115)
477,881

164,483
140,976
(163,680)
(773)
141,006

(32,772)
1,018
273
(75,324)

(42,880)
(39,691)
42,779
112
(39,680)

123,859
(6,847)
(1,842)
402,557

121,603
101,285
(120,901)
(661)
101,326

485,778
(185,169)

(83,551)
34,935

402,227
(150,234)

208,488
(5,964)
(4,428)
498,705

190,009
166,342
(190,182)
(1,686)
164,483

(37,164)
6,105
1,065
(78,610)

(43,921)
(43,097)
43,957
181
(42,880)

171,324
141
(3,363)
420,095

146,088
123,245
(146,225)
(1,505)
121,603

175   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28 Provisions for other liabilities and contingent liabilities

(a) Provisions

Group

At 1 January 2014
Additional provisions  
Used during year
Not utilised
Exchange differences  
At 31 December 2014

Current 
Non-current

Parent

At 1 January 2014
Additional provisions  
Used during year
Not utilised
At 31 December 2014

Current 
Non-current

Regulatory
and legal
provisions
£000

Restructuring 
and other
provisions
£000

3,462
 -
 -
(1,440)
 -
2,022

2,022
 -

3,462
 -
 -
(1,440)
2,022

2,022
 -

3,248
1,130
(1,669)
(1,137)
(6)
1,566

910
656

3,104
420
(1,639)
(1,137)
748

243
505

Total
£000

6,710
1,130
(1,669)
(2,577)
(6)
3,588

2,932
656

6,566
420
(1,639)
(2,577)
2,770

2,265
505

Regulatory and legal provisions
The Group operates in the financial services industry and is subject to regulatory requirements in the normal course of business, including
contributing towards any levies raised on UK general and life business. The provisions reflect an assessment by the Group of its share of the
total potential levies.

In addition, from time to time the Group receives complaints from customers and, while the majority relate to cases where there has been no
customer detriment, we recognise that we have provided, and continue to provide, advice and services across a wide spectrum of regulated
activities. We therefore believe that it is prudent to hold a provision for costs of customer complaints relating to services provided. The Group
continues to reassess the ultimate level of complaints expected and the appropriateness of the provision, which reflects the potential redress
and associated administration costs that would be payable in relation to any complaints we may uphold. Further administration costs in relation
to invalid claims are also included in the provision.

Restructuring and other provisions
The provision for restructuring and other costs relates to costs in respect of redundancies, dilapidations and deferred consideration.

(b) Contingent liabilities
As reported in the 2013 annual report and accounts, the Group is in correspondence with HM Revenue and Customs regarding the treatment
of its preference share capital for group tax purposes. While the issue is still not fully resolved, further correspondence has brought more clarity
and we now believe that we have adequately provided for any additional tax cost to the Group. We no longer believe that there is a contingent
liability in respect of this issue in addition to the amount provided.

176   

Section 4  Financial Statements29 Deferred tax

An analysis and reconciliation of the movement of the key components of the net deferred tax liability during the current and prior reporting
period is as follows:

Group

At 1 January 2013
Charged/(credited) to profit or loss
(Credited)/charged to profit or loss
- resulting from reduction in tax rate
Credited to other comprehensive income
Credited to other comprehensive income
- resulting from reduction in tax rate
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2013

(Credited)/charged to profit or loss
Credited to other comprehensive income
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2014

Parent

At 1 January 2013
Charged/(credited) to profit or loss
(Credited)/charged to profit or loss
- resulting from reduction in tax rate
Credited to other comprehensive income
Credited to other comprehensive income
- resulting from reduction in tax rate
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2013

(Credited)/charged to profit or loss
Credited to other comprehensive income
Exchange differences
At 31 December 2014

Unrealised
gains on
investments
£000

Net
retirement
benefit
assets
£000

Equalisation
reserve
£000

Other
differences
£000

29,485
6,721

(3,795)
 -

 -
(60)
32,351

(517)
 -
(28)
31,806

28,470
6,701

(3,713)
 -

 -
 -
31,458

(981)
 -
 -
30,477

4,993
72

(525)
(305)

(126)
 -
4,109

182
(2,637)
 -
1,654

4,993
72

(525)
(305)

(126)
 -
4,109

182
(2,637)
 -
1,654

5,886
49

(768)
 -

 -
 -
5,167

(108)
 -
 -
5,059

5,886
49

(768)
 -

 -
 -
5,167

(108)
 -
 -
5,059

(4,913)
(630)

199
(31)

(22)
625
(4,772)

933
(10)
49
(3,800)

(1,325)
(77)

198
 -

(22)
3
(1,223)

(408)
(10)
(1)
(1,642)

Total
£000

35,451
6,212

(4,889)
(336)

(148)
565
36,855

490
(2,647)
21
34,719

38,024
6,745

(4,808)
(305)

(148)
3
39,511

(1,315)
(2,647)
(1)
35,548

Certain deferred tax assets and liabilities have been offset. The following is the analysis of the deferred tax balances for financial reporting
purposes:

Deferred tax liabilities
Deferred tax assets

2014

2013

Group
£000

36,014
(1,295)
34,719

Parent
£000

35,559
(11)
35,548

Group
£000

40,116
(3,261)
36,855

Parent
£000

39,548
(37)
39,511

The Group has unused tax losses of £21,392,000 (2013: £22,138,000) arising from life business and capital transactions, which are available
for offset against future profits. No deferred tax asset has been recognised due to the unpredictability of future profit streams.

177   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

30 Other liabilities

Creditors arising out of direct insurance operations
Creditors arising out of reinsurance operations
Other creditors
Amounts owed to related parties
Accruals

Current
Non-current

2014

2013

Group
£000

831
13,034
14,254
103
16,393
44,615

44,285
330

Parent
£000

416
7,578
5,775
721
12,657
27,147

27,147
 -

Group
£000

656
13,578
11,801
117
11,816
37,968

37,682
286

Parent
£000

323
10,015
6,008
218
8,448
25,012

25,012
 -

The Group creditors arising out of reinsurance operations comprises £32,333,000 (2013: £39,745,000) payable net of £19,299,000 (2013:
£26,167,000)
receivable. The Parent balance comprises £26,877,000 (2013: £36,182,000) payable net of £19,299,000 (2013:
£26,167,000) receivable.

The Group amounts owed to related parties comprises £136,000 (2013: £117,000) payable net of £33,000 (2013: £nil) receivable. The
Parent balance comprises £892,000 (2013: £398,000) payable net of £171,000 (2013: £180,000) receivable.

31 Commitments

Capital commitments
At the year end, the Group and Parent had capital commitments of £63,000 relating to computer software (2013: £1,685,000) and £37,000 
relating to furniture, fittings and equipment (2013: £nil).

Operating lease commitments
The Group leases premises and equipment under non-cancellable operating lease agreements. 

The future aggregate minimum lease rentals receivable under non-cancellable operating leases are as follows:

Within 1 year
Between 1 & 5 years
After 5 years

2014

2013

Group
£000

3,749
13,239
24,724
41,712

Parent
£000

3,749
13,239
24,724
41,712

Group
£000

2,780
9,241
19,044
31,065

The future aggregate minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating leases are as follows:

Within 1 year
Between 1 & 5 years
After 5 years

2014

2013

Group
£000

2,285
8,416
6,668
17,369

Parent
£000

1,223
7,189
5,928
14,340

Group
£000

2,901
5,181
1,072
9,154

Parent
£000

2,780
9,241
19,044
31,065

Parent
£000

1,623
3,550
1,065
6,238

Operating lease rentals charged to profit or loss during the year
Total future minimum sublease payments expected to be received 
under non-cancellable subleases 

3,576

2,009

3,671

1,969

 -

 -

68

68

178   

Section 4  Financial Statements32 Parent and subsidiary undertakings

Ultimate parent company and controlling party
The Company is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Ecclesiastical Insurance Group plc. Its ultimate parent and controlling company is Allchurches
Trust Limited. Both companies are incorporated and operate in Great Britain and copies of their financial statements are available from the
registered office as shown on page 182. The parent companies of the smallest and largest groups for which group financial statements are
drawn up are Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc and Allchurches Trust Limited, respectively. All the subsidiaries listed are included within the
consolidated financial statements. Voting rights are in line with the holdings of Ordinary shares.

The Company's interest in Group undertakings at 31 December 2014 is as follows:

Subsidiary undertakings

Incorporated and operating in Great Britain, engaged in investment, insurance 
and financial services or other insurance-related business 

Share capital

Holding of shares by

Parent

Subsidiary

Ecclesiastical Financial Advisory Services Limited
Ecclesiastical Investment Management Limited
Ecclesiastical Life Limited
South Essex Insurance Holdings Limited
South Essex Insurance Brokers Limited

Incorporated in Great Britain, dormant 

Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares
Ordinary shares

100%
100%
100%
100%
 -

E.I.O. Trustees Limited

Ordinary shares

100%

Incorporated and operating in Australia, engaged in insurance business 

 -
 -
 -
 -
100%

 -

 -

Ansvar Insurance Limited

Incorporated in Australia, dormant 

EA Insurance Services Pty Limited

Ordinary shares

100%

Ordinary shares

 -

100%

179   

Section 4  Financial StatementsNOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

33 Related party transactions

Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation and are not included
in the Group analysis, but are included within the Parent analysis below.

The Parent related party transactions below relate to Ecclesiastical Insurance Group plc, the Group and Parent's immediate parent company.
Group and Parent other related parties include the Group's pension plans, fellow subsidiary undertakings and the ultimate parent undertaking.

2014
Group
Trading, investment and other income, including recharges, and amounts received 
Trading, investment and other expenditure, including recharges, and amounts paid
Amounts owed by related parties
Amounts owed to related parties

Parent
Trading, investment and other income, including recharges, and amounts received 
Trading, investment and other expenditure, including recharges, and amounts paid
Amounts owed by related parties
Amounts owed to related parties

2013
Group
Trading, investment and other income, including recharges, and amounts received 
Trading, investment and other expenditure, including recharges, and amounts paid
Amounts owed by related parties
Amounts owed to related parties

Parent
Trading, investment and other income, including recharges, and amounts received 
Trading, investment and other expenditure, including recharges, and amounts paid
Amounts owed by related parties
Amounts owed to related parties

Parent
£000

Subsidiaries
£000

8,050
12,082
19,458
64

8,050
12,082
19,458
64

191
113
15,539
106

191
113
15,539
106

 -
 -
 -
 -

4,942
7,086
14,026
618

 -
 -
 -
 -

9,270
8,423
13,445
101

Other
related
parties
£000

6,882
4,021
1,128
39

5,898
4,021
1,112
39

1,732
3,616
2,027
11

803
3,616
2,022
11

During the year, the Company received premiums, commission and reinsurance recoveries via a related party insurance agency amounting to
£455,000 (2013: £7,096,000) and paid reinsurance protection, commission and claims amounting to £894,000 (2013: £11,608,000).

Transactions and services within the Group are made on commercial terms. Amounts outstanding between Group companies are unsecured,
are not subject to guarantees, and will be settled in cash. No provisions have been made in respect of these balances. 

The remuneration of the Directors, who are the key management personnel of the Group, is disclosed in the Group Remuneration Report in the
Corporate Governance section of this report.

34 Non-adjusting events after the reporting period

On 20 January 2015, Ecclesiastical Financial Advisory Services Limited entered into an agreement to transfer its mortgage business to
Holmesdale Building Society. The transfer was completed on 1 February for consideration of £6,084,000, of which £5,260,000 was received
in cash, with retentions of £824,000 payable over the next seven years.

At the year end date, the assets were classified as held for sale (see note 25). On completion of the transfer of business, a loss of £19,000 was
realised on disposal.

180   

Section 4  Financial StatementsS E C T I O N   F I V E
Other Information

05

Directors and Executive Management 

United Kingdom Regional Centres 

United Kingdom Business Division and 
International Branches 

Insurance Subsidiaries and Agencies 

Notice of Meeting 

182

184

185

186

187

Section 5  Other Information

181   

DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT

Directors

Group Management Board

*
*

*

*
*
*

*
*

W. M. Samuel BSc, FCA Chairman
D. Christie BA, BSc (Econ) Dip. Ed. Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director
I. G. Campbell BSc (Econ) (Hons), ACA Group Chief Financial Officer
T. J. Carroll BA, MBA, FCII
M. C. J. Hews BSc (Hons), FIA Group Chief Executive
J. F. Hylands FFA
A. P. Latham ACII
C. H. Taylor BSc (Hons) Banking and International Finance
S. J. Whyte MC Inst. M, ACII Deputy Group Chief Executive
The Venerable C. L. Wilson
D. P. Wilson BA (Hons), FCII

M. C. J. Hews BSc (Hons), FIA Group Chief Executive
S. J. Whyte MC Inst. M, ACII Deputy Group Chief Executive
I. G. Campbell BSc (Econ) (Hons), ACA Group Chief Financial Officer
R. Cox FCII, DMS
K. S. Jones MA (Oxon), MSc, MBA
J. Schofield CFIIA
C. M. Taplin BSc (Hons), MSc, MBA

Company Secretary

Mrs R. J. Hall FCIS

Registered and Head Office

Beaufort House
Brunswick Road
Gloucester GL1 1JZ
Tel: 0845 777 3322

Company Registration Number

24869

Investment Management Office

Legal advisors

24 Monument Street
London EC3R 8AJ
Tel: 0845 604 4840

Addleshaw Goddard LLP
Leeds

Burgess Salmon LLP
Bristol

Charles Russell Speechlys LLP
London

DAC Beachcrofts LLP
Leeds

Harrison Clark Rickerbys LLP
Cheltenham

Matheson
Dublin

McDowell Purcell Solicitors
Dublin

Pinsent Masons LLP
Birmingham

Wragge Lawrence Graham and Co. LLP
London

*

Non-Executive Directors

182    Section 5  Other Information

DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT

Auditor

Registrar

Deloitte LLP
London

Computershare Investor Services PLC
The Pavilions
Bridgwater Road
Bristol BS13 8AE

Section 5  Other Information

183   

UNITED KINGDOM REGIONAL CENTRES

Central and South West

Office:

London and South East

Office:

Tel:

North

Tel:

Office:

Tel:

7th Floor
9 Colmore Row
Birmingham B3 2BJ
0845 605 0209

24 Monument Street
London EC3R 8AJ
0845 608 0069

St Ann's House
St Ann's Place
Manchester M2 7LP
0845 603 7554

184    Section 5  Other Information

UNITED KINGDOM BUSINESS DIVISION AND INTERNATIONAL BRANCHES

Ansvar Insurance
Business Division

Managing Director:
Office:

Canada Branch

Tel:

Deputy Group Chief Executive,
Ecclesiastical Insurance and
General Manager and Chief Agent:
Chief Office:

- Eastern Region:

Regional Vice President:

- Western Region:

Regional Vice President:

- Pacific Region:

Regional Vice President:

- Central Region:

Acting Regional Vice President:

- Risk Managed and
National Accounts:

Vice President:

Ireland Branch

Managing Director:
Office:

R. Lane TD, BA, FCII, MCMI, MCGI
Ansvar House
St Leonards Road
Eastbourne, East Sussex BN21 3UR
01323 737541

S. J. Whyte MC Inst M, ACII
20 Eglinton Avenue West, Suite 2200
P.O. Box 2004
Toronto, Ontario M4R 1K8

M. Thornhill BA, CRM, FCIP
1969 Upper Water Street, Suite 2106
Purdy's Wharf, Tower 2
Halifax, Nova Scotia B3J 3R7

K. Webster CRM, FCIP
Suite 521, 10333 Southport Road S.W.
Calgary, Alberta T2W 3X6

B. Mitchell, CIP
Suite 1795, Two Bentall Centre
555 Burrard Street, Box 239
Vancouver, British Columbia V7X 1M9

C. Robertson, ACII
20 Eglinton Avenue West, Suite 2200
P.O. Box 2004
Toronto, Ontario M4R 1K8

J. Wleugel BA, CRM
20 Eglinton Avenue West, Suite 2200
P.O. Box 2004
Toronto, Ontario M4R 1K8

D. G. Lane B.Comm (Hons), Certified Insurance Director
1st Floor
Kilmore House
Spencer Dock
Northwall Quay
Dublin 1

Section 5  Other Information

185   

 
 
 
 
 
 
INSURANCE SUBSIDIARIES AND AGENCIES

Ansvar Insurance Limited

Chief Executive Officer:

Head Office:

Ecclesiastical Life Limited

Head Office:

Ecclesiastical Underwriting
Management Limited

South Essex Insurance
Brokers Limited

Office: 

Director:
Office:

Tel:

W. R. Hutcheon MBA, GCM, Graduate AICD,
Fellow ANZIIF (CIP), Associate Fellow AIM
Ansvar House
Level 12
432 St Kilda Road
Melbourne VIC 3004

Beaufort House
Brunswick Road
Gloucester GL1 1JZ

24 Monument Street
London EC3R 8AJ

B. W. Fehler
South Essex House, North Road
South Ockendon
Essex RM15 5BE
01708 850000

186    Section 5  Other Information

NOTICE OF MEETING

NOTICE is hereby given that the Annual General Meeting of Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc will be held at Beaufort House, Brunswick Road, 
Gloucester, GL1 1JZ on Thursday, 18th June 2015 at 12:15pm for the following purposes:

Ordinary business
1.

To receive the Report of the Directors and Accounts for the year ended 31st December 2014 and the report of the auditors 
thereon.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

14.

To re-elect Mr W. M. Samuel as a Director.*

To re-elect Mr D. Christie as a Director.*

To re-elect Mr T. J. Carroll as a Director.*

To re-elect Mr M. C. J. Hews as a Director.*

To re-elect Mr J. F. Hylands as a Director.* 

To re-elect Mr. A. P. Latham as a Director.*

To re-elect Ms D. P. Wilson as a Director.*

To re-elect The Venerable C. L. Wilson as a Director.*

To re-elect Ms. S. J. Whyte as a Director.*

To elect Mr I. G. Campbell as a Director.*

To elect Mrs C. H. Taylor as a Director.*

To consider the declaration of a dividend.

To re-appoint Deloitte LLP as auditors and authorise the Directors to fix their remuneration.

By order of the Board

Mrs R. J. Hall, Secretary
25 March 2015

* Brief biographies of the Directors seeking election or re-election are shown on pages 70 to 71 of the 2014 Annual Report. All Non-Executive Directors seeking re-
election have been subject to formal performance evaluation by the Chairman who is satisfied that the performance of each Non-Executive Director is effective and 
sufficient time has been spent on the Company’s affairs.

Only a member holding Ordinary shares, or their duly appointed representative(s), is entitled to attend, vote and speak at the annual general meeting.

A member holding Ordinary shares is entitled to appoint a proxy or proxies (who need not be a member of the Company) to exercise all or any of their rights to 
attend, speak and vote on their behalf at the annual general meeting. Such a member may appoint more than one proxy in relation to the annual general meeting 
provided that each proxy is appointed to exercise the rights attached to a different share or shares held by that member. 

Any corporation which is a member holding Ordinary shares can appoint one or more corporate representatives who may exercise, on its behalf, all of the same 
powers as that corporation could exercise if it were an individual member, provided that they do not do so in relation to the same share or shares and that they act 
within the powers of their appointment.

This notice is sent purely for information to the holders of 8.625% Non-Cumulative Irredeemable Preference shares who are not entitled to attend and vote at the 
annual general meeting. 

Section 5  Other Information

187   

Annual Report & Accounts 2014
Ecclesiastical Insurance Office plc 
Beaufort House, Brunswick Road, Gloucester, GL1 1JZ

Ecclesiastical  Insurance  Office  plc  (EIO)  Reg.  No.  24869.    Registered  in  England  at  Beaufort  House,  Brunswick  Road,  Gloucester,  GL1  1JZ,  UK.  EIO  is  authorised  by  the  Prudential 
Regulation Authority and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority and the Prudential Regulation Authority.